summaryrefslogtreecommitdiff
path: root/Master/texmf-dist/doc/texsis/base
diff options
context:
space:
mode:
authorKarl Berry <karl@freefriends.org>2009-05-24 00:31:38 +0000
committerKarl Berry <karl@freefriends.org>2009-05-24 00:31:38 +0000
commit3db8854079e5f66bff8e115d3e53b74a9e6b1b94 (patch)
treec76f77b61118c210746b2b9a513369908249ae7e /Master/texmf-dist/doc/texsis/base
parent631b5bbb9b2878fe0c658883d594124839413456 (diff)
move doc for lesser-used formats to subdirs
git-svn-id: svn://tug.org/texlive/trunk@13440 c570f23f-e606-0410-a88d-b1316a301751
Diffstat (limited to 'Master/texmf-dist/doc/texsis/base')
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/texsis/base/COPYING287
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/texsis/base/Example.tex232
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/texsis/base/Fonts.tex112
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/texsis/base/INSTALL17
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/texsis/base/Install.tex66
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/texsis/base/MANIFEST80
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/texsis/base/Manual.fgl11
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/texsis/base/Manual.ref174
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/texsis/base/Manual.tbl24
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/texsis/base/Manual.tex22
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/texsis/base/NEWS61
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/texsis/base/README151
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/texsis/base/TXSapxF.doc55
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/texsis/base/TXScover.doc28
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/texsis/base/TXSdcol.doc300
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/texsis/base/TXSdoc.doc55
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/texsis/base/TXSdoc0.doc293
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/texsis/base/TXSdocM.doc142
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/texsis/base/TXSend.doc137
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/texsis/base/TXSenvmt.doc610
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/texsis/base/TXSeqns.doc370
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/texsis/base/TXSfigs.doc703
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/texsis/base/TXSfmts.doc604
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/texsis/base/TXSfonts.doc279
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/texsis/base/TXSinstl.doc358
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/texsis/base/TXSintro.doc353
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/texsis/base/TXSletr.doc588
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/texsis/base/TXSmisc.doc298
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/texsis/base/TXSprns.doc95
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/texsis/base/TXSrefs.doc474
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/texsis/base/TXSrevs.doc484
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/texsis/base/TXSruled.doc604
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/texsis/base/TXSsects.doc899
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/texsis/base/TXSsite.000164
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/texsis/base/TXSsymb.doc199
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/texsis/base/TXStags.doc212
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/texsis/base/index.tex296
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/texsis/base/letr230
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/texsis/base/penguin.eps507
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/texsis/base/penguin2.eps1041
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/texsis/base/texsis.1219
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/texsis/base/texsis.el46
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/texsis/base/texsis.lsm46
43 files changed, 0 insertions, 11926 deletions
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/texsis/base/COPYING b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/texsis/base/COPYING
deleted file mode 100644
index 2d35a8a1456..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/texsis/base/COPYING
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,287 +0,0 @@
- Texsis Copyright, Warranty (lack thereof),
- and Distribution Restrictions
-
-
-License and Distribution
-========================
-
-TeXsis is free software which can be redistributed and/or modified
-under the terms of the LaTeX Project Public License (LPPL), as
-reproduced below. Any reference to "The Program" in the license
-refers to TeXsis and its associated files. A list of the files
-covered by the LPPL is provided in the file called MANIFEST.
-
- Note that TeXsis is based on Plain TeX, not LaTeX, and so the rules
-for naming files with the extensions .ins, .fd, and .cfg do not apply.
-The only special extension used by TeXsis is .txs for style files, and
-these should be treated the same as the other TeXsis source files
-unless a statement in that file says otherwise.
-
-
-COPYRIGHT
-=========
-
-Unless specified otherwise in individual files, TeXsis is Copyright
-1987 1988 1989 1990 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000, 2001 by
-Eric Myers and Frank E. Paige. Other copyrights exist and are noted
-in the individual files that are affected.
-
-
-HISTORY
-=======
-
-Prior to TeXsis version 2.18 the source code to TeXsis was covered by a
-simple copyright declaration and a statement that permission was granted
-to use the software by any member the academic community in conjunction
-with basic research, but that the software could not be used or
-distributed for profit without permission. This was sufficient in the
-1980's when TeXsis was being developed specifically for physics
-researchers, but by the end of the 1990's the issues surrounding software
-licensing had become more developed and we decided that we needed a more
-explicit licensing statement and something a bit more open than just
-"academic use only".
-
- We originally considered the GNU Public License (GPL) and the
-"Lesser" or "Library" version of that license (the LGPL), as well as
-the BSD License, the "Artistic" License, and in fact we looked at most
-of the licences approved by the Open Source Initiative (see
-http://www.opensource.org/licenses/ ). We also considered writing our
-own custom licensing statement, but we eventually decided against
-this. We felt that it was important to choose a well-known license so
-that users would know the basic terms of the license without having to
-read all the details. In the end we found that the LaTeX Project
-Public Licence (LPPL) suited the needs and the spirit of TeXsis most
-closely, and so versions 2.18 of TeXsis and beyond are covered by the
-LPPL, which is reproduced below or can be obtained from the TeXsis
-website.
-
- Please note that the LPPL only applies to the TeXsis source code and
-code derived from it, but it does not apply to TeXsis style files (or
-other files) which were written independently without using TeXsis
-source code. We hope that the authors of style files will choose to
-follow our lead and license their works under the LPPL, but they are
-free to choose whatever license they deem appropriate. Note also that
-under the terms of the LPPL it is possible to add further restrictions
-to a file, as long as they are consistent with the "Conditions on
-individual files" section of the LPPL (see below).
-
- TeXsis has always been an "Open Source" project, and so we chose the
-LPPL as the best way to make TeXsis freely available to everyone but
-protect it from the possible corruption of propagating different
-versions of similar files.
-
-----------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-
-
-LaTeX Project Public License
-============================
-
-LPPL Version 1.0 1999-03-01
-
-Copyright 1999 LaTeX3 Project
- Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies
- of this license document, but modification is not allowed.
-
-
-Preamble
-========
-
-The LaTeX Project Public License (LPPL) is the license under which the
-base LaTeX distribution is distributed. As described below you may use
-this licence for any software that you wish to distribute.
-
-It may be particularly suitable if your software is TeX related (such
-as a LaTeX package file) but it may be used for any software, even if
-it is unrelated to TeX.
-
-To use this license, the files of your distribution should have an
-explicit copyright notice giving your name and the year, together
-with a reference to this license.
-
-A typical example would be
-
- %% pig.sty
- %% Copyright 2001 M. Y. Name
-
- % This program can redistributed and/or modified under the terms
- % of the LaTeX Project Public License Distributed from CTAN
- % archives in directory macros/latex/base/lppl.txt; either
- % version 1 of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
-
-Given such a notice in the file, the conditions of this document would
-apply, with:
-
-`The Program' referring to the software `pig.sty' and
-`The Copyright Holder' referring to the person `M. Y. Name'.
-
-To see a real example, see the file legal.txt which carries the
-copyright notice for the base latex distribution.
-
-This license gives terms under which files of The Program may be
-distributed and modified. Individual files may have specific further
-constraints on modification, but no file should have restrictions on
-distribution other than those specified below.
-This is to ensure that a distributor wishing to distribute a complete
-unmodified copy of The Program need only check the conditions in this
-file, and does not need to check every file in The Program for extra
-restrictions. If you do need to modify the distribution terms of some
-files, do not refer to this license, instead distribute The Program
-under a different license. You may use the parts of the text of LPPL as
-a model for your own license, but your license should not directly refer
-to the LPPL or otherwise give the impression that The Program is
-distributed under the LPPL.
-
-
-
-The LaTeX Project Public License
-================================
-Terms And Conditions For Copying, Distribution And Modification
-===============================================================
-
-
-WARRANTY
-========
-
-There is no warranty for The Program, to the extent permitted by
-applicable law. Except when otherwise stated in writing, The
-Copyright Holder provides The Program `as is' without warranty of any
-kind, either expressed or implied, including, but not limited to, the
-implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular
-purpose. The entire risk as to the quality and performance of the
-program is with you. Should The Program prove defective, you assume
-the cost of all necessary servicing, repair or correction.
-
-In no event unless required by applicable law or agreed to in writing
-will The Copyright Holder, or any of the individual authors named in
-the source for The Program, be liable to you for damages, including
-any general, special, incidental or consequential damages arising out
-of any use of The Program or out of inability to use The Program
-(including but not limited to loss of data or data being rendered
-inaccurate or losses sustained by you or by third parties as a result
-of a failure of The Program to operate with any other programs), even
-if such holder or other party has been advised of the possibility of
-such damages.
-
-
-DISTRIBUTION
-============
-
-Redistribution of unchanged files is allowed provided that all files
-that make up the distribution of The Program are distributed.
-In particular this means that The Program has to be distributed
-including its documentation if documentation was part of the original
-distribution.
-
-The distribution of The Program will contain a prominent file
-listing all the files covered by this license.
-
-If you receive only some of these files from someone, complain!
-
-The distribution of changed versions of certain files included in the
-The Program, and the reuse of code from The Program, are allowed
-under the following restrictions:
-
- * It is allowed only if the legal notice in the file does not
- expressly forbid it.
- See note below, under "Conditions on individual files".
-
- * You rename the file before you make any changes to it, unless the
- file explicitly says that renaming is not required. Any such changed
- files must be distributed under a license that forbids distribution
- of those files, and any files derived from them, under the names used
- by the original files in the distribution of The Program.
-
- * You change any `identification string' in The Program to clearly
- indicate that the file is not part of the standard system.
-
- * If The Program includes an `error report address' so that errors
- may be reported to The Copyright Holder, or other specified
- addresses, this address must be changed in any modified versions of
- The Program, so that reports for files not maintained by the
- original program maintainers are directed to the maintainers of the
- changed files.
-
- * You acknowledge the source and authorship of the original version
- in the modified file.
-
- * You also distribute the unmodified version of the file or
- alternatively provide sufficient information so that the
- user of your modified file can be reasonably expected to be
- able to obtain an original, unmodified copy of The Program.
- For example, you may specify a URL to a site that you expect
- will freely provide the user with a copy of The Program (either
- the version on which your modification is based, or perhaps a
- later version).
-
- * If The Program is intended to be used with, or is based on, LaTeX,
- then files with the following file extensions which have special
- meaning in LaTeX Software, have special modification rules under the
- license:
-
- - Files with extension `.ins' (installation files): these files may
- not be modified at all because they contain the legal notices
- that are placed in the generated files.
-
- - Files with extension `.fd' (LaTeX font definitions files): these
- files are allowed to be modified without changing the name, but
- only to enable use of all available fonts and to prevent attempts
- to access unavailable fonts. However, modified files are not
- allowed to be distributed in place of original files.
-
- - Files with extension `.cfg' (configuration files): these files
- can be created or modified to enable easy configuration of the
- system. The documentation in cfgguide.tex in the base LaTeX
- distribution describes when it makes sense to modify or generate
- such files.
-
-
-The above restrictions are not intended to prohibit, and hence do
-not apply to, the updating, by any method, of a file so that it
-becomes identical to the latest version of that file in The Program.
-
-========================================================================
-
-NOTES
-=====
-
-We believe that these requirements give you the freedom you to make
-modifications that conform with whatever technical specifications you
-wish, whilst maintaining the availability, integrity and reliability of
-The Program. If you do not see how to achieve your goal whilst
-adhering to these requirements then read the document cfgguide.tex
-in the base LaTeX distribution for suggestions.
-
-Because of the portability and exchangeability aspects of systems
-like LaTeX, The LaTeX3 Project deprecates the distribution of
-non-standard versions of components of LaTeX or of generally available
-contributed code for them but such distributions are permitted under the
-above restrictions.
-
-The document modguide.tex in the base LaTeX distribution details
-the reasons for the legal requirements detailed above.
-Even if The Program is unrelated to LaTeX, the argument in
-modguide.tex may still apply, and should be read before
-a modified version of The Program is distributed.
-
-
-Conditions on individual files
-==============================
-
-The individual files may bear additional conditions which supersede
-the general conditions on distribution and modification contained in
-this file. If there are any such files, the distribution of The
-Program will contain a prominent file that lists all the exceptional
-files.
-
-Typical examples of files with more restrictive modification
-conditions would be files that contain the text of copyright notices.
-
- * The conditions on individual files differ only in the
- extent of *modification* that is allowed.
-
- * The conditions on *distribution* are the same for all the files.
- Thus a (re)distributor of a complete, unchanged copy of The Program
- need meet only the conditions in this file; it is not necessary to
- check the header of every file in the distribution to check that a
- distribution meets these requirements.
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/texsis/base/Example.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/texsis/base/Example.tex
deleted file mode 100644
index 9de019e32c3..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/texsis/base/Example.tex
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,232 +0,0 @@
-%% file: Example.tex (TeXsis version 2.17)
-% $Revision: 17.0 $ : $Date: 1994/11/30 21:53:40 $ : $Author: myers $
-%======================================================================*
-% This is a sample paper typeset with TeXsis, to give you a quick idea
-% of how it's done. Note: this is just hacked together from an old
-% conference proceedings, so it's not a real paper. -EAM
-
-
-% This lets your manuscript run under either mTeXsis (from
-% mtexsis.tex) or the full TeXsis distribution
-
-\ifx\texsis\undefined \input mtexsis.tex \fi
-
-\texsis % this turns on TeXsis
-
-
-% Saying \draft puts a time-stamp, page number, etc. on the page,
-% but you don't want it for the final version of the paper.
-%%\draft
-
-
-% Document Format: uncomment one of these lines to select the style
-% in which the paper is printed:
-%
-%\preprint % Preprint style
-%\nuclproc % Nuclear Physics Proceedings style
-%\PhysRev % Physical Review style
-
-
-% ---
-
-% some macros used in this paper:
-
-\def\Kb{{\bar K^2 \over \beta_R}}
-
-% ---
-% BEGIN:
-
-\titlepage % begin title page material
-\title
-Noncompact nonlinear sigma models
-and numerical quantum gravity
-\endtitle
-\author
-Eric Myers, Bryce DeWitt, Rob Harrington, and Arie Kapulkin
-Center for Relativity, Department of Physics\\
-University of Texas, Austin, Texas 78705 USA
-\endauthor
-\abstract
-Studying the $O(2,1)$ nonlinear sigma model is a useful step toward
-determining whether or not a consistent quantum theory of gravity (based
-on the Einstein-Hilbert action) exists. Like gravity, the sigma model
-is not perturbatively renormalizable, and corresponding Feynman graphs
-in the two theories have the same na\"{\i}ve degrees of divergence. Both
-theories also have a single overall dimensionful coupling constant, and
-both have a configuration space which is noncompact and curved. The
-sigma model allows one to study the renormalizability properties of such
-theories without the added complications of local symmetries.
-\endabstract
-\bigskip
-\endtitlepage % will start \doublecolumns for \nuclproc
-
-% ---
-% Now start in on the text of the paper...
-% ---
-
-Quantum Field Theory and the theory of General Relativity are,
-separately, probably the two most successful physical theories of this
-century. This notwithstanding, nobody has yet been able to bring the
-two together into one complete and consistent quantum theory of gravity.
-One major impediment to such a theory is that, unlike gauge field
-theories, gravity with the Einstein-Hilbert action
-$$
-S = {1 \over 16\pi G_N} \int d^4x\, \sqrt{g} R
-\EQN 1$$
-is not renormalizable, at least not by the usual methods of perturbation
-theory. This has lead a number of physicists to adopt the position that
-General Relativity is only the low energy limit of some other quantum
-theory, such as superstring theory. An alternative view which one
-can adopt, however, is that the failure of perturbation theory in the
-case of gravity is not an indication that the theory is inconsistent,
-but only that the mathematical tools one has used are inadequate. To
-pursue a quantum theory of gravity in this direction one needs a
-nonperturbative method of calculation: the methods of lattice field
-theory, which have already been applied to gauge theories, are
-immediately suggested. One also needs a simple model with which to test
-the ideas of nonperturbative renormalizability without the complicated
-structure of the full theory of General Relativity. This paper
-describes our work with such a model, the $O(2,1)$ noncompact nonlinear
-$\sigma$-model.\reference{DeWitt, 1989}
-B.S.~DeWitt, ``Nonlinear sigma models in 4 dimensions: a lattice definition,''
-lectures given at the International School of Cosmology and Gravitation,
-``Ettore Majorana'' Centre for Scientific Culture, Erice, Sicily, May 1989
-\endreference\relax
-
-The model we consider consists of three scalar fields $\varphi_a$
-described by the action
-$$
-S = \half \mu^2 \int d^4 x \, \eta^{ab}
- \del_\mu \varphi_a \del^\mu \varphi_b \,,
-\EQN 2$$
-with $\eta_{ab}={\rm diag}(-1,+1,+1)$ and with the fields obeying
-the constraint
-$$
--\varphi_0^2 + \varphi_1^2 + \varphi_2^2 = -1
- \qquad (\varphi_0 > 0) \,.
-\EQN 3$$
-The manifold of constraint is the two dimensional surface of constant
-negative curvature represented schematically
-in \Fig{1}. It is the coset space
-$O(2,1)/O(2)\times Z_2$, but for simplicity we refer to \Eqs{2} and
-\Ep{3} as the $O(2,1)$ nonlinear $\sigma$-model. There are several
-reasons this model is of interest:
-
-\item{1)}
-For dimensionless fields $\varphi_a$ the coupling constant $\mu^2$ has
-units of $(length)^2$, the same as $1/G_N$ in the Einstein-Hilbert
-action. Thus $\mu$ plays the role of the Planck mass in the theory.
-Furthermore this means that Feynman graphs in the $\sigma$-model have
-the same na\"{\i}ve degree of divergence as similar graphs in gravity,
-so that the model has the same renormalizability structure (actually the
-same perturbative non-renormalizability structure) as the theory of
-gravity.
-
-\item{2)}
-As in gravity, the fields of the $\sigma$-model obey a constraint,
-and the configuration space defined by the constraint is both {\it
-curved} and {\it noncompact}.
-
-\item{3)}
-The surface of constraint is invariant under global $O(2,1)$
-transformations, but
-% unlike gravity
-there is no local symmetry in the
-model. This is a great simplification which lets us study just the
-renormalizability properties of the model without the added
-complications introduced by local symmetries.
-
-\item{4)}
-Unlike gravity, the Euclidean action of the $\sigma$-model is bounded
-from below. The unboundedness of the gravitational action is a serious
-problem which must be dealt with at some point, but one which we want to
-avoid entirely for now.
-
-\figure{1}
-\forceleft
-\vskip\colwidth % just leave some space to glue in figure
-%%\epsfbox{o21.ps} % or include with epsf
-\caption{The constraint surface of the $O(2,1)$ noncompact nonlinear
-$\sigma$-model.}
-\endfigure
-
-\medskip
-
-The transcription of the $\sigma$-model to the lattice is more or less
-standard with one exception, our definition of the lattice derivative.
-Rather than using the simple difference between field values at
-neighboring lattice sites we use the geodesic distance between two
-points on the constraint surface. The lattice action is thus
-$$
-S = \half \mu^2 \sum_x a^4 \sum_{\hat\mu}
- [{ \Delta(\varphi(x+\hat\mu a), \varphi(x)) \over a}]^2 \,,
-\EQN 4$$
-where $\Delta(\varphi,\varphi^\prime)$ is the arc length between
-$\varphi$ and $\varphi^\prime$ on the manifold,
-$$
-\Delta(\varphi,\varphi^\prime) =
- \cosh^{-1}(-\eta^{ab} \varphi_a\varphi^\prime_b) \,.
-\EQN 5$$
-Our reason for this choice is that it is consistent with the idea that
-the fields be restricted only to the constraint surface of the
-$\sigma$-model.
-In contrast, simply taking the na\"{\i}ve difference between fields, as
-is usually done for compact $\sigma$-models, produces a difference
-vector which does not lie in the manifold of constraint. While both
-methods lead to the same classical continuum limit there is nothing that
-guarantees that the quantum theories obtained from the two lattice
-definitions will be the same.
-
- It is convenient to factor the dependence on the lattice spacing $a$
-out to the front of \Eq{4} and to define the dimensionless coupling
-constant $\beta = \mu^2 a^2$. If the theory is nonperturbatively
-renormalizable the Planck mass $\mu$ will be renormalized to $\mu_R$,
-which results in a renormalized dimensionless coupling constant
-$$
-\beta_R = \mu_R^2 a^2 \,.
-\EQN 6$$
-The renormalized Planck mass defines a characteristic length scale
-$1/\mu_R$ for the interactions of the theory. The lattice approximation
-to the continuum theory will be reliable when $a \ll 1/\mu_R \ll L=Na$.
-Considering each inequality separately, this requires
-$$
-\mu_R a = \sqrt{\beta_R} \ll 1
-\qquad \hbox{\rm and} \qquad
- N \gg {1\over \sqrt{\beta_R}}
-\EQN 7$$
-In the continuum limit $a \to 0$, hence $\beta \to 0$, and for $\mu_R$
-to remain finite this requires $\beta_R \to 0$. If this condition is
-not fulfilled then it would appear to be impossible to define a
-consistent quantum field theory from the $\sigma$-model, even
-nonperturbatively.
-
-%----------------------------
-\figure{2}
-\forceright % force this to the righthand column
-\vskip\colwidth % leave this much space
-%%\epsfbox{beta.ps} % or include with EPSF
-\caption{The renormalized dimensionless coupling constant $\beta_R$
-plotted against the bare coupling constant $\beta$ for an $N=10$
-lattice.}
-\endfigure
-%----------------------------
-
-In \Fig{2} we show $\beta_R$ plotted as a function of $\beta$ as
-obtained from Monte Carlo simulations on an $N=10$ lattice. As can
-clearly be seen, $\beta_R$ vanishes nowhere. We therefore conclude that
-the $O(2,1)$ nonlinear sigma model does not have an interacting
-continuum limit. One may view $1/\mu_R$ as the renormalized coupling
-constant in the theory, in which case our result implies that the model
-is ``trivial'' (in the technical sense) in that the continuum limit is a
-free field theory.
-
-This work was supported by NSF grants PHY\-8617103 and PHY\-8919177.
-
-\smallskip
-%\nosechead{References} % header for references
-%\nobreak
-\ListReferences
-
-\bye
-
-%>>> EOF Example.tex <<<
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/texsis/base/Fonts.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/texsis/base/Fonts.tex
deleted file mode 100644
index 70b6822f611..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/texsis/base/Fonts.tex
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,112 +0,0 @@
-%% File: Fonts.tex (TeXsis version 2.16)
-% $Revision: 16.2 $ : $Date: 1994/09/14 14:57:08 $ : $Author: myers $
-%=======================================================================*
-% TeXsis Manual -- TYPE SIZES AND STYLES : This file is a part of TeXsis
-% (C) Copyright 1989, 1992 by Eric Myers and Frank E. Paige
-%======================================================================*
-%
-\texsis\book
-\singlespaced
-\TeXquoteon % | is a TeX quote (printed tt)
-\input TXSdocM.doc % macros for manual
-
-\titlepage
-\line{\revdate \hfill \TeXsis\ \fmtversion} % a banner of sorts
-\vbox{\vskip.75in} % some whitespace
-\title
-\TeXsis
-\TeX\ Macros for Physicists
-\bigskip
--- Font Tables --
-\endtitle
-%
-\author
-Eric Myers
-Department of Physics and Astronomy
-Vassar College
-Poughkeepsie, New York 12601~USA
-\endauthor
-\and
-\author
-Frank E. Paige
-Physics Department
-Brookhaven National Laboratory
-Upton, New York 11973~USA
-\endauthor
-%
-\abstract
-This supplement to the \TeXsis\ manual contains tables of the characters
-in all of the available fonts.
-\endabstract
-\endtitlepage
-
-\parskip=\medskipamount % some extra space between paragraphs
-
-\appendix{B}{Font Tables}
-
-\midtable{Fonts}
-\Caption
-Fonts used in \TeXsis, with the design size names and the required
-sizes in points.
-\endCaption
-\ruledtable
- Base Name | Description | Sizes (pt) \crthick
- cmr10 | Roman | 5~~7~~9~~10~~11~~12~~14~~16~~20~~24 \cr
- cmti10 | Text italic | 5~~7~~9~~10~~11~~12~~14~~16~~20~~24 \cr
- cmsl10 | Slanted | 5~~7~~9~~10~~11~~12~~14~~16~~20~~24 \cr
- cmbx10 | Roman bold | 5~~7~~9~~10~~11~~12~~14~~16~~20~~24 \cr
- cmmi10 | Math italic | 5~~7~~9~~10~~11~~12~~14~~16~~20~~24 \cr
- cmsy10 | Math symbol | 5~~7~~9~~10~~11~~12~~14~~16~~20~~24 \cr
- cmex10 | Math extended | ~~~~~~~~~10~~11~~12~~14~~16~~20~~24 \cr
- cmtt10 | Typewriter | ~~~~~~~~~10~~11~~12~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ \cr
- cmss10 | Sans serif | ~~~~~~~~~10~~11~~12~~14~~~~~~~~~~~~ \crthick
- cmmib10 | Math italic bold | ~~~~~~~~~10~~11~~12~~14~~16~~20~~24 \cr
- cmbsy10 | Bold symbol | ~~~~~~~~~10~~11~~12~~14~~16~~20~~24
-\endruledtable
-\endtable
-
- The Computer Modern fonts that are used either by Plain \TeX\ or by
-\TeXsis\ and the required sizes for each are listed in \Tbl{Fonts}. The
-|cmmib10| and |cmbsy10| fonts may not exist in all installations, but
-they will not be loaded unless |\mib| is used, so they are not required.
-The command |\printfont{|\meta{font}|}| can be used to print a table of
-the characters in any \meta{font}, e.g.,
-\TeXexample
-\printfont{cmr10}
-|endTeXexample
-Such tables are given on the following pages.
-
- Most versions of \TeX\ now use Computer Modern fonts, but some
-still use the older American Modern fonts. If you have problems with the
-fonts, try editing |TXSfonts.tex|, replacing all occurrences of |=cm|
-with |=am| and then recompiling \TeXsis. Mixing the two types of fonts
-will produce errors.
-
-\vfil\eject
-
-% \Printfont uses \printfont from printfont.txs, but puts the font
-% table in a nice table with a caption.
-
-\def\Printfont#1#2{% Print a nice font table, with caption
- \table{#2}%
- \printfont{#1}%
- \caption{Font {\tt #1} -- #2}%
- \endtable}
-
-
-\Printfont{cmr10}{Roman}
-\Printfont{cmti10}{Text Italic}
-\Printfont{cmsl10}{Slanted}
-\Printfont{cmbx10}{Roman bold}
-\Printfont{cmmi10}{Math italic}
-\Printfont{cmsy10}{Math symbol}
-\Printfont{cmex10}{Math extended}
-\Printfont{cmtt10}{Typewriter}
-\Printfont{cmss10}{Sans serif}
-\Printfont{cmmib10}{Math italic bold}
-\Printfont{cmbsy10}{Math bold symbol}
-
-\bye
-
-%>>> EOF Fonts.tex <<<
-
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/texsis/base/INSTALL b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/texsis/base/INSTALL
deleted file mode 100644
index 288b8ee4160..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/texsis/base/INSTALL
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,17 +0,0 @@
-texsis/INSTALL - How to get the installation instructions
-
- A complete set of instructions for installing TeXsis on
-Unix, VMS, and DOS PC's is given in the appendix of the TeXsis
-manual. You can print this appendix using plain TeX with the
-file Install.tex. (You must also have the files TXSinstl.doc,
-TXSmacs.tex, TXSenvmt.tex and TXSdocM.doc in the current
-directory or input path.) A pre-processed version is in the file
-Install.ps.
-
- If you are running TeX 3.0 or later on a Unix machine you can
-probably install TeXsis on your system by simply editing the
-parameters in the Makefile and the proto-site file TXSsite.000
-and saying `make install`. If you have any problems with this
-see the full instructions.
-
-Eric Myers <texsis@feynman.physics.lsa.umich.edu> 12 November 1994
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/texsis/base/Install.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/texsis/base/Install.tex
deleted file mode 100644
index afa76f3e66d..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/texsis/base/Install.tex
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,66 +0,0 @@
-%% file: Install.tex (TeXsis version 2.17)
-% $Revision: 17.2 $ : $Date: 1997/08/27 21:44:25 $ : $Author: myers $
-%======================================================================*
-% Installation Instructions for TeXsis E. Myers and F.E. Paige
-%
-% This file can be used with Plain TeX to print the installation
-% instructions for TeXsis (which is an appendix of the manual).
-%
-% For quick installation instructions see the Makefile.
-%
-% Dependencies: TXSmacs.tex, TXSenvmt.tex, TXSinstl.doc
-%======================================================================*
-% TeXsis -- Installation Instructions : This file is a part ot TeXsis
-% (C) Copyright 1989, 1992, 1997 by Eric Myers and Frank E. Paige
-%======================================================================*
-% first load just the parts of TeXsis we need to do the job
-%
-\input TXSmacs % main macros common to all components
-\input TXSenvmt % center and flush environments, etc..
-%
-% now some stand-in definitions for full TeXsis macros
-%
-\def\appendix#1#2{\centerline{\bf\uppercase{#2}}\bigskip}
-\def\revdate{17 September 1994}%
-\def\subsection#1{\bigskip\goodbreak
- \noindent{\bf\uppercase{#1}}\bigskip}
-\def\subsubsection#1{\medskip\noindent{\bf{#1}}\medskip}
-\def\nosechead#1{\medskip\noindent{\bf #1}\medskip}
-\def\label#1{\relax}
-\def\ORGANIZATION{}
-\def\URL#1{{\tt #1}}
-\def\checktags{\relax}\def\pagecheck#1{\relax}
-\def\TeXsis{\TeX sis}
-\def\square{\hbox{{$\sqcup$}\llap{$\sqcap$}}} % box
-\def\ATunlock{\catcode`@=11}\ATunlock % @ is a letter
-\def\singlespaced{\relax}\def\twelvepoint{\relax}%
-\long\def\vfootnote#1#2{}
-\def\idx#1{#1}\def\index#1{}
-
-%
-\newskip\ttglue \ttglue=.5em plus.25em minus.15em
-\newskip\sectionminspace\sectionminspace=0pt
-\newskip\sectionskip \sectionskip=0pt
-\newskip\subsectionskip \subsectionskip=0pt
-%
-\newcount\refnum \refnum=\z@ % counter for reference numbers
-\newcount\@firstrefnum \@firstrefnum=1 % first of a series of refs
-\newcount\@lastrefnum \@lastrefnum=1 % last of a series of refs
-\newcount\tabnum \tabnum=\z@ % table number
-\newcount\fignum \fignum=\z@ % figure number
-\newcount\eqnum \eqnum=\z@ % equation number in section
-
-\def\@chaptID{}\def\@sectID{} % start with these null
-
-\newif\ifContents \newif\ifRunningHeads
-
-% Simpler versions of manual macros
-
-\def\meta#1{\leavevmode\hbox{$\langle$\rm #1\/$\rangle$}} % new \meta
-\def\cs#1{{\tt\string#1}} \def\CS#1{{\tt\string#1}}
-
-\TeXquoteon
-\parskip=0.75\baselineskip
-
-\input TXSinstl.doc % Installation instructions from manual
-\bye
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/texsis/base/MANIFEST b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/texsis/base/MANIFEST
deleted file mode 100644
index c1a8e5d40a4..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/texsis/base/MANIFEST
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,80 +0,0 @@
- File Name Description
-------------------------------------
- AIP.txs American Institute of Physics style file
- COPYING Copyright, Warranty, and Distribution Restrictions
- CVformat.txs style file for Curriculum Vitae
- Elsevier.txs style file for North Holland publications
- Example.tex short example of a paper created with TeXsis
- Fonts.tex Standalone fonttable printout
- Formletr.txs macros for making form letters
- IEEE.txs IEEE proceedings style file
- INSTALL Info on how to get installation instructions
- Install.tex TeXsis installation instructions, in Plain tex
- LPPL LaTeX Project Public License
- MANIFEST This shipping list
- Makefile Unix makefile to build the format and Manual
- Manual.aux label definitions for the TeXsis Manual
- Manual.ind processed index for the TeXsis manual
- Manual.tex TeXsis file to print manual
- PhysRev.txs Physical Review style file
- README General information about this distribution
- TXSapxF.doc Appendix with font tables
- TXSconts.tex table of contents
- TXScover.doc Cover for the Manual
- TXSdcol.doc double column documentation
- TXSdcol.tex double column format
- TXSdoc.doc documentation masterfile
- TXSdoc0.doc documentation title page
- TXSdocM.doc macros for manual
- TXSend.doc end of Manual, acknowledgements and contents
- TXSenvmt.doc documentation for center and list environments
- TXSenvmt.tex special environments, \center, \Listing, etc
- TXSeqns.doc Documentation for equation numbering
- TXSeqns.tex equation numbering
- TXSfigs.doc documentation for figures and tables
- TXSfigs.tex figure and table macros
- TXSfmts.doc documentation for layouts
- TXSfmts.tex document layouts
- TXSfonts.doc font documentation
- TXSfonts.tex TeXsis font definitions
- TXShead.tex running headlines and footlines
- TXSinit.tex initialization stuff and some basic macros
- TXSinstl.doc installation instructions, Manual appendix A
- TXSintro.doc Manual introduction
- TXSletr.doc documentation for letter and memo macros
- TXSletr.tex LetterFormat for typing letters
- TXSmacs.tex miscelaneous macros common to all components
- TXSmemo.tex MemoFormat for typing memoranda
- TXSmisc.doc Documentation for miscellaneous macros
- TXSprns.doc documetation for paren sizing and balancing
- TXSprns.tex automatic paren sizing and balancing
- TXSrefs.doc documentation for reference numbering
- TXSrefs.tex references and citations
- TXSrevs.doc revision history, manual appendix C
- TXSruled.doc documentation for ruled tables
- TXSruled.tex TeX macros for ruled tables, vis. ruled.tex
- TXSsects.doc chapter and section documentation
- TXSsects.tex chapter and section divisions
- TXSsite.000 proto (or example) site dependent info file
- TXSsymb.doc documentation for extended math symbols
- TXSsymb.tex extended math symbols for physics
- TXStags.doc documentation for misc tags
- TXStags.tex tags for ref and eqn numbers, labeling
- TXStitle.tex title page macros for physics papers
- Tablebod.txs old-style table making macros
- WorldSci.txs World Scientific proceedins style file
- color.txs macros to change colors for color PostScript
- index.tex index making macros for Plain TeX & MakeIndex
- nuclproc.txs style file for Nuclear Physics proceedings
- penguin.eps sample encapsulated PostScript figure
- penguin2.eps sample encapsulated PostScript figure
- printfont.txs Macros for printing font tables
- ruled.tex Plain TeX interface for ruled tables
- spine.txs macro for making 3-Ring binder labels
- texsis.1 man page for texsis, in troff -man format
- texsis.bst BIBTeX reference style file for TeXsis
- texsis.el emacs mode for TeXsis
- texsis.tex master file to generate TeXsis format
- thesis.txs style file for a thesis
- twin.txs two pages side by side on one piece of paper
- texsis.lsm Short description of the TeXsis package \ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/texsis/base/Manual.fgl b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/texsis/base/Manual.fgl
deleted file mode 100644
index b05bdc70273..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/texsis/base/Manual.fgl
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,11 +0,0 @@
-% List of Figures for job Manual - created: 2004/6/5 23:{0}2
-% ====================================
-% > Figure 7.1:
-\FIGLitem{Figure} {7.1. }
-Sample figure showing how easy it is
-to insert numbered figures with captions in \TeXsis .\@endFIGLitem
-{46}
-% > Figure 1.17:
-\FIGLitem{Figure} {1.17. }
-A bizarrely placed figure for Section~\use {sect.intro}\@endFIGLitem
-{63}
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/texsis/base/Manual.ref b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/texsis/base/Manual.ref
deleted file mode 100644
index 30bbfa60885..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/texsis/base/Manual.ref
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,174 +0,0 @@
-% List of References for job Manual - created: 2004/6/5 23:{0}2
-% ====================================
-%
-% (1) Reference text for "Knuth" defined on page 1.
-\@refitem{1}{Knuth}
-D.E.~Knuth,
-\booktitle {The \TeX book} (Addison-Wesley, 1986)
-\@endrefitem
-\@refpunct .
-%
-% (2) Reference text for "LaTeX" defined on page 1.
-\@refitem{2}{LaTeX}
-L. Lamport,
-\booktitle {\LaTeX , A Document Preparation System},
-(Addison-Wesley, 1985)
-\@endrefitem
-\@refpunct .
-%
-% (3) Reference text for "Doob" defined on page 1.
-\@refitem{3}{Doob}
-M.~Doob,
-\booktitle {A Gentle Introduction to \TeX \ (A Manual for Self-Study)},
-(\TeX \ User's Group, Providence).
-Also available as a plain \TeX \ file from CTAN or at\n
-\URL {ftp://ftp.texsis.org/pub/tex/gentle.tex}
-\@endrefitem
-\@refpunct .
-%
-% (4) Reference text for "Spivak" defined on page 1.
-\@refitem{4}{Spivak}
-M.~Spivak,
-\booktitle {PC\TeX \ User's Guide.}
-(Documentation distributed with PC\TeX )
-\@endrefitem
-\@refpunct .
-%
-% (5) Reference text for "Feynman, 1949" defined on page 21.
-\@refitem{5}{Feynman, 1949}
-R.P.~Feynman, Phys.\ Rev.\ \vol {76}, 749 (1949)
-\@endrefitem
-\@refpunct .
-%
-% (6) Reference text for "Pauli and Villars, 1949" defined on page 23.
-\@refitem{6}{Pauli and Villars, 1949}
-W.~Pauli and F.~Villars, \journal Rev. Mod. Phys.;21,434(1949)
-\@endrefitem
-\@refpunct ;
-% ... Reference text for "*Schwinger, 1948" defined on page 23.
-\hfill \penalty -\@M
-J.~Schwinger, \journal Phys. Rev.;74,1439(1948)
-\@endrefitem
-\@refpunct .
-%
-% (7) Reference text for "BCS" defined on page 31.
-\@refitem{7}{BCS}
-J.~Bardeen, L.~N.~Cooper, and
-J.~R.~Schrieffer,
-\journal Phys. Rev.;108,1175(1957)
-\@endrefitem
-\@refpunct .
-%
-% (8) Reference text for "DIS" defined on page 35.
-\@refitem{8}{DIS}
-E.D. Bloom, et al.,
-Phys.\ Rev.\ Letters \vol {23}, 930 (1969) \@endrefitem
-\@refpunct .
-%
-% (9) Reference text for "makeindex" defined on page 44.
-\@refitem{9}{makeindex}
-Pehong Chen and
-Michael A. Harrison, ``Index Preparation and Processing'', in {\sl
-Software: Practice and Experience}, \vol {19}, 897-915 (1988)
-\@endrefitem
-\@refpunct .
-%
-% (10) Reference text for "Rokicki" defined on page 48.
-\@refitem{10}{Rokicki}
-Tomas Rokicki, \booktitle {{\tt dvips}
-User's Manual}.
-The source code for {\tt dvips} is available from CTAN
-in the directory {\tt dviware/dvips}
-\@endrefitem
-\@refpunct .
-%
-% (11) Reference text for "FeynDiagram" defined on page 50.
-\@refitem{11}{FeynDiagram}
-Dimm, Bill,
-\booktitle {FeynDiagram Tutorial},
-available at \URL {ftp://ftp.hepth.cornell.edu}
-\@endrefitem
-\@refpunct .
-%
-% (12) Reference text for "Masters" defined on page 52.
-\@refitem{12}{Masters}
-\relax
-D.E.~Knuth, {\sl The \TeX book} (Addison Wesley, 1986), page 245
-\@endrefitem
-\@refpunct .
-%
-% (13) Reference text for "Cowan" defined on page 52.
-\@refitem{13}{Cowan}
-Ray F.~Cowan, {\sl
-Making Tables with Macros} (unpublished)
-\@endrefitem
-\@refpunct .
-%
-% (14) Reference text for "Bozek, 1991" defined on page 54.
-\@refitem{14}{Bozek, 1991}
-J.D.~Bozek, Ph.D. thesis (unpublished), Department of Chemistry,
-University of Western Ontario, London, Ontario CANADA
-\@endrefitem
-\@refpunct .
-%
-% (15) Reference text for "Weinberg, 1972" defined on page 65.
-\@refitem{15}{Weinberg, 1972}
-S.~Weinberg,
-\booktitle {Gravitation and Cosmology: Principles and Applications of the
-General Theory of Relativity}
-(Wiley, New York, 1972) pg.~3
-\@endrefitem
-\@refpunct .
-%
-% (16) Reference text for "K&R" defined on page 67.
-\@refitem{16}{K&R}
-Brian W.~Kernighan and Dennis M.~Ritchie,
-\booktitle {The C Programming Language},
-(Prentice Hall, Englewood Clifs, NJ, 1978)
-\@endrefitem
-\@refpunct .
-%
-% (17) Reference text for "Banzai, 1984" defined on page 69.
-\@refitem{17}{Banzai, 1984}
-\booktitle {The Adventures of Buckaroo Banzai across the Eighth
-Dimension}, (Twentieth Century Fox, 1984)
-\@endrefitem
-\@refpunct .
-%
-% (18) Reference text for "colordvi" defined on page 79.
-\@refitem{18}{colordvi}
-Hafner, Jim, the {\tt COLORDVI.TEX} macros
-are included in the {\tt dvips} distribution. See \Ref {Rokicki}
-\@endrefitem
-\@refpunct .
-%
-% (19) Reference text for "CRC" defined on page 93.
-\@refitem{19}{CRC}
-\booktitle {Handbook of Chemistry and Physics}, 56th Edition,
-(CRC Press, Cleveland, Ohio, 1974), pg. B-9
-\@endrefitem
-\@refpunct .
-%
-% (20) Reference text for "TeXsis-1.00" defined on page 116.
-\@refitem{20}{TeXsis-1.00}
-E.~Myers,
-\booktitle {\TeX sis Version 1.00} (unpublished)
-\@endrefitem
-\@refpunct .
-%
-% (21) Reference text for "Myers, 1984" defined on page 116.
-\@refitem{21}{Myers, 1984}
-E.~Myers,
-\booktitle {Calculation of the Gravitational Casimir Energy and Gauge Field
-Couplings in Non-Abelian Kaluza-Klein Theories},
-Ph.D.\ thesis (unpublished), Yale University, 1984
-\@endrefitem
-\@refpunct .
-%
-% (22) Reference text for "Groppe" defined on page 116.
-\@refitem{22}{Groppe}
-W.~Groppe,
-\booktitle {TechRpt} (unpublished)
-\@endrefitem
-\@refpunct .
-% >>> EOF Manual.ref <<<
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/texsis/base/Manual.tbl b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/texsis/base/Manual.tbl
deleted file mode 100644
index 0e67908e451..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/texsis/base/Manual.tbl
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,24 +0,0 @@
-% List of Tables for job Manual - created: 2004/6/5 23:{0}2
-% ====================================
-% > Table 7.1:
-\FIGLitem{Table} {7.1. }
-Charged leptons.\@endFIGLitem
-{51}
-% > Table 7.2:
-\FIGLitem{Table} {7.2. }
-Example of a ruled table --- AT\&T Common Stock.\@endFIGLitem
-{54}
-% > Table 7.3:
-\FIGLitem{Table} {7.3. }
-Example of a ruled table --- Parameters used in the
-MS-X$\alpha $ calculations for the chlorosilane molecules,
-H$_{\rm x}$SiCl$_{\rm 4-x}$; x=0--4.\@endFIGLitem
-{55}
-% > Table 7.4:
-\FIGLitem{Table} {7.4. }
-Basic macros for {\tt \bs ruledtable}\@endFIGLitem
-{58}
-% > Table 7.4:
-\FIGLitem{Table} {7.4. }
-Additional macros for {\tt \bs ruledtable}\@endFIGLitem
-{59}
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/texsis/base/Manual.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/texsis/base/Manual.tex
deleted file mode 100644
index 0b9f8fc9693..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/texsis/base/Manual.tex
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,22 +0,0 @@
-%% file: Manual.tex (TeXsis version 2.17)
-% $Revision: 17.1 $ : $Date: 1997/07/08 22:09:47 $ : $Author: myers $
-%======================================================================*
-% TeXsis Manual -- This file prints the TeXsis manual.
-%
-% First we look to see if this is being run under TeXsis, or
-% Plain TeX. If \TeXsis is undefined then it must be Plain
-
-\ifx \TeXsis\undefined\relax
- \input texsis \relax % read in TeXsis macros
- \the\everyjob % start it up
-\fi
-
-% Now go read in the manual Master file. The manual files are TXS*.doc
-
-\input TXSdoc.doc % read the manual
-\bye
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/texsis/base/NEWS b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/texsis/base/NEWS
deleted file mode 100644
index 03bc808bb10..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/texsis/base/NEWS
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,61 +0,0 @@
- LATEST NEWS ABOUT TeXsis
- ========================
-
-The latest distribution version of TeXsis is in a file of the name
-TeXsis-2.xx.tar.tz where 2.xx is the latest version number.
-
-The latest experimental version of TeXsis is in the beta subdirectory
-ftp://feynman.physics.lsa.umich.edu/pub/texsis/beta/ but is not
-mirrored by CTAN.
-
- ========================
-
-13 May 2000:
- The TeXsis ftp site has been moved to
- ftp://feynman.physics.lsa.umich.edu/pub/texsis/
- There is now a TeXsis home page, which is at
- http://feynman.physics.lsa.umich.edu/~myers/texsis/
-
-
-18 December 1997:
-
- Here is what is new in TeXsis 2.17:
-
- * Support for using BibTeX to extract references from bibliographic
- databases. (Easier to use than in LaTeX!)
-
- * The ability to change the colors in PostScript output, which is
- useful for making overhead transparancies. (The style file
- color.txs is a functional superset of colordvi.sty, but also lets
- you push/pop the PostScript color stack.)
-
- * Improvements in the organization of the manual, and slightly updated
- installation instructions. Updated Makefile.
-
- * Change in the format of the .aux file. You shouldn't notice
- this, but it will allow the use of tools and packages that use
- this file (such as BibTeX) that were formerly only available in
- LaTeX.
-
- * Form letter macros moved to a style file, Formletr.txs.
-
- Here is what is NOT in TeXsis, but expected in a later release:
-
- * Babel support for other languages. We had this working with Babel
- 3.4, but then the author of Babel made a big revision (probably to
- update to LaTeX/2e) and now it doesn't quite work. You can try to
- find the older version of Babel if you really want this.
-
- * Hypertext: I had hyperTeX html links working, but have not
- documented it. It seems that work on hyperTeX has either frozen
- or changed direction with the anticipated arrival of tex2pdf.
- Once I get a chance to read through the proper documentation and
- figure out where things are going I will update TeXsis to put in
- the proper pdf marks.
-
- * Alternate citation styles: numbered footnotes (rather than
- endnotes) or citation by the label ("citation key"). It's almost
- ready, but not quite.
-
-$Id: NEWS,v 1.1 2000/05/17 01:06:42 myers Exp $
-
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/texsis/base/README b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/texsis/base/README
deleted file mode 100644
index 08751ec580d..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/texsis/base/README
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,151 +0,0 @@
- TeXsis version 2.18
- 6 April 2001
-
-
- GENERAL INFORMATION
-
- TeXsis is a Plain TeX macro package for typesetting physics
-documents, including papers and preprints, conference proceedings,
-books, theses, referee reports, letters, and memos. Texsis macros
-provide the following features:
-
- * Automatic numbering of and symbolic reference to equations,
- figures, tables, and references;
-
- * Simpified control of type sizes, line spacing, footnotes, running
- headlines and footlines;
-
- * Specialized document formats for research papers, preprints and
- "e-prints," conference proceedings, theses, books, referee
- reports, letters, and memoranda;
-
- * Table(s) of contents and lists of figures and tables, as well as
- list of figure and table captions;
-
- * Specialized environments for lists, theorems and proofs, centered
- or non-justified text, and listing computer code;
-
- * Specialized macros for easily constructing ruled tables;
-
- * Simplified means of constructing an index for a book or thesis;
-
- * Easy to use double column formatting.
-
-TeXsis was originally designed for use by physicists, but others may
-also find it useful. It is completely compatible with Plain TeX.
-
- You can find out more about TeXsis from the TeXsis Home Page, at
-http://www.texsis.org
-
-
- SOURCE CODE
-
- Source code and documentation for TeXsis can be obtained from
-ftp://ftp.texsis.org/texsis and is also mirrored by CTAN, the
-Common TeX Archive Network, in CTAN:/tex-archive/macros/texsis/ .
-Finger ctan@ftp.tex.ac.uk to find the nearest CTAN server.
-
- Small improvements and corrections to TeXsis are distributed as
-patches in the patch file TXSpatch.tex. If there is such a file in the
-texsis directory you should copy it as well.
-
-
- INDEPENDENT MACRO PACKAGES
-
- Several components of TeXsis can be used independently under Plain
-TeX:
-
- * index: index.tex contains Plain TeX macros for constructing an
- index for a document, in conjunction with the MakeIndex program.
-
- * tables: ruled.tex (with TXSruled.tex) contain Plain TeX macros
- for making nice ruled tables.
-
- * dcol: TXSdcol.tex contains Plain TeX macros for double column
- formatting.
-
-For details on how to use these see the documentation files that
-accompany them on the TeXsis ftp site (each has a separate directory).
-The comments in the files are also very complete.
-
-
- INSTALLATION
-
- TeX runs on many different platforms, not just Unix, and TeXsis
-will run on any installation of TeX. It is best to perform a system-
-wide installation of TeXsis so that everybody may use it, but it is
-also possible to install it in a private directory for personal use.
-Since TeXsis is a "format" the steps required to install it are the
-same as the steps required to install any TeX "format", probably using
-the `initex` program. It would be best if you would review the
-documentation on how to do this for your own TeX installation.
-
- Very complete installation instructions for Unix, VMS, and PC-TeX
-are given in an appendix to the TeXsis manual. You can print these
-without having to have TeXsis installed by running the file
-Install.tex through Plain TeX.
-
- That said, installation on Unix computers is rather simple. Unless
-you have an unusual installation of TeX (in which case please read the
-output from Install.tex) the steps are:
-
- 1. Edit the Makefile and change parameters and paths as
- appropriate, following the directions given in the comments.
- The defaults are set to work with teTeX, a common distribution
- of TeX for Unix. You will probably only have to set the paths
- to your top-level "texmf" directory and your local "bin" directory.
-
- 2. (Optional) Copy the file TXSsite.000 to TXSsite.tex and edit
- this file to contain appropriate site dependent information,
- such as definitions for the name of your \ORGANIZATION, or your
- \letterhead, or change \LandscapeSpecial, etc... If you already
- have a TXSsite.tex file then copy it to the current directory so
- that it will be included when building the format file.
-
- 3. Give the command `make` to build the format file and the manual.
-
- 4. Give the command `make install' to install the files in the
- appropriate directories.
-
-
- MTEXSIS
-
- To make it easier for the casual reader of electronic preprints
-("e-prints") to print a TeXsis document we have collected the core
-TeXsis macros into one source file (called mtexsis.tex), with all the
-comments and blank lines removed. A reader who does not have TeXsis
-on her/his system can then simply get this file, add
-
- \input mtexsis
-
-to the manuscript file, and print the paper with Plain TeX. You can
-make your e-print manuscript files automatically load mtexsis.tex, if
-it is needed, by adding the following line at the begining of your
-manuscript file:
-
- \ifx\TeXsis\undefined\input mtexsis.tex\fi
-
-It is suggested that you try running such a manuscript through Plain TeX
-with mtexsis.tex first to make sure that it works.
-
-
- MAILING LIST
-
- If you find TeXsis useful you may want to send a short e-mail
-message to texsis@texsis.org to be put on the mailing list for any
-notices of updates or changes. We will only use this list to inform
-you of updates or changes, and we won't give the list out to anybody
-else (we hate spam too).
-
-
- AUTHORS
-
- Eric Myers <myers@umich.edu> Frank E. Paige <paige@bnl.gov>
- Department of Physics and Physics Department
- University of Michigan Brookhaven National Laboratory
- Ann Arbor, Michigan, 48109 USA Upton, New York 11973 USA
-
-
- --- ---- ---
-
-@(#) $Id: README,v 18.3 2001/04/06 23:12:48 myers Exp $
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/texsis/base/TXSapxF.doc b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/texsis/base/TXSapxF.doc
deleted file mode 100644
index 37b8be0e5b5..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/texsis/base/TXSapxF.doc
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,55 +0,0 @@
-%% file: TXSapxF.doc - Font Table Appendix - TeXsis version 2.18
-%% @(#) $Id: TXSapxF.doc,v 18.1 2000/05/17 00:19:46 myers Exp $
-%======================================================================*
-% (C) Copyright 1989, 1992 by Eric Myers and Frank E. Paige
-% This file is a part of TeXsis. Distribution and/or modifications
-% are allowed under the terms of the LaTeX Project Public License (LPPL).
-% See the file COPYING or ftp://ftp.texsis.org/texsis/LPPL
-%======================================================================*
-\ifx\undefined\meta\texsis\input TXSdocM.doc\draft\fi
-
-
-\appendix{C}{Font Tables}
-
- The Computer Modern fonts that are used either by Plain \TeX\ or by
-\TeXsis\ and the required sizes for each are listed in \Tbl{Fonts}. The
-|cmmib10| and |cmbsy10| fonts may not exist in all installations, but
-they will not be loaded unless \cs{mib} is used, so they are not required.
-The command \CS{printfont}\arg{font} can be used to print a table of
-the characters in any \meta{font}, e.g.,
-\TeXexample
-\printfont{cmr10}
-|endTeXexample
-A separate file called |Fonts.tex| is included with the standard
-distribution of \TeXsis. Running |Fonts.tex| through \TeXsis\ will
-produce tables of all of the fonts used by your installation of \TeXsis.
-
- Most versions of \TeX\ now use ``CM'' (Computer Modern) fonts, but
-some still use the older ``AM'' (Almost Modern) fonts. If you have
-problems with the fonts, try editing |TXSfonts.tex|, replacing all
-occurrences of |=cm| with |=am| and then recompiling \TeXsis. Mixing the
-two types of fonts will produce errors.
-
-\midtable{Fonts}
-\Caption
-Fonts used in \TeXsis, with the design size names and the required
-sizes in points.
-\endCaption
-\ruledtable
- Base Name | Description | Sizes (pt) \crthick
- cmr10 | Roman | 5~~7~~9~~10~~11~~12~~14~~16~~20~~24 \cr
- cmti10 | Text italic | 5~~7~~9~~10~~11~~12~~14~~16~~20~~24 \cr
- cmsl10 | Slanted | 5~~7~~9~~10~~11~~12~~14~~16~~20~~24 \cr
- cmbx10 | Roman bold | 5~~7~~9~~10~~11~~12~~14~~16~~20~~24 \cr
- cmmi10 | Math italic | 5~~7~~9~~10~~11~~12~~14~~16~~20~~24 \cr
- cmsy10 | Math symbol | 5~~7~~9~~10~~11~~12~~14~~16~~20~~24 \cr
- cmex10 | Math extended | ~~~~~~~~~10~~11~~12~~14~~16~~20~~24 \cr
- cmtt10 | Typewriter | ~~~~~~~~~10~~11~~12~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ \cr
- cmss10 | Sans serif | ~~~~~~~~~10~~11~~12~~14~~~~~~~~~~~~ \crthick
- cmmib10 | Math italic bold | ~~~~~~~~~10~~11~~12~~14~~16~~20~~24 \cr
- cmbsy10 | Bold symbol | ~~~~~~~~~10~~11~~12~~14~~16~~20~~24
-\endruledtable
-\endtable
-
-% >>> EOF TSXapxF.doc <<<
-
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/texsis/base/TXScover.doc b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/texsis/base/TXScover.doc
deleted file mode 100644
index 34d8b6ebee8..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/texsis/base/TXScover.doc
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,28 +0,0 @@
-%% file: TXScover.tex - Binder Cover - TeXsis version 2.18
-%% @(#) $Id: TXScover.doc,v 18.1 2000/05/17 00:19:46 myers Exp $
-%======================================================================*
-% (C) Copyright 1989, 1992, 1993 by Eric Myers and Frank E. Paige
-% This file is a part of TeXsis. Distribution and/or modifications
-% are allowed under the terms of the LaTeX Project Public License (LPPL).
-% See the file COPYING or ftp://ftp.texsis.org/texsis/LPPL
-%======================================================================*
-% SPINE LABEL: don't use any \special's here
-
-\parskip=12pt
-
-\noindent
-(This file should be printed in Landscape mode.)
-\emsg{This file should be printed in Landscape mode.}
-\vskip 1in
-
-\hoffset=-1.0cm
-
-\spine{\vbox to 1in{\vfill
- \hbox to 18cm {\hfil\twentyfourbf \TeXsis : %%
- \TeX\ Macros for Physicists \hfil}%
- \vfill}
-}
-
-\end
-
-%>>> EOF TXScover.doc <<<
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/texsis/base/TXSdcol.doc b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/texsis/base/TXSdcol.doc
deleted file mode 100644
index 88c224e5ff3..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/texsis/base/TXSdcol.doc
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,300 +0,0 @@
-%% file: TXSdcol.doc - Double Columns - TeXsis version 2.18
-%% @(#) $Id: TXSdcol.doc,v 18.2 2000/05/17 00:19:46 myers Exp $
-%======================================================================*
-% (C) Copyright 1989, 1992, 1993 by Eric Myers and Frank E. Paige
-% This file is a part of TeXsis. Distribution and/or modifications
-% are allowed under the terms of the LaTeX Project Public License (LPPL).
-% See the file COPYING or ftp://ftp.texsis.org/texsis/LPPL
-%======================================================================*
-\ifx\undefined\bs \texsis\input TXSdocM.doc\input Manual.aux\draft\fi
-
-
-\section{Double Column Output \label{sect.dcol}}
-
- Typesetting text in more than one column on a single page is more
-involved than typesetting text in a single page-wide column, but this
-extra effort can be rewarded with a document which looks much more
-professional and which can be easier to read (provided that the
-resolution of your printer is up to it). Many publishers of
-``\idx{camera-ready}'' conference proceedings require double
-column\index{double columns} \index{multiple columns|see{double
-columns}} typesetting, and the {\sl \idx{Physical Review}} and other APS
-and AIP journals are typeset in double columns. In order to make it
-easy for authors to prepare manuscripts either for such camera-ready
-conference proceedings or for submission to {\sl Physical Review}, we
-have included some powerful double column typesetting macros in \TeXsis.
-These macros can automatically balance columns which do not fill an
-entire page, and there are also provisions for equations which must be
-extended across both columns because they are too wide for a single
-column. Figures and tables (or other such ``floating'' insertions) can
-be put either in a single column or across both columns. The same is
-true for footnotes. By changing a single instruction in the manuscript
-file it is also possible to take a document which has been prepared for
-double columns and to print it in single column mode. The converse is
-not true --- typesetting text in double columns with automatic column
-balancing is a nontrivial task. While the macros generally behave as
-intended, more attention to the layout of the document is required, and
-even then the macros will sometimes fail without some extra guidance.
-It is not possible to divide three lines into two balanced columns! In
-such cases you must rearrange text or the placement of figures and
-tables, or explicitly select column or page breaks elsewhere in the
-document, in order to give \TeXsis\ some extra guidance on how best to
-format the page.
-
-%\bigbreak
-
- In order to use the double column formatting macros you must first
-specify the size of the columns with the command
-\CS{SetDoubleColumns}\arg{c-width}. The width and height of the full
-page are taken from the current settings of \cs{hsize} and \cs{vsize},
-while the width of each column is \meta{c-width}. This re-defines
-\TeX's \cs{output} routine, so it should be called shortly after you say
-\cs{texsis}, before any output is actually produced, and it should only
-be called if double column output is to be produced.
-
- \CS{SetDoubleColumns} only sets the column dimensions and
-prepares the \cs{output} routine for double column output at some point
-in the future --- it does not actually put you in double column mode.
-Text will still be set in a single page-wide column until you say
-\CS{doublecolumns}. After you say \CS{doublecolumns} text will be set
-in double columns until you say \CS{enddoublecolumns}. This will cause
-the text collected so far to be put into two ``balanced'' columns of the
-same height. You can, if you desire, return to double column mode at
-any later time by saying \CS{doublecolumns} again, and you can switch
-back and forth as much as you like. However, keep in mind that
-frequently switching between single and double columns will make it very
-difficult for \TeXsis\ to choose good points to break columns and pages,
-and you may get an error message warning you that a column cannot be
-balanced.
-
-%\bigbreak
-%\pagecheck{3cm}
-
-A simple example of the use of these double column commands is the
-following:
-\TeXexample
-\SetDoubleColumns{0.47\hsize}
-\doublecolumns\tenpoint
-{\bf BISMUTH} (Ger.\ {\it Weisse Masse}, white mass; later
-{\it Wismuth} and {\it Bisemutum}, Bi; at.~wt. 308.981;
-at.~no. 83; m.p. 271.3$^\circ$C; b.p. 1560 $\pm$ 5$^\circ$C;
-sp.~gr. 9.747 (20$^\circ$); valence 3 or~5. In early times
-bismuth was confused with tin and lead. Claude Geoffroy the
-Younger showed it to be distinct from lead . . .
- . . . . . . .
-. . . High purity bismuth metal costs about \$4/lb.
-\enddoublecolumns
-|endTeXexample
-\noindent
-Here the column size is chosen to be slightly less than half of the
-\cs{hsize} (0.47 times the \cs{hsize}) to allow some space (called the
-``gutter'') between the two columns. The result is the
-following:\reference{CRC}
-\booktitle{Handbook of Chemistry and Physics}, 56th Edition,
-(CRC Press, Cleveland, Ohio, 1974), pg. B-9
-\endreference
-\medbreak
-
-% set up double column mode:
-\SetDoubleColumns{0.47\hsize}
-
-\doublecolumns\tenpoint\baselineskip=12pt plus 1pt \relax
-{\bf BISMUTH} (Ger.\ {\it Weisse Masse}, white mass; later {\it Wismuth}
-and {\it Bisemutum}, Bi; at.~wt. 308.981; at.~no. 83; m.p.
-271.3$^\circ$C; b.p. 1560 $\pm$ 5$^\circ$C; sp.~gr. 9.747 (20$^\circ$);
-valence 3 or~5. In early times bismuth was confused with tin and lead.
-Claude Geoffroy\index{Geoffroy, Claude} the Younger showed it to be
-distinct from lead in 1753. It is a white, crystalline, brittle metal
-with a pinkish tinge. It occurs native. The most important ores are
-{\it bismuthinite} or {\it bismuth glance} (Bi$_2$S$_3$) and {\it
-bismite} (Bi$_2$O$_3$). Peru, Japan, Mexico, Bolivia, and Canada are
-major \idx{bismuth} producers. Much of the bismuth produced in the U.S. is
-obtained as a by-product in refining lead, copper, tin, silver, and
-gold ores. Bismuth is the most diamagnetic of all metals, and the
-thermal conductivity is lower than any metal, except mercury. It has a
-high electrical resistance, and has the highest \idx{Hall effect} of any
-metal (i.e., greatest increase in electrical resistance when placed in
-a magnetic field). ``Bismanol'' is a permanent magnet of high coercive
-force, made of MnBi, by the U.S. Naval Ordnance Laboratory. Bismuth
-expands 3.32\% on solidification. This property makes bismuth alloys
-particularly suited to the making of sharp castings of objects subject
-to damage by high temperatures. With other metals, such as tin,
-\idx{cadmium}, etc., bismuth forms low-melting alloys which are extensively
-used for safety devices used in \idx{fire detection} and extinguishing
-systems. Bismuth is used in producing malleable irons and is finding use
-as a catalyst for making acrylic fibers. When bismuth is heated in air
-it burns with a blue flame forming yellow fumes of the oxide. The metal
-is also used as a \idx{thermocouple} material (has highest negativity
-known), and has found application as a carrier for U$^{235}$ or
-U$^{238}$ fuel in \idx{atomic reactors}. Its soluble salts are
-characterized by forming insoluble basic salts on the addition of water,
-a property sometimes used in detection work. Bismuth oxychloride is
-used extensively in cosmetics. Bismuth subnitrate and subcarbonate are
-used in medicine. High purity bismuth metal costs about \$4/lb.
-\enddoublecolumns
-
-\nobreak
-\medskip
-
- The \cs{IEEE}, \cs{PhysRev}, and \cs{NorthHollandTwo} document formats
-described in \Sect{fmts} also use these double column macros.
-
-\bigbreak
-
- Any document prepared for double column output using the macros just
-described can also be printed in the simpler single column mode very
-easily, simply by leaving out the \CS{SetDoubleColumns}. Without the
-initialization provided by \CS{SetDoubleColumns} the \cs{doublecolumns}
-and \cs{enddoublecolumns} commands do nothing (they are, in fact, the
-same as saying \cs{relax}). However, if you restore the
-\CS{SetDoubleColumns} command, or invoke one of the specialized document
-styles which use double column output (like \cs{PhysRev}) they will come
-back to life and perform as required.
-
-\bigbreak
-
- In double column mode displayed equations that fit within a
-single column are typed within the usual |$$|\ttdots|$$|. If an equation
-is too long then it may have to be printed across both columns. This is
-easily done by saying \CS{longequation} before the |$$| which begins the
-equation and \CS{endlongequation} after the |$$| which ends the
-equation, like so:\index{double columns!long equations}%
-\TeXexample
-|smalltt\longequation
-$$
-\psi_{nlm}(r,\theta,\phi)
- = [({2Z \over n a_0})^3 {(n-l-1)! \over 2n(n+l)!} ]^{1 \over 2}
- \, (\rho)^l \, e^{-\rho / 2} \, \,
- L_{n-l-1}^{2l+1} (\rho) \,\, Y_l^m(\theta,\phi)
-$$
-\endlongequation
-|endTeXexample
-\noindent
-The command \CS{longequation} invokes \cs{enddoublecolumns} to end
-double column mode and balance the partial double columns, and it will
-also draw a ruled line across the bottom of the left column. After the
-equation has been completed \CS{endlongequation} invokes
-\cs{doublecolumns} to go back to double column mode, and it also draws a
-rule across the top of the right column.
-
- The purpose of these ruled lines is to guide the reader's eye from the
-incomplete left column to the right column above the equation, and to
-the top of the incomplete right column from the left column below the
-long equation. The default style of these rules is the same as is used
-by {\sl Physical Review}. The rules are drawn by macros called
-\CS{leftcolrule} and \CS{rightcolrule}, and these can be changed either
-by you or by a style file. For
-example, if you don't want these rules you can turn them off simply
-by redefining these macros to be \cs{relax}:
-\TeXexample
- \def\leftcolrule{\relax}
- \def\rightcolrule{\relax}
-|endTeXexample
-\noindent
-As with the other double column macros, \CS{longequation} and
-\CS{endlongequation} do nothing if they are invoked when double column
-mode has not been initialized with \CS{SetDoubleColumns}, to make it
-easy to print the document in single column mode.
-
- Keep in mind that when dealing with long equations which span both
-columns, switching frequently between single and double columns will
-almost certainly cause trouble in balancing the double columns. Also
-note that each separate piece of double-column material forms its own
-group, so any definitions made inside that group will be forgotten
-outside it. To avoid this problem put all definitions at the beginning of the
-paper, before double column mode is begun. Alternatively, make your
-definitions global by using \cs{gdef} rather than \cs{def}.
-
-\bigbreak
-
- Figures, tables, or other floating insertions can be inserted
-within a single column using the usual insertion commands of \TeX\ and
-\TeXsis:\index{double columns!insertions} \cs{topinsert}, \cs{midinsert},
-\cs{pageinsert}, \cs{bottominsert}, or \cs{heavyinsert}, all of which
-are terminated as usual by \cs{endinsert}. A \cs{midinsert} or
-\cs{heavyinsert} will appear in the column where it is called for,
-unless it won't fit, in which case it migrates to the next {\sl
-column} (rather than all the way to the next page). You can force an
-insertion into a particular column by placing {\sl within} the
-insertion either \CS{forceleft} or \CS{forceright}. Since insertions
-which have been forced into the left or right columns are handled
-separately, an insertion which fails to fit on a page is moved to the
-same column of the next page and not just to the next column. This means
-that if there are several figures per page, then the figures can
-easily appear in the wrong order. Also, a \cs{topinsert} which follows
-a wide equation on a page will be placed after the equation, not at
-the top of the page. Such problems can easily be corrected by moving
-the insertion to a better place in the manuscript file.
-
-
-Besides putting insertions in one column or the other, it is also
-sometimes desirable to be able to put an insertion across the full width
-of the page. These ``wide'' insertions can be made with ``wide''
-versions of some of the the insertions already mentioned:
-\CS{widetopinsert}, \CS{widepageinsert} and \CS{widebottominsert}
-(there is no such thing as |\widemidinsert| or |\wideheavyinsert|). These
-wide insertions behave just like their more conventional counterparts
-when in single column mode.
-
- The standard \TeXsis\ macros for table and figure insertions
-described in \Sect{tbls} use \cs{topinsert} and cousins, and so make
-insertions within a single column in double column format.
-There are also macros to make two-column wide tables and figures:
-\index{double columns!figures and tables}%
-\description{Xwidetable}\clump
-%
-\itm{\CS{widetable}\arg{label\/}}
-Insert a two-column wide table, with the tag \meta{label\/}, at the top of the
-current page.
-%
-\itm{\CS{widefigure}\arg{label\/}}
-Insert a two-column wide figure, with the tag \meta{label\/}, at the top of the
-current page.
-%
-\itm{\CS{widetopfigure}\arg{label\/}}
-A synonym for |\widefigure|.
-%
-\itm{\CS{widefulltable}\arg{label\/}}
-Insert a two-column wide, full-page table, with the tag \meta{label\/}.
-%
-\itm{\CS{widefullfigure}\arg{label\/}}
-Insert a two-column wide, full-page figure, with the tag \meta{label\/}.
-%
-\enddescription
-\noindent
-These also behave correctly in single column document formats.
-
-\bigbreak
-%================
-
-Here is a summary of the commands which can be used to set-up and
-control double column mode:
-\description{Xdoublecolumns\quad}\clump
-%
-\itm{\CS{SetDoubleColumns}\arg{c-width}}
-Set up the double column format, using the current \cs{hsize} and
-\cs{vsize} for the total size of the page and \meta{c-width} for the
-column width.
-%
-\itm{\CS{doublecolumns}}
-Begin double column mode.
-%
-\itm{\CS{newcolumn}}
-Force a \idx{column break}, much like \cs{newpage} forces a page break.
-%
-\itm{\CS{enddoublecolumns}}
-End double column mode, making balanced double columns,
-%
-\itm{\CS{longequation}}
-Begins a ``long'' equation which cannot fit within one column
-and therefore must stretch across both columns. This balances the
-columns, putting a \CS{leftcolrule} below the left column, and then
-enters single column mode.
-%
-\itm{\CS{endlongequation}}
-Ends a long equation, returning to double column mode and
-putting a \CS{rightcolrule} above the right column of the text following.
-%
-\enddescription
-
-%>>> EOF TXSdcol.doc <<<
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/texsis/base/TXSdoc.doc b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/texsis/base/TXSdoc.doc
deleted file mode 100644
index 521fca0e85e..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/texsis/base/TXSdoc.doc
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,55 +0,0 @@
-%% file: TXSdoc.doc - Manual Master File - TeXsis version 2.18
-%% @(#) $Id: TXSdoc.doc,v 18.2 2000/05/17 00:19:46 myers Exp $
-%======================================================================*
-% (C) Copyright 1989, 1992, 1997 by Eric Myers and Frank E. Paige
-% This file is a part of TeXsis. Distribution and/or modifications
-% are allowed under the terms of the LaTeX Project Public License (LPPL).
-% See the file COPYING or ftp://ftp.texsis.org/texsis/LPPL
-%======================================================================*
-
-\book % ``book'' document style (mostly)
-
-\input TXSdocM.doc % special macros for this manual
-\markindexfalse % proof marks for index entries OFF!
-\ContentsSwitchtrue % be sure contents pages are made
-
-
-%% Save trees and print this double sided if you can. Otherwise,
-%% Uncomment this to get the page numbers correct for single sided.
-% \bookpagenumbersfalse
-
-
-% Uncomment the following line to make a HyperTeXt linked
-% version of the Manual: (Experimental)
-%\htmltrue % HyperText links ON
-
-
-\input TXSdoc0.doc % Title page
-\pageno = 1
-\input TXSintro.doc % introduction
-\input TXSfonts.doc % typestyles and line spacing
-\input TXSeqns.doc % equation numbering, easyparens
-\input TXSsymb.doc % special symbols
-\input TXSprns.doc % easy parentheses
-\input TXSrefs.doc % references
-\input TXStags.doc % labeling things
-\input TXSsects.doc % chapters and sections and titles
-\input TXSfigs.doc % figures and tables
-\TOCwrite{\string\pagecheck{2cm}}% skip to next page between major divisions
-\input TXSenvmt.doc % special text environments
-\input TXSfmts.doc % special document formats
-\input TXSletr.doc % letter and memo formats
-\input TXSdcol.doc % double column format
-\input TXSmisc.doc % miscellaneous macros
-
-\TOCwrite{\string\bigskip\string\nosechead{Appendices:}}% title in TOC
-\input TXSinstl.doc % appendix on installation
-\input TXSrevs.doc % appendix on revision records
-\input TXSapxF.doc % appendix on font tables
-\input TXSend.doc % end material, references, etc...
-
-\tracingstats=1 % how much memory did that use?
-
-\bye
-
-%>>> EOF TXSdoc.doc <<<
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/texsis/base/TXSdoc0.doc b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/texsis/base/TXSdoc0.doc
deleted file mode 100644
index 254c56eaa70..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/texsis/base/TXSdoc0.doc
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,293 +0,0 @@
-%% file: TXSdoc0.doc - Manual Title Pages - TeXsis version 2.18
-%% @(#) $Id: TXSdoc0.doc,v 18.2 2000/05/17 00:19:46 myers Exp $
-%=======================================================================*
-% (C) Copyright 1989, 1992, 1994, 1996 by Eric Myers and Frank E. Paige
-% This file is a part of TeXsis. Distribution and/or modifications
-% are allowed under the terms of the LaTeX Project Public License (LPPL).
-% See the file COPYING or ftp://ftp.texsis.org/texsis/LPPL
-%======================================================================*
-\ifx\undefined\meta\texsis\input TXSdocM.doc\input Manual.aux\draft\fi
-
-% First print the outside cover page and back
-
-\begingroup
-\pageno=0
-\nopagenumbers
-
-% Just define needed large fonts; otherwise some systems may run out
-% of font space!
-
-\font\fourteenbf=cmbx10 scaled \magstep2
-\font\sixteenbf=cmbx10 scaled \magstep3
-\font\twentybf=cmbx10 scaled \magstep4
-\font\twentyfourbf=cmbx10 scaled \magstep5
-
-\titlepage
-\pageno=0
-\null
-\begingroup
- \singlespaced
- \line{\hfill \TeXsis~\fmtversion}
- \line{\hfill \revdate}
-\endgroup
-
-\vskip 1.0in plus 1fil
-
-\title
-\endcenter \flushleft \Tbf\singlespaced
-\twentyfourbf \TeXsis
-\vskip .25 cm
-\hrule height .2cm
-\vskip .1cm
-\hrule height .07cm
-\vskip .25cm
-\sixteenbf \TeX\ Macros for Physicists
-\endflushleft\center
-\endtitle
-
-\vskip 1.5in plus 1fil
-
-\flushleft
-\singlespaced\parskip=0pt
-{\fourteenbf Eric Myers}
-\vskip 3pt \hrule \vskip 3pt
-Department of Physics
-University of Michigan
-Ann Arbor, Michigan
-
-\vskip 2cm
-
-{\fourteenbf Frank E. Paige}
-\vskip 3pt \hrule \vskip 3pt
-Physics Department
-Brookhaven National Laboratory
-Upton, New York
-\endflushleft
-\endtitlepage
-
-% A blank page for the back of the cover page
-
-\null
-\pageno=0
-\newpage
-\endgroup
-
-%==================================================*
-% Now the inside title page
-
-\titlepage % begin title page
-\pageno=-1
-\nopagenumbers
-\line{\revdate \hfill \TeXsis\ \fmtversion} % a banner of sorts
-\vbox{\vskip.75in} % some whitespace
-\title % the title
-\TeXsis
-\TeX\ Macros for Physicists
-\endtitle
-\author
-Eric Myers
-Department of Physics
-University of Michgian
-Ann Arbor, Michigan 48109-1120~USA
-\endauthor
-\and
-\author
-Frank E. Paige
-Physics Department
-Brookhaven National Laboratory
-Upton, New York 11973~USA
-\endauthor
-%
-\abstract
-\TeXsis\ is a collection of \TeX\ macros for typesetting many kinds of
-physics documents, including research papers, preprints
-and ``e-prints,''
-conference proceedings, theses, books,
-referee reports,
-letters, and memoranda.
-%
-\TeXsis\ macros provide automatic numbering of equations, automatic
-numbering and formatting of references, double column formatting, macros
-for making tables and figures, with or without captions, and including
-tables with horizontal and vertical rules.
-%
-\TeXsis\ supports a wide variety of type sizes and a number of
-specialized document formats, and it even includes macros for making
-form letters for job applications or letters of recommendation.
-%
-This document describes version \fmtversion\ of \TeXsis, and also serves
-as an example of its use.
-%
-\endabstract
-\endtitlepage
-%======================================================================*
-% back page of title
-
-\pageno=-2 % page ``ii''
-\begingroup
-\tenpoint
-\TeXquoteon
-
-\centerline{\TeXsis: \TeX\ Macros for Physicists}
-\bigskip
-
-
-\noindent
-For the latest information about \TeXsis\ consult the \TeXsis\ home
-page, at
-\example
-\URL{http://www.texsis.org}
-\endexample
-
-
-\noindent
-Source code and documentation for \TeXsis\ are available via
-the Internet at
-\example
-\URL{ftp://ftp.texsis.org}.
-\endexample
-[You can also use ``anonymous ftp'' instead of a Web brower.
-In that case, run ftp on your computer and connect to
-ftp.texsis.org,
-give the login name "anonymous" and your e-mail address as the
-password. Issue the command ``{\tt cd texsis}'' to change to the {\tt
-texsis} subdirectory. ]
-
-The files for Unix machines are in a gzip compressed tar file
-with a name like {\tt TeXsis-X.XX.tar.gz}, where {\tt X.XX} is the
-version number.
-There are also subdirectories for \TeXsis\ packaged for Macintosh,
-PC's (DOS or Windows), VMS (Vax computers), Linux, and Amiga.
-The code is the same in any case, it's just packed differently for
-different machines.
-See the {\tt README} file on the TeXsis ftp server for more details.
-If you have problems with this server, please send e-mail to {\tt
-texsis@umich.edu}.
-
-The \TeXsis\ distribution on the TeXsis ftp server is also mirrored by
-CTAN (the Common TeX Archive Network).
-You may find it easier to get \TeXsis\ from a nearby CTAN site.
-To find the CTAN site nearest you finger
-\linkto{/cgi-bin/finger?ctan@ftp.tex.ac.uk}{\tt ctan@ftp.tex.ac.uk}.
-The files can be found in the directory {\tt macros/texsis/}.
-
- Small improvements and bug corrections for \TeXsis\ are distributed
-as patches in the patch file |TXSpatch.tex|.
-If there is such a file in the |/texsis| directory you should copy it
-as well.
-
-
-\vfill
-
- We would be grateful to hear of any errors found in this
-documentation or in the software, and we also invite suggestions for
-improvements to both.
-We try to correct errors as quickly as possible, and we try to improve
-\TeXsis\ as our time allows.
-When reporting an error in the code it would help a great deal if you
-would send us a copy of the relevant sections of the manuscript file,
-the log file, and if possible a sample of any output generated.
-It would be even better if you could break your example down into a
-short file that demonstrates the error on a single page or two.
-
-\vskip 0.5cm plus 1 fill
-
-\noindent
-To contact us send e-mail to {\tt texsis@umich.edu} or:
-\bigskip
-\settabs\+Internet Electronic Mail:\quad
- & Boston Massachusetts 02215 USA\quad
- & Brookhaven National Laboratory \cr % sample line
-\+Electronic Mail:
-& myers@umich.edu & paige@bnl.gov \cr
-\bigskip
-\+Surface Mail:
- & Eric Myers & Frank E. Paige \cr
-\+& Department of Physics & Physics Department \cr
-\+& 2477 Randall Laboratory & Box 510A \cr
-\+& University of Michigan & Brookhaven National Laboratory \cr
-\+& Ann Arbor, MI 48109-1120 USA & Upton, NY 11973 USA \cr
-\bigskip
-
-
-% ----- DISCLAIMERS
-
-\vskip 0.25cm plus 1 fill
-
-\bigskip
-\noindent
-\TeX\ is a trademark of the American Mathematical Society.
-
-\noindent
-UNIX is a trademark of Unix System Laboratories, Inc.
-
-\noindent
-Copyright \copyright\ 1990, 1991, 1992, 1994, 1997, 1999
-by Eric A. Myers and Frank E. Paige.
-\hfill\break\noindent
-Distribution and/or modification of the \TeXsis\ source code and
-documentation is allowed under the terms of the
-\linkto{ftp://ftp.texsis.org/texsis/LPPL}{LaTeX Project Public
-License (LPPL)}.
-\TeXsis\ is distributed WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the
-implied warranty of merchantability or fitness for a particular purpose.
-
-
-\vskip 0.5cm plus 1fill
-\line{\fmtname\ \fmtversion \hfil Printed \today}
-
-\endgroup % end \tenpoint
-\eject
-
-% -- TABLE OF CONTENTS, page iii
-
-\vfill\eject % new page
-\pageno=-3 % contents on iii, iv, ...
-\nosechead{\fourteenbf \linkname{sect.TOC}{Contents}} % no section number
-\bigskip % needs some space
-\setHeadline{Table of Contents}%
-\def\ContentsFormat{\parskip=0pt\singlespaced %
- \advance\baselineskip by 0.5pt plus 1pt minus 1pt}
-\tag{page.TOC}{\folio} % tag page for TOC
-\Contents % make table of contents
-
-
-% -- LIST OF TABLES AND FIGURES
-
-\vfill\eject
-
-\begingroup % keep changes local
-\parskip=0pt\singlespaced % like contents
-\advance\baselineskip by 1pt plus 1pt minus 1pt % like contents
-
-\vbox to 0.4\vsize{%
- \nosechead{\fourteenbf List of Tables}% % no section number
- \medskip % needs some space
- \ListTables
- \vfill} % list tables
-
-\bigskip
-\bigskip
-\nosechead{\fourteenbf List of Figures} % no section number
-\medskip % needs some space
-\ListFigures % list tables
-
-\endgroup
-
-% -- If the manual is to be printed double sided then we may need
-% an extra blank page in the head material to get it right.
-% if so, use this....
-
-\vfill\eject %
-
-\ifbookpagenumbers % only if page numbers for double sided
- \ifodd\pageno\else % only if even
- \global\def\HeadText{{\hss}}% clear heading
- \vbox to \vsize{\vss
- \centerline{This page was intentionally left blank}%
- \centerline{(for double sided printing)}%
- \vss}%
- \fi
-\fi % end ifodd
-
-%>>> EOF TXSdoc0.doc <<<
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/texsis/base/TXSdocM.doc b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/texsis/base/TXSdocM.doc
deleted file mode 100644
index 5d0811e38c1..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/texsis/base/TXSdocM.doc
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,142 +0,0 @@
-%% file: TXSdocM.doc - Macros for the Manual - TeXsis 2.18
-%% @(#) $Id: TXSdocM.doc,v 18.2 2000/05/17 00:19:46 myers Exp $
-%======================================================================*
-% (C) Copyright 1989, 1992, 1997 by Eric Myers and Frank E. Paige
-% This file is a part of TeXsis. Distribution and/or modifications
-% are allowed under the terms of the LaTeX Project Public License (LPPL).
-% See the file COPYING or ftp://ftp.texsis.org/texsis/LPPL
-%======================================================================*
-% Document Format for the TeXsis manual:
-
-\ATunlock % allow @ macros here
-\twelvepoint
-\singlespaced % single spaced
-\singlelinetrue % for \description
-\Contentsfalse % don't bother with table of contents (DRAFT)
-
-\parskip=\medskipamount % some extra space between paragraphs
-\EnvRightskip=0pt % allow environments all the way right
-\RunningHeadstrue % do show running headlines
-
-\input epsf % epsf figures
-
-% We begin a new \section on a new page. This does it automatically:
-
-\def\everysection{\vfill\eject}
-
-\sectionminspace=0.25\vsize % subsections too
-\subsectionskip=2\baselineskip
-
-
-% -- Font selections:
-
-\def\Tbf{\sixteenpoint\bf}
-\def\tbf{\sixteenpoint\bf}
-\def\HeadFont{\tenpoint\sl} % print running headlines in slanted type
-\def\smalltt{\tenpoint\tt} % for long \TeXexample's
-\def\em{\sl} % \em for emphasis
-
-% -- some useful symbols and such
-
-\def\bs{\char92} % '\' for macro names
-\def\VT{\char'174} % vertical bar
-\def\offtt{\TeXquoteoff\tt} % \tt with | allowed
-\def\ttdots{{\tt\phantom{0}...\phantom{0}}}% '...' with correct spacing
-\def\lb{{\tt\char'173}} % { in \tt
-\def\rb{{\tt\char'175}} % } in \tt
-\let\rqbrack=\} % save right curly bracket
-\let\lqbrack=\{ % save left curly bracket
-
-
-% \meta{stuff} was our way of doing <stuff> in text. Knuth used
-% \<stuff> in the TeXbook, so I use that too. The only change
-% I made was to force \rm -EAM
-
-\def\<#1>{\leavevmode\hbox{$\langle$\rm #1\/$\rangle$}} % syntactic quantity
-\def\meta#1{\leavevmode\hbox{$\langle$\rm #1\/$\rangle$}} % new \meta
-
-% \arg is like \meta but it put's the <thing> in braces too.
-
-\def\arg#1{\lb\<#1>\rb}
-
-\def\Sect#1{Sect\-ion~\use{sect.#1}} % section number
-\obsolete\SEC\Sect % old synonym
-
-% \clump will ``clump'' closer together the material in a \definition
-% or \itemize
-
-\def\clump{% % "clump" \definitions and \itemize
- \parskip=\baselineskip % \parskip is what \baselineskip was
- \advance \parskip by 0pt plus 2pt % add some stretch
- \singlespaced % singlespaced
- \singlelinetrue} % long guys on own line
-
-% -- the ``competition''
-
-\def\TeXbook{{\sl The \TeX book}\index{TeXbook@{\TeXbook}}} % The TeXbook
-\def\LaTeX{% the LaTeX symbol
- {\rm L\kern -.36em\raise .3ex\hbox {A}\kern -.15em\TeX}}
-\def\AmSTeX{% the AMSTeX symbol
- $\cal A\kern-.1667em\lower.5ex\hbox{$\cal M$}\kern-.075em S$-\TeX}
-
-\def\BibTeX{{\rm B\kern-.05em\hbox{$\scriptstyle\rm IB$}\kern-.08em\TeX}}
-
-% modify \emsg to recognize thes
-
-\def\emsg#1{\relax% write an error/information message to the screen
- \begingroup % disable special characters
- \def\@quote{"}% % to output "
- \def\TeX{TeX}\def\label##1{}\def\use{\string\use}%
- \def\BibTeX{BibTeX}\def\LaTeX{LaTeX}%
- \def\ { }\def~{ }% spaces are spaces
- \def\tt{}\def\bf{}\def\Tbf{}\def\tbf{}%
- \def\break{}\def\n{}\def\singlespaced{}\def\doublespaced{}%
- \immediate\write16{#1}%
- \endgroup}
-
-
-% -- some goodies from manmac.tex
-
-\def\bull{\vrule height .9ex width .8ex depth -.1ex } % square bullet
-\def\SS{{\it SS}} % scriptscript style
-\def\|{\leavevmode\hbox{\tt\char`\|}} % vertical line
-\def\dn{\leavevmode\hbox{\tt\char'14}} % downward arrow
-\def\up{\leavevmode\hbox{\tt\char'13}} % upward arrow
-
-\def\pt{\,{\rm pt}} % units of points, in math formulas
-
-\def\oct#1{\hbox{\rm\'{}\kern-.2em\it#1\/\kern.05em}} % octal constant
-\def\hex#1{\hbox{\rm\H{}\tt#1}} % hexadecimal constant
-\def\cstok#1{\leavevmode\thinspace\hbox{\vrule\vtop{\vbox{\hrule\kern1pt
- \hbox{\vphantom{\tt/}\thinspace{\tt#1}\thinspace}}
- \kern1pt\hrule}\vrule}\thinspace} % control sequence token
-
-% -- The index is constructed with index.tex and MakeIndex
-
-\input index
-\ATunlock % make sure @ is still a letter after index.tex
-%%\markindextrue % proof marks for index entries (DRAFT ONLY)
-
-% Use \cs{foo} to get \foo in \tt type and make an entry in the
-% index. Use \CS{foo} to get \foo in \tt type and make an BOLD
-% (defining) entry in the index.
-
-\TeXquoteoff % be sure | in \index is not active
-
-\def\cs#1{%
- {\tt\bs #1}\index{#1@{\tt\bs #1}|pg}% % put it in text and index it.
- \ifmarkindex % mark index entries in right margin?
- \llap{\lower\jot\vbox to 0pt{\vss % box it
- \tightboxit{\loosebox{\phantom{\tt\bs #1}}}}\hskip-\jot}%
- \fi}
-
-\def\CS#1{%
- {\tt\bs #1}\index{#1@{\tt\bs #1}|bold}% % put it in text and index it.
- \ifmarkindex % mark index entries in right margin?
- \llap{\lower\jot\vbox to 0pt{\vss % box it
- \tightboxit{\loosebox{\phantom{\tt\bs #1}}}}\hskip-\jot}%
- \fi}
-
-\TeXquoteon
-
-%>>> EOF TXSdocM.doc <<<
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/texsis/base/TXSend.doc b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/texsis/base/TXSend.doc
deleted file mode 100644
index 2939ab55900..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/texsis/base/TXSend.doc
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,137 +0,0 @@
-%% TXSend.doc - End Material for the Manual - TeXsis version 2.18
-%% @(#) $Id: TXSend.doc,v 18.3 2000/05/17 00:19:46 myers Exp $
-%======================================================================*
-% (C) Copyright 1989-1999 by Eric Myers and Frank E. Paige
-% This file is a part of TeXsis. Distribution and/or modifications
-% are allowed under the terms of the LaTeX Project Public License (LPPL).
-% See the file COPYING or ftp://ftp.texsis.org/texsis/LPPL
-%======================================================================*
-\ifx\undefined\meta\texsis\input TXSdocM.doc\draft\fi
-
-\fourteenfonts
-
-\vfill\eject % start new page
-\nosechead{\fourteenbf Acknowledgments}% % no section number
-\addTOC{1}{Acknowledgments}{\folio}% % add to contents
-\global\def\HeadText{{\tenit Acknowledgments}}
-
-\noindent
-\TeXsis\ began as a collection of macros used by
-E.~Myers\reference{TeXsis-1.00}
-E.~Myers,
-\booktitle{\TeX sis Version 1.00} (unpublished)
-\endreference
-to typeset his Ph.D. thesis.\reference{Myers, 1984}
-E.~Myers,
-\booktitle{Calculation of the Gravitational Casimir Energy and Gauge Field
-Couplings in Non-Abelian Kaluza-Klein Theories},
-Ph.D.\ thesis (unpublished), Yale University, 1984
-\endreference
-These were in turn developed from a collection of macros
-for creating technical reports known as \idx{TechRpt}.
-We don't know for sure who wrote TechRpt, but the manual we used was
-written by W.~Groppe\reference{Groppe}
-W.~Groppe,
-\booktitle{TechRpt} (unpublished)
-\endreference
-so he may be the author of the macros as well.
-%
-The original \BibTeX\ support, including {\tt texsis.bst}, was written
-by Bernd Dammann.
-
-
-\bigskip
-
-
-We wish to thank Isabel Harrity\index{Harrity, Isabel} for her patience
-in trying this code while it was originally being developed.
-Various other people have also given us suggestions, criticisms, and
-comments regarding the code and documentation for \TeXsis; among them we
-would like to thank:
- Vladimir Alexiev,
- Betty Armstrong,
- Akif Baysal,
- Richard Brown,
- Bernd Dammann,
- Vickie Darnell,
- Leo Eskin,
- Mira Franke,
- Ralf Gaertner,
- Romano Giannetti,
- Don Groom,
- Donavan Hall,
- Scott Hannahs,
- Diab Jerius,
- Arik Kapulkin,
- Kate Logan,
- Bob Love,
- Michael Morrison,
- T.C. Pierce,
- Jeroen Rommers,
- Norbert Roth,
- Kurt Stump,
- David Su\'arez de Lis,
- Anil Trivedi,
- and
- Samir Varma.
-Additional suggestions are welcome and will be incorporated in future
-versions of \TeXsis\ when possible.
-
-This work was supported in part by the United States Department
-of Energy under contracts DE-AC02-76CH00016 and DE-AC02-89ER40509,
-and in part by the National Science Foundation under grant number
-PHY8919177.
-
-% -- LIST OF REFERENCES
-
-\nosechead{\fourteenbf References}% % no section number
-\addTOC{1}{References}{\folio}% % add to contents
-\setHeadline{References}% % running head text
-\ListReferences % print references
-
-% -- THE INDEX
-
-\vfill\supereject
-\SetDoubleColumns{0.47\hsize}
-\nosechead{\fourteenbf Index}
-\addTOC{1}{Index}{\folio}% % add to contents
-\tag{pg.index}{\folio}
-\setHeadline{{Index}}% % running head text
-\bigskip\bigskip
-\def\bold#1{\linkto{page.#1}{\bf #1}}% % boldface for |bold
-\def\italic#1{\linkto{page.#1}{\it #1}}% % italics for |italic
-\def\slanted#1{\linkto{page.#1}{\sl #1}}% % slanted for |slanted
-\def\pg#1{{\rm #1}}% % roman for |reg
-\index{recursion|see{recursion}} % I couldn't resist this -EAM
-%
-\immediate\openin\patchfile=Manual.ind % try to open the index file
-\ifeof\patchfile % EOF? Then it's not there
- \closein\patchfile % so just close it.
- \emsg{> Cannot find the processed index file Manual.ind.}%% tell them.
- \meta{There is no index. I cannot find the file Manual.ind\/}
-\else
- \immediate\closein\patchfile % close it to read with \input
- \footline={{\hfil\tenpoint (Boldface page numbers are the defining
- entries) \hfil}}% % helpful footline
- \doublecolumns % index in double columns
- \singlespaced
- \baselineskip=14pt plus 1pt\relax % allow stretch
- \input Manual.ind
- \vfill
- \enddoublecolumns
-\fi
-%
-\vfill\eject % next...
-\footline={\relax} % footline back to nothing
-
-% if the last page is even then print ``nothing'', for duplex printers
-
-\ifbookpagenumbers
- \ifodd\pageno\else
- \global\def\HeadText{{\hss}}% clear heading
- \vbox to \vsize{\vss
- \centerline{This page was unintentionally left blank.}% :-)
- \vss}
- \fi % end ifodd
-\fi
-% >>> EOF TSXend.doc <<<
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/texsis/base/TXSenvmt.doc b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/texsis/base/TXSenvmt.doc
deleted file mode 100644
index 34de0ac5927..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/texsis/base/TXSenvmt.doc
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,610 +0,0 @@
-%% file: TXSenvmt.doc - Environments - TeXsis version 2.18
-%% @(#) $Id: TXSenvmt.doc,v 18.2 2000/05/17 00:19:46 myers Exp $
-%======================================================================*
-% (C) copyright 1988, 1991, 1994 by Eric Myers and Frank E. Paige.
-% This file is a part of TeXsis. Distribution and/or modifications
-% are allowed under the terms of the LaTeX Project Public License (LPPL).
-% See the file COPYING or ftp://ftp.texsis.org/texsis/LPPL
-%======================================================================*
-\ifx\undefined\bs \texsis\input TXSdocM.doc\draft\input Manual.aux\fi
-
-
-\section{Environments \label{sect.envmt}}
-
- \TeX\ ordinarily provides a layout appropriate for straight text
-and equations. The \TeXsis\ macros described below create environments
-which bypass the normal layout to format text in special ways, to create
-different types of lists, to display theorems and proofs, to display
-computer code, and even to print \TeX\ examples. With the exception of
-some of the specialized \TeX\ example macros, the syntax for all of
-these is generally of the form ``|\thing|...'' to begin the environment
-and ``|\endthing|'' to end it.
-
-%==================================================*
-\subsection{Flush or Centered Text}
-
- There are three environments in \TeXsis\ which center lines, set
-them flush left, or set them flush right, respectively:
-\description{~endflushright~\qquad}\clump
-
-\itm{\CS{center}}
-Centers all lines which follow, up to |\endcenter|.
-
-\itm{\CS{flushleft}}
-The lines which follow, up to |\endflushleft|,
-are made to line up flush to the left margin.
-
-\itm{\CS{flushright}}
-The lines which follow, up to |\endflushright|,
-are made to line up flush to the right margin.
-\enddescription
-In all of these environments line endings
-in the input file {\sl are} obeyed, as with \cs{obeylines}.
-\index{lines!centering}\index{lines!flush left}\index{lines!flush right}%
-For example,
-\TeXexample
-\center
-A Centered Line
-and Another
-\endcenter
-|endTeXexample
-produces
-
-\center\singlespaced\parskip=0pt
-A Centered Line
-and Another
-\endcenter
-\noindent
-There is also a \CS{raggedcenter} environment which does not respect line
-breaks but instead produces centered lines each of which is made as long
-as possible:
-\description{~raggedcenter~\qquad}\clump
-\itm{\CS{raggedcenter}}
-Center lines without respecting line endings.
-Terminate with |\endraggedcenter|.
-\enddescription
-\goodbreak\noindent
-For example
-\def\|{\ifmmode\Vert\else \char`\|\fi}
-\TeXexample
-\raggedcenter
-In the ragged centering environment each line
-is made as long as possible, and
-the successive lines are centered.
-\endraggedcenter
-|endTeXexample
-produces
-\raggedcenter\baselineskip=\normalbaselineskip
-In the ragged centering environment each line
-is made as long as possible, and
-the successive lines are centered.
-\endraggedcenter
-\noindent
-Note that \cs{raggedcenter} does not hyphenate words.
-
-
-%==================================================*
-\subsection{Simple Examples and Quoted Text}
-
- The \CS{example} environment can be used to display an example of
-something in a way that sets it off from the main text. The indentation
-of an example is the same as in the list environments (see
-\Sect{env-indent}). The text in an example will be single
-spaced, even if the rest of the document is double spaced. End this
-environment with \cs{endexample}. An example of the use of \CS{example}
-is
-\TeXexample
-|tentt\example
-Physics is not a finished logical system. Rather, at any
-moment it spans a great confusion of ideas, some that
-survive like folk epics from the heroic periods of the past,
-and other that arise like utopian novels from our dim
-premonitions of a future grand synthesis.
-\endexample
-|endTeXexample
-which produces\reference{Weinberg, 1972}
-S.~Weinberg,
-\booktitle{Gravitation and Cosmology: Principles and Applications of the
-General Theory of Relativity}
-(Wiley, New York, 1972) pg.~3
-\endreference\relax\index{Weinberg, Steven}
-\begingroup\tenpoint
-\EnvRightskip=\parindent % need this to show off defaults!
-\blockquote
-Physics is not a finished logical system. Rather, at any
-moment it spans a great confusion of ideas, some that
-survive like folk epics from the heroic periods of the past,
-and other that arise like utopian novels from our dim
-premonitions of a future grand synthesis.
-\endexample
-\endgroup
-Another example of \CS{example} is given in the next subsection as an
-example of the |\theorem| environment.
-
-Since one of the uses of \CS{example} is to display block quotes, as
-we've just done above, a synonym for \CS{example} is \CS{blockquote},
-which should be ended with \CS{endblockquote}.
-
-
-%==================================================*
-\subsection{Theorems and Proofs}
-
- Theorems,\index{theorems} \idx{lemmas}, and \idx{corollaries} are
-typeset in a quasi-SIAM format, with the number in boldface and the text
-in slanted type.
-They are automatically numbered, including the chapter and
-section numbers if \cs{showchaptIDtrue} and \cs{showsectIDtrue} are
-being used. The syntax for a theorem is
-\example
-\CS{theorem}\arg{label} \n
-\meta{text} \n
-\cs{endtheorem} \n
-\CS{proof} \n
-\meta{text} \n
-\cs{endproof}
-\endexample
-\noindent
-and similarly for \CS{lemma}, \CS{corollary} and \CS{definition}.
-Definitions are printed in Roman type, not slanted. The
-\cs{endproof} macro inserts a black box to mark the end of the
-proof. Subsequent references to theorems, lemmas, corollaries
-and definitions can be made in the text automatically using
-\CS{Theorem}\arg{label}, \CS{Lemma}\arg{label},
-\CS{Corollary}\arg{label}, and \CS{Definition}\arg{label},
-which give the appropriate name and number. An example of a
-Theorem is:
-\TeXexample
-|tentt\example
-\theorem{Cauchy}
-If $f(z)$ is a function of $z$ which is analytic on and inside of
-a contour $C$, then
-$$
-\int_C f(z)\,dz = 0
-$$
-\endtheorem
-\proof
-Left as an exercise to the reader.
-\endproof
-\endexample
-|endTeXexample
-which produces
-\begingroup
-\EnvRightskip=\parindent % need this to show off defaults!
-\tenpoint
-\example
-\theorem{Cauchy}
-If $f(z)$ is a function of $z$ which is analytic on and inside of
-a contour $C$, then
-$$
-\int_C f(z)\,dz = 0
-$$
-\endtheorem
-\proof
-Left as an exercise to the reader.
-\endproof
-\endexample
-\endgroup
-\noindent
-Note the use of \cs{example} to indent the theorem and proof and print
-them single spaced. Had the \cs{example} been omitted the theorem and
-proof would have had the same margins and spacing as the rest of the text.
-This theorem would be referred to in the text with |\Theorem{Cauchy}|,
-which gives ``\Theorem{Cauchy}.'' This should be sufficient in most
-cases, but if necessary one can refer to theorem or lemma numbers with
-the primitive \cs{use}|{|\meta{type}.\meta{label}|}|, where \meta{type} is
-either |Thm|, |Lem|, respectively. See Section~\use{sect.labels} for
-more on the use of \cs{use}.
-
-
-%==================================================*
-\subsection{Listing Computer Code}
-
- The \CS{Listing} environment can be used to display computer code
-or fragments of computer code. \index{listing computer code}%
-The text is printed in |\tt| type with line endings respected and every
-space counted. You can still use \TeX\ control sequences in this
-environment, but many of the special characters like |%|, |&|, and |#|
-are simply printable characters, since they are used in languages like
-C. (|$|, |_| and |^| also lose any special meaning in this
-environment.) Since the curly brackets used by \TeX\ are also used in C
-(and other languages) they are also simply characters in the |\Listing|
-environment. To perform grouping you should use \cs{bgroup} and
-\cs{egroup}. The backslash is also used in C as an escape character, so
-there has to be some way to print it --- you simply use |\\|; thus \cs{n}
-should be typed as |\\n|. You end the listing environment with
-\cs{endListing}. As an example here is a very famous little
-program,\reference{K&R}
-Brian W.~Kernighan and Dennis M.~Ritchie,
-\booktitle{The C Programming Language},
-(Prentice Hall, Englewood Clifs, NJ, 1978)
-\endreference
-\index{hello@``hello, world''}%
-%
-\Listing
-#include <stdio.h>
-main()
-{
- printf("hello, world\\n");
-}
-\endListing
-\noindent
-which was created by simply typing,
-\TeXexample
-|tentt\Listing
-#include <stdio.h>
-main()
-{
- printf("hello, world\\n");
-}
-\endListing
-|endTeXexample
-
-
-The indentation and spacing of the of the \CS{Listing} environment are
-controlled by the same parameters that control the indentation of the
-list environments, as described in Sect.~\use{sect.env-indent}. In
-addition, at the begining of the \CS{Listing} environment the macro
-\CS{everyListing} is executed, if it exists. You can define
-\CS{everyListing} to change the typestyle, type size, or spacing in the
-\CS{Listing} environment.
-
-An alternative way to list computer code is
-\CS{ListCodeFile}\arg{filename}, which will list the contents of a
-source code file exactly as it appears in the file (with no need to make
-|\n| into |\\n| and such). The call to this macro should {\sl not\/} be
-enclosed in a |\Listing| environment. If the example program above were
-contained in the source file |hello.c| it could be listed simply by
-typing
-\TeXexample
-\ListCodeFile{hello.c}
-|endTeXexample
-\noindent
-Long lines can bump up against the right margin.
-Some extra glue has been added to help allow for this, but another way
-to make such lines fit is to make the type size smaller before you
-invoke
-\CS{ListCodeFile} (you can do this using \CS{everyListing}).
-% MAYBE THE FOLLOWING GOES AWAY SOMEDAY SOON:
-Note also that tab characters in the code file may not be treated
-exactly correctly. In the present implementation of \TeXsis\ they will
-simply be replaced with eight spaces. We hope to be able to improve how
-this macro deals with tabs in in a future release of \TeXsis, but it is
-difficult to do it exactly right in all cases, so for now it may be best
-to change tabs to spaces in the source file if proper tab stops are
-needed. Most good editors (like emacs) already do this for you, so this
-should not pose much of a problem.
-
-
-%==================================================*
-\subsection{List Environments}
-
- When you want to make a list of things there are several ways
-to do it. The items in the list can be marked by a simple marker
-(like a bullet: $\bullet$), by a number or numbers and letters (as in
-an outline), or by some sort of descriptive text in the margin.
-In Plain \TeX\ you
-would make all of these kinds of lists using the |\item| macro. The
-``list environments'' described below are generalizations of |\item| for
-making these various kinds of lists:\index{lists!different kinds}
-\description{~description~\qquad}\clump
-\itm{\CS{itemize}}
-List of paragraphs marked by a bullet ($\bullet$) or other symbol.
-\index{lists!itemized}%
-
-\itm{\CS{enumerate}}
-List of paragraphs labeled by numbers or by combinations of
-numbers and letters, as for an outline.
-\index{lists!enumerated}%
-
-\itm{\CS{description}}
-List of items and paragraphs describing them.\index{lists!text labels}
-\enddescription
-In each list environment \cs{itm} is used to introduce each individual
-item. The environments are terminated with \cs{enditemize},
-\cs{endenumerate} and \cs{enddescription}, respectively. The three
-different kinds of environments can be nested to produce a list with
-several levels. The indentation of and spacing above and below the list
-environments can be easily controlled. This is described in
-Section~\use{sect.env-indent}.
-
-
-% ----------
-\subsubsection{Itemized lists}\relax
-\CS{itemize} produces paragraphs marked by \idx{bullets}~($\bullet$)
-or some other appropriate symbol; {} % a little extra space in this line
-this is usually used for a short list with only a single level of
-nesting where the order \hbox{either} does not matter or is already
-contained in the items of the list.
-\index{lists!itemized}\index{itemizing}%
-%% WE NEED A BETTER SHORT EXAMPLE THAN THIS -- SOMETHING SIMPLER?
-For example, |\itemize| was used to produce the list of
-sections of this manual which begins
-on \linkto{page.itemize}{page~\use{page.itemize}}. The first few items in
-this list were produced by saying:
-\TeXexample
-|tentt\itemize
-\itm Sect.~\use{sect.intro}:
-An introduction to \TeXsis\ and the philosophy behind the macros, and
-instructions on how to begin using \TeXsis.
-\itm Sect.~\use{sect.fonts}:
-Selecting sizes and fonts of type, choosing single,
-double, or triple spacing, and automatically handling
-quotation marks.
-\itm Sect.~\use{sect.eqns}:
-Automatic numbering of equations, automatic sizing of
-parentheses and brackets, and special symbols for
-physics equations....
-|endTeXexample
-\goodbreak\noindent
-A paragraph begun by |\itm| is not indented beyond the new left margin,
-but paragraphs that follow {\sl are} indented unless |\noindent| is
-specified (or if they also begin with |\itm|).
-
-You can change the symbol used to mark each item in the list to be
-anything you want by creating your own definition of \CS{itemmark}.
-For example, if you want the symbol to be a \cs{square} you
-would define \CS{itemmark} to be
-\TeXexample
-\def\itemmark{$\square$}
-|endTeXexample
-\noindent
-before invoking \CS{itemize}, or at least before the first |\itm|.
-An example is the following important checklist:\reference{Banzai, 1984}
-\booktitle{The Adventures of Buckaroo Banzai across the Eighth
-Dimension}, (Twentieth Century Fox, 1984)
-\endreference
-\itemize
-\def\itemmark{$\square$}
-\itm Event timer started (display: SINED)
-\itm Antenna Aligned (display: SEELED)
-\itm Oscillation overthruster armed (display: DELIVERED)
-\enditemize
-This was produced by saying:
-\TeXexample
-\itemize
-\def\itemmark{$\square$}
-\itm Event timer started (display: SINED)
-\itm Antenna Aligned (display: SEELED)
-\itm Oscillation overthruster armed (display: DELIVERED)
-\enditemize
-|endTeXexample
-\noindent
-\CS{itemize} starts a new group, which is ended by the \cs{enditemize},
-so in this example \CS{itemmark} reverts back to its
-previous definition when the list is finished.
-You can get a ``check-mark'' symbol instead of a square by
-replacing \cs{square} with \cs{surd}, or you can use any other symbol
-that suits you. Note though that in this example
-the \cs{square} is enclosed in math
-quotes --- you will have to remember this for any symbol which is defined
-in math mode.
-
-% ----------
-\subsubsection{Enumerated lists}
-
- \cs{enumerate} produces numbered paragraphs, either with a single level
-or nested several levels deep, like so:
-\index{lists!enumerated}%
-\TeXexample
-|tentt\tenpoint\parskip=0pt % this just makes our examples smaller
-\enumerate
-\itm Paragraph 1.
-\enumerate
-\itm sub-paragraph 1a.
-\enumerate
-\itm sub-sub-paragraph 1a(i).
-\itm sub-sub-paragraph 1a(ii).
-\endenumerate
-\itm sub-paragraph 1b.
-\itm and so on...
-\endenumerate
-\itm Paragraph 2.
-\itm and so on...
-\endenumerate
-|endTeXexample
-\noindent
-This produces the enumerated list:
-\def\ListExample{% Define once, use several times...
- \tenpoint\parskip=0pt\medskip
- \itm Paragraph 1.
- \enumerate
- \itm sub-paragraph 1a.
- \enumerate
- \itm sub-sub-paragraph 1a(i).
- \itm sub-sub-paragraph 1a(ii).
- \endenumerate
- \itm sub-paragraph 1b.
- \itm and so on...
- \endenumerate
- \itm Paragraph 2.
- \itm and so on...}
-\enumerate
-\ListExample
-\endenumerate
-The default form for the paragraph numbering is called \CS{enumPoints},
-which produces numbers of the form $ii.jj.kk$. You can also have the
-list printed in a standard outline format with a mixture of Roman
-numerals, letters, and Arabic numerals by saying \CS{enumOutline}.
-\index{lists!enumerated!styles}%
-Doing so to the example above produces:
-\enumOutline\enumerate
-\ListExample
-\endenumerate
-Unless enclosed within a group,
-the \CS{enumPoints} or \CS{enumOutline} style selected remains in effect
-until it is changed. The punctuation following the item number is
-\CS{enummark}, which by default is a period (\hbox{.}) but which can be
-redefined by the user [for example, you can change it to |\rparen| to
-obtain numbering of the form ``\hbox{2\rparen}'']. \CS{enummark} can
-also be used to change the spacing between the numbers and the text that
-follows.
-
-A third enumeration style, called \CS{enumNumOutline}, is also available.
-Top level items are labeled by arabic numbers, the level below by
-lower case roman letters, and the level below that by lower case
-roman numerals. With \CS{enumNumOutline} the example above becomes:
-\enumNumOutline\enumerate
-\ListExample
-\endenumerate
-
-If you prefer a different style of enumeration you can create your
-own |\enumWhatever| to use in place of \CS{enumPoint} or
-\CS{enumNumOutline}. To do so, copy the definition of \CS{enumPoints} or
-one of its brothers, along with the comments that go with them, from the
-file |TXSenvmt.tex| into a file called |TXSmods.tex| (see
-Appendix~\use{install}) and then make the appropriate changes as
-described in those comments.
-\index{lists!enumerated!styles}%
-
-% ----------
-\subsubsection{Lists Labeled by Text}\relax
-\CS{description} is used to create a list of words or other
-items labeled by some text.
-The syntax is\index{lists!text labels}
-\example\tenrm
-\CS{description}\arg{sample text} \n
-\cs{itm}\arg{label 1} |Paragraph 1...| \n
-\cs{itm}\arg{label 2} |Paragraph 2...| \n
-\cs{itm}|{...}| \n
-|\enddescription|
-\endexample
-The argument \meta{sample text} is not printed, but its length is used
-to determine the indentation for the labels on the items, so it
-should be the longest item, followed by some extra space. For example, the
-descriptions of the flush and centered environments at the beginning of
-this section of the manual were typeset with
-\TeXexample
-|tentt\description{~flushright~\qquad}
-\itm{\CS{center}}
-Center each line.
-\itm{\CS{flushleft}}
-Set each line flush left.
-\itm{\CS{flushright}}
-Set each line flush right.
-\enddescription
-|endTeXexample
-since |\flushright| is the longest of the three items. (|\CS| is a
-special macro defined for this manual for printing control sequence
-names.) Each item in the list is separated by a \cs{parskip},
-just as in itemized or enumerated lists.
-
-If the label text for an item comes out wider than the space
-allowed, the text will usually be broken into several lines
-so that it will fit in the indented margin (if this is possible!).
-Saying \CS{singlelinetrue} will instead put the label text on a
-line by itself, above the item. \CS{singlelinefalse} is the default,
-but this manual has been printed with \CS{singlelinetrue}.
-
-
-%==================================================*
-\subsubsection{Spacing of List Environments \label{sect.env-indent}}
-
-Each of the list environments described above is surrounded by the
-following skips:
-\index{lists!indentation}%
-\TeXexample
-\EnvTopskip = \medskipamount % space above the list
-\EnvBottomskip = \medskipamount % space below the list
-\EnvLeftskip = 2\parindent % left indent for the list
-\EnvRightskip = \parindent % right margin moves in too
-|endTeXexample
-\noindent
-You can change these as you please to any legal \TeX\ dimension. The
-space between
-items which are begun by \cs{itm} is taken from the \cs{parskip}. Since the
-list environment begins a group you can change the |\parskip| inside
-this group to control the spacing between |\itm|'s. For example, if you
-wanted no extra space between the items in the list you could say
-set the |\parskip| to zero, as in,
-\TeXexample
-\itemize
-\parskip=0pt \def\itemmark{$\triangleright$}
-\itm Event timer started (display: SINED)
-\itm Antenna Aligned (display: SEELED)
-\itm Oscillation overthruster armed (display: DELIVERED)
-\enditemize
-|endTeXexample
-\noindent
-which would produce:
-
-\itemize
-\parskip=0pt \def\itemmark{$\triangleright$}
-\itm Event timer started (display: SINED)
-\itm Antenna Aligned (display: SEELED)
-\itm Oscillation overthruster armed (display: DELIVERED)
-\enditemize
-
-
-%==================================================*
-\subsection{\TeX\ example macros}
-
- Typing \TeX\ examples can't be done in either the \cs{example}
-environment nor the |\Listing| environment, because the backslash must
-be turned into a simple printing character. There are several ways \TeXsis\
-allows you to show examples of \TeX\ code. First, to display \TeX\
-instructions separately, use
-\index{TeX@\TeX, typing examples}%
-\description{~TeXexample~\qquad}\clump
-%
-\itm{\CS{TeXexample}}
-Prints like an \cs{example}, but verbatim in \cs{tt} type, with
-``{\offtt |}'' made the escape character. Note that you must therefore
-say {\offtt |endTeXexample} to end the example, since "{\tt\bs}" is no
-longer the escape character!
-\enddescription
-To display \TeX\ instructions in running text use
-\description{~TeXexample~\qquad}\clump
-%
-\itm{\CS{TeXquoteon}}
-Make ``{\offtt |}'' a "\TeX\ quote" so that everything between
-{\offtt |}'s is printed verbatim in |\tt| type.
-%
-\itm{\CS{TeXquoteoff}}
-Turns off "\TeX\ quotes."
-%
-\enddescription
-
-All of the displayed examples in this document have been typed using
-\CS{TeXexample}, and many of the inline examples have been typed by
-putting \CS{TeXquoteon} at the beginning of the document and then typing
-{\offtt |\bs whatever\ttdots|}. For both \CS{TeXexample} and
-\CS{TeXquoteon} the only special character is the escape character
-``{\offtt |}''. In particular one must type
-\example\obeylines\tt
-\bs TeXexample
-\meta{TeX stuff}
-\char124endTeXexample
-\endexample
-with {\offtt |endTeXexample} instead of |\endTeXexample|. All other
-characters are set in |\tt| type without any interpretation. The input
-line breaks and spacing are respected, including any leading spaces on
-the lines. \TeX\ commands can be used within a |\TeXexample| environment
-by typing {\offtt |macro} in place of |\macro|, {\offtt |bgroup} and
-{\offtt |egroup} in place of |{| and |}|, etc. In particular, a {\offtt
-|} can be obtained by typing {\offtt |char124}. If you want to display
-the results of a complicated macro inside the |\TeXexample| environment
-you should probably define a different macro to display these results
-and then invoke that macro inside the environment. For example, in this
-manual we have sometimes inserted ``meta'' constructions showing where
-to insert a particular piece of text by using a |\meta| macro which
-encloses its argument in angle brackets (see the example immediately
-above). But in a |\TeXexample| you cannot say ``{\tt \VT meta\lb TeX
-stuff\rb},'' because the ``|{|'' and ``|}|'' are no longer grouping
-characters. Instead you could define the temporary macro |\tmp| as
-\TeXexample
-\def\tmp{\meta{TeX stuff}}
-|endTeXexample
-\noindent
-and then inside the |\TeXexample| environment simply type {\tt \VT tmp}
-to insert the phrase ``\meta{TeX stuff}''.
-
-The indentation and
-spacing of the |\TeXexample| environment are controlled by the same
-parameters that control the indentation of the list environments, as
-described in Sect.~\use{sect.env-indent}.
-The general method used by all of these macros to turn off \TeX's usual
-mechanism for interpreting special characters is discussed in \TeXbook,
-p.~421ff. The \cs{begintt} and \cs{beginlines} macros described there are
-included in \TeXsis\ for completeness.
-
-%>>> EOF TXSenvmt.doc <<<
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/texsis/base/TXSeqns.doc b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/texsis/base/TXSeqns.doc
deleted file mode 100644
index d7c0e43aa90..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/texsis/base/TXSeqns.doc
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,370 +0,0 @@
-%% file: TXSeqns.doc - Equations - TeXsis version 2.18
-%% @(#) $Id: TXSeqns.doc,v 18.2 2000/05/17 00:19:46 myers Exp $
-%======================================================================*
-% (C) Copyright 1989, 1992 by Eric Myers and Frank E. Paige
-% This file is a part of TeXsis. Distribution and/or modifications
-% are allowed under the terms of the LaTeX Project Public License (LPPL).
-% See the file COPYING or ftp://ftp.texsis.org/texsis/LPPL
-%======================================================================*
-\ifx\undefined\meta\texsis\input TXSdocM.doc\draft\fi
-
-\section{Equations \label{sect.eqns}}
-
-Plain \TeX\ was designed to make it easy to typeset equations
-and mathematical formulae. \TeXsis\ provides additional features
-that make the job even easier. Among these are the automatic
-numbering of equations (with the ability to refer to numbered equations
-by symbolic labels), automatic sizing of parentheses, and a
-collection of special symbols which are often used by physicists.
-
-\subsection{Equation Numbering \label{sect.eqno}}%
-In Plain \TeX\ equation numbers are added to displayed
-equations with the \cs{eqno} command, as described in Chapter~19 of
-\TeXbook. For example, typing
-\index{equations!numbering}
-\TeXexample
-$$ E=mc^2. \eqno (47) $$
-|endTeXexample
-will produce
-\offparens
-$$
-E = mc^2 \eqno (47)
-$$
-With \TeXsis\ the procedure for getting
-automatically numbered equations is similar, except that you use
-\CS{EQN} instead of \cs{eqno}, and what follows this (up to the
-``|$$|'') is not used as the number of the equation, but as an
-internal {\it label}\, for the equation. For example, if you had
-already used |\EQN| to create three numbered equations, then
-typing
-\eqnum=3
-\TeXexample
-$$ \vec F = -{G_N Mm \over r^2} \, \hat r
- \EQN Newton $$
-|endTeXexample
-would produce
-$$
-\vec F = -{G_N Mm \over r^2} \, \hat r
- \EQN Newton
-$$
-\TeXsis\ automatically assigns the next available equation number to
-the equation and prints this number on the right, in parentheses.
-The equations that follow the one above would be numbered 4.5,
-4.6, and so on.
-
- The purpose of the "label" after the |\EQN| is to let you
-refer to the equation in the text without knowing the equation
-number that has been assigned to it. For example, to refer to
-\Eq{Newton} above, which has the label ``Newton'', you might type
-\index{equations!labeling}
-\TeXexample
-The dependence of the force on the inverse square of the distance
-can be seen in \Eq{Newton}.
-|endTeXexample
-This would be printed as:
-\example
-The dependence of the force on the inverse square of the distance
-can be seen in \Eq{Newton}.
-\endexample
-The control sequence \CS{Eq}\arg{label} gives the same result
-as typing "|Eq.~(|$nn$|)|", where $nn$ is the appropriate
-equation number for the given label. Two similar control
-words allow you to refer to a range of equations, or to refer to
-an equation simply by number, without the preceding "|Eq.~|."
-Typing \CS{Eqs}\arg{label} produces "Eqs.~($nn$)", while
-\CS{Ep}\arg{label} gives just the equation number associated
-with the label, enclosed in parentheses. Thus typing
-\TeXexample
-The class of metrics defined by \Eqs{cond-1} through
-\Ep{cond-5} can all be shown to satisfy inequality
-\Ep{triangle}, as well as the condition in \Eq{Killing}.
-|endTeXexample
-would produce output something like
-\example
-The class of metrics defined by Eqs.~(14) through
-(19) can all be shown to satisfy inequality
-(23), as well as the condition in Eq.~(7).
-\endexample
-
- Almost any sequence of characters can be used as a "label" for
-an equation. This includes letters, numbers, and punctuation
-marks, but it is best to avoid \TeX's special characters, such as
-|\|, |&|, |}|, |{|, |$|, |_|, and |^|. Spaces may be included
-but will be ignored, and there {\sl is} a difference between
-uppercase and lowercase letters. Also, the semicolon (|;|) is
-reserved for a special purpose, which is described below.
-
- You may want to give equations "names," as in the example
-called "Newton" above, or you can give the equations labels that
-are numbers. This is the best thing to do if the equations in
-the original manuscript already have numbers, but if you do this
-then you should be sure to remember that the internal label and
-the number which is printed (the ``external'' number) are not
-necessarily the same. If the equation {\it labeled} ``15'' is
-the fifteenth equation in the document then it will also be
-equation number 15, but if you move the equation around in the
-file so that it is the sixth equation in the document it will be
-printed as equation 6, even though it has the label ``15''.
-
- If you have a heavily edited document and the arrangement of
-the numbers and labels gets confusing there is a useful aid to
-help straighten things out. If you say
-\example
-\CS{eqnotracetrue}
-\endexample
-then the equation numbers will be printed as usual, but with the label
-appearing next to it in the right margin in square brackets.
-For example, the equation
-\TeXexample
-$$
-(i\gamma^\mu \partial_\mu - m)\psi (x) = 0
- \EQN Dirac $$
-|endTeXexample
-when printed with |\eqnotracetrue| would appear as:
-\begingroup\eqnotracetrue
-$$
-(i\gamma^\mu \partial_\mu - m)\psi (x) = 0
-\EQN Dirac$$
-\endgroup
-Since the label appears in the margin the spacing of your document
-remains exactly the same.
-Obviously you would not print the final copy of the document this way,
-but it can be very useful for editing. You can turn off this
-equation tracing feature anytime by saying \cs{eqnotracefalse}. If you
-say \cs{draft} at the beginning of your document then the equation
-tracing will be turned on automatically (along with some other useful
-features).
-\index{equations!labeling}
-
-\bigskip
-
- Sometimes when several equations are closely related you will
-want to give the whole set the same equation number. To distinguish
-separate formulae in such a group you then generally add a letter to
-the number. You might, for example, have the equation
-\index{equations!multiple}
-$$
-J^2\ket{j,m} = j(j+1) \ket{j,m} \EQN eigen;a
-$$
-and then a short while later you might have the related equation
-$$
-J_z\ket{j,m} = m \ket{j,m} \EQN eigen;b
-$$
-These may be referred to together as \Eqs{eigen} or may be
-referred to separately as \Eqs{eigen;a} and \Ep{eigen;b}. To get
-an equation number with a letter in it you still use \CS{EQN}, but
-you add the appropriate letter to the end of the label, separated
-{from} the label by a semicolon. The equations above were created
-by typing:
-\TeXexample
-$$
-J^2\ket{j,m} = j(j+1) \ket{j,m} \EQN eigen;a
-$$
-|endTeXexample
-and
-\TeXexample
-$$
-J_z\ket{j,m} = m \ket{j,m} \EQN eigen;b
-$$
-|endTeXexample
-The semicolon is not printed --- it is just used to separate the
-letter from the label. If the letter is ``a'' then the next
-available equation number is used, as usual, but if the letter is
-anything else then the equation number is not incremented and
-instead the number from the previous equation is used. You can
-use any sequence of letters you like, although it is usually best
-to use ``a,b,c$\ldots$'' for consecutive equations.
-
- To refer to equations that have both numbers and letters you
-can either use the letter to pick out a specific equation, or
-simply leave out the letter and use the label to refer to the
-whole set together. You can use either \CS{Eq} or \CS{Eqs} to do
-this. For example, the sentence after \Eq{eigen;b} above was
-created by typing
-\TeXexample
-These may be referred to together as \Eqs{eigen}
-or may be referred to separately as
-\Eqs{eigen;a} and \Ep{eigen;b}.
-|endTeXexample
-\index{equations!multiple}
-
-\bigskip
-
- You will eventually encounter an equation that is so long that
-it has to be broken up into several lines, or you will want to
-print several equations together, lined up by their "$=$" signs.
-In plain \TeX\ you would use |\eqalign| to display these kinds of
-equations, or |\eqalignno| to display them with equation numbers.
-With \TeXsis\ you should use \CS{EQNalign} in place of
-\cs{eqalign} or \cs{eqalignno}
-to get automatically assigned equation numbers in aligned
-equations. As in plain \TeX, the alignment of the
-equations is controlled by |&| and |\cr|. An equation number is
-assigned to a particular line by putting |\EQN| followed by a
-label on that line, before the |\cr|. The label is everything
-{from} the |\EQN| up to the |\cr|. For example,
-\index{equations!alignment}
-\TeXexample
-|smalltt$$
-\EQNalign{
-{dp \over dt} &= - {\partial H \over \partial q}
-\EQN Hamilton-1 \cr
-{dq \over dt} &= {\partial H \over \partial p}
-\EQN Hamilton-2 \cr}
-$$
-|endTeXexample
-produces the two aligned and numbered equations
-$$
-\EQNalign{
-{dp \over dt} &= - {\partial H \over \partial q} \EQN Hamilton-1 \cr
-{dq \over dt} &= {\partial H \over \partial p} \EQN Hamilton-2 \cr}
-$$
-
- \cs{EQNalign} can be used both for typing multi-part equations or for
-splitting an equation which is too long to fit on a single line.
-However, when splitting a single long equation into several lines it may
-actually be better to use |$$\eqalign{|\meta{formula}|}| followed by
-|\EQN| \meta{label}|$$|. For example, in
-$$
-\eqalign{
-{\cal L}_{NC} &= {-g \over 2\cos\theta_W} \sum_i
- \bar\psi_i [ (t_{3,i}-2Q_i\sin^2\theta_W) \gamma_\mu
- - t_{3,i}\gamma_\mu\gamma_5 ]\psi_i Z^\mu \cr
-&\quad - e \sum_i Q_i \bar\psi_i \gamma_\mu \psi_i A^\mu \cr}
-\EQN{NC}
-$$
-the equation number is centered between the two lines of the equation,
-which looks better.
-This equation was produced using \cs{eqalign} by typing:
-\TeXexample
-|smalltt$$
-\eqalign{
-{\cal L}_{NC} &= {-g \over 2\cos\theta_W} \sum_i
- \bar\psi_i [ (t_{3,i}-2Q_i\sin^2\theta_W) \gamma_\mu
- - t_{3,i}\gamma_\mu\gamma_5 ]\psi_i Z^\mu \cr
-&\quad - e \sum_i Q_i \bar\psi_i \gamma_\mu \psi_i A^\mu \cr}
-\EQN{NC}
-$$
-|endTeXexample
-
- Closely related equations can be displayed together with the
-same equation number by following the label with a semicolon and
-a letter, as already described above. For example, the set of
-equations,
-$$
-\EQNalign{
-\nabla \cdot \vec D &= 4 \pi \rho \EQN EM;a \cr
-\nabla \times \vec E &=
- - {1 \over c} {\partial \vec B \over \partial t}
- \EQN EM;b \cr
-\nabla \cdot \vec B &= 0 \EQN EM;c \cr
-\nabla \times \vec H &= {4 \pi \over c} \vec J
- + {1 \over c} {\partial \vec D \over \partial t}
- \EQN EM;d \cr}
-$$
-is produced by typing:
-\TeXexample
-|smalltt$$
-\EQNalign{
-\nabla \cdot \vec D &= 4 \pi \rho \EQN EM;a \cr
-\nabla \times \vec E &=
- - {1 \over c} {\partial \vec B \over \partial t}
- \EQN EM;b \cr
-\nabla \cdot \vec B &= 0 \EQN EM;c \cr
-\nabla \times \vec H &= {4 \pi \over c} \vec J
- + {1 \over c} {\partial \vec D \over \partial t}
- \EQN EM;d \cr}
-$$
-|endTeXexample
-Note that the alignment of the equations is controlled by |&| and
-|\cr|, not by the arrangement used when the equation was typed
-into the manuscript file. Still, it is recommended that you
-arrange long sets of equations like these in some sort of clear
-pattern when you type them. This will both reduce errors when
-the equation is typed and make it easier for you to read the file
-when you are looking at it later. Remember, \TeX\ ignores all
-spaces and tabs when it reads material for equations or displayed
-equations.
-\index{equations!alignment}
-
- \CS{EQNdoublealign} is similar to \cs{EQNalign} but makes
-equations with two alignment tabs. For example,
-\TeXexample
-|smalltt$$
-\EQNdoublealign{
-\sigma_i^2 &= 1 & \EQN Pauli;a \cr
-\sigma_i\sigma_j + \sigma_j\sigma_i &= 0 \qquad & (i \ne j)
- \EQN Pauli;b \cr
-\sigma_i\sigma_j &= i\sigma_k \qquad & (i,j,k\ {\rm cyclic})
- \EQN Pauli;c \cr}
-$$
-|endTeXexample
-produces
-$$
-\EQNdoublealign{
-\sigma_i^2 &= 1 & \EQN Pauli;a \cr
-\sigma_i\sigma_j + \sigma_j\sigma_i &= 0 \qquad & (i \ne j)
- \EQN Pauli;b \cr
-\sigma_i\sigma_j &= i\sigma_k \qquad & (i,j,k\ {\rm cyclic})
- \EQN Pauli;c \cr}
-$$
-with both the equal signs and the parentheses aligned. The second
-|&| is required in the first line, because without it the |\EQN| would
-have aligned the equation number with the parentheses enclosing $i\ne j$.
-
- Plain \TeX\ also lets you display formulae on several lines
-without any alignment by using \cs{displaylines}. With \TeXsis\ you
-can use the similar control sequence \CS{EQNdisplaylines} to get an
-automatically assigned equation number for any line in such a
-display. The pattern is the same as in |\displaylines|, but you
-simply insert \cs{EQN}\meta{label} in front of the \cs{cr} on the
-line you want numbered. \CS{EQNdisplaylines} produces less space
-between the equations than would result from typing them
-separately, and generally looks better for closely related equations.
-
- All of the equation alignment macros are special cases of the plain
-\TeX\ macro \cs{halign}. Therefore, if necessary, the vertical spacing can
-be adjusted by inserting
-\example
-\cs{noalign}\cs{vskip}\meta{dimen}
-\endexample
-where \meta{dimen} can be either a positive or a negative dimension.
-\bigskip
-
- In a long document there are several different ways to number
-the equations. You could just start at ``1'' and count up for
-each new equation, but sometimes it is better to number the
-equations consecutively within each chapter or section of a
-document. In \TeXsis\ the default form for an equation number is
-$cc.ss.nn$ where $cc$ stands for the chapter number, $ss$ is the
-section number, and $nn$ is the equation number within that
-section. Whenever you move to a new section or chapter (using
-\cs{section} or \cs{chapter}, as described in
-Section~\use{sect.sects}) the number $ss$ or $cc$ is incremented
-by one and the number $nn$ is reset to one. If you are not using
-chapter divisions in your document then the chapter number $cc$
-is not made a part of the equation number, and the number $nn$ is
-reset only at the beginning of a section. If you are not using
-section divisions in your document then the section number $ss$
-is not made a part of the equation number, and the number $nn$ is
-reset to one only at the beginning of a chapter. If you use
-neither chapter nor section divisions in your document then
-neither the chapter number $cc$ nor the section number $ss$ will
-be made a part of the equation number, and the equations will
-simply be numbered consecutively, 1, 2, 3\dots.
-\index{equations!numbering}
-
- Although the system just described for forming equation
-numbers gives a result that is usually what you will want for
-your equation numbering, you can change the method by setting
-either of two switches. If you say |\showchaptIDfalse| then the
-chapter number $cc$ will not be made a part of the equation
-number even though you may be using chapter level divisions in
-your document. Similarly, saying |\showsectIDfalse| prevents the
-section number $ss$ from being used in the equation number. The
-opposites of these two switches are \cs{showchaptIDtrue} and
-\cs{showsectIDtrue}. The equation number $nn$ is reset to one only
-when a section or chapter number that is supposed to be visible
-is incremented, as you might expect.
-
-%>>> EOF TXSeqns.doc <<<
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/texsis/base/TXSfigs.doc b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/texsis/base/TXSfigs.doc
deleted file mode 100644
index 06d77bc35d9..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/texsis/base/TXSfigs.doc
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,703 +0,0 @@
-%% file: TXSfigs.doc - Figures and Tables - TeXsis version 2.18
-%% @(#) $Id: TXSfigs.doc,v 18.2 2000/05/17 00:19:46 myers Exp $
-%======================================================================*
-% (C) Copyright 1989, 1992,1993,1994, 1997 by Eric Myers and Frank E. Paige
-% This file is a part of TeXsis. Distribution and/or modifications
-% are allowed under the terms of the LaTeX Project Public License (LPPL).
-% See the file COPYING or ftp://ftp.texsis.org/texsis/LPPL
-%======================================================================*
-\ifx\undefined\meta \texsis\input TXSdocM.doc\input Manual.aux\draft\fi
-
-% Select the Penguin shown at the end of the section
-% (the one in the middle is always the Feynman diagram).
-
-%\def\penguin{penguin2} % to use Larry Ewing's Linux Penguin
-\def\penguin{penguin} % to use the Feynman diagram.
-
-
-
-\section{Figures and Tables \label{sect.figures}}
-
-Technical papers often include tables and/or figures. Regardless of how
-the contents of the figures or tables are created, these have a lot in
-common in the way they are generally treated. \TeXsis\ makes use of
-\TeX's \idx{floating insertion} capabilities (see Chapter~15 of
-\TeXbook) to insert figures and tables on the current page or on a
-following page. It is also possible to have figures or tables saved and
-printed at the end of the document. Captions are easily added either
-above or below the figure or table. Both kinds of objects are
-automatically assigned numbers, which are associated with internal
-labels so that they may be referred to in the text without having to
-know their order. It is possible to create a list of the figures and
-tables which appear in a document, much like creating a table of
-contents. Figures themselves
-are generally created outside of \TeX, either by hand
-or by computer graphics programs, while tables can be created using
-\TeX\ commands. The most complicated tables have vertical and
-horizontal lines (called ``rules'') to guide the reader's eye and to
-make the table more readable. \TeXsis\ has some very easy to use
-commands for making ruled tables.
-
-Before discussing \TeXsis's figure and table making macros in detail we
-should mention that \TeXsis\ also adds a new insertion class to those of
-Plain \TeX. In Plain \TeX\ saying \cs{topinsert}, \cs{midinsert} or
-\cs{pageinsert} begins a \idx{floating insertion} (ended by
-\cs{endinsert}) which will appear somewhere on the current page or a
-following page. Material entered with a \cs{topinsert} appears at the
-top of the current page, if there is room for it, or at the top of the
-next page where there is room. A \cs{midinsert} attempts to insert the
-text into the current page right where it is invoked, but if the
-insertion won't fit it becomes a \cs{topinsert}. Saying \cs{pageinsert}
-creates an insertion which takes up a whole page by itself.
-%
-In \TeXsis\ you can also say \cs{bottominsert} to make a \idx{floating
-insertion} that will appear at the bottom of the current page, if it
-will fit, or at the bottom of the next page where it will fit.
-There is also \cs{heavyinsert}, which like \cs{midinsert} tries first to
-insert the material into the current page right where it is called, but
-in this case becomes a \cs{bottominsert} if the material wont' fit.
-
-
-%==================================================*
-\subsection{Figures \label{sect.figs}}
-
-\TeX\ is designed for technical typesetting, but does not include a
-graphics standard, so to include a figure or drawing in a document
-it is necessary to
-leave blank space and to either glue the drawing in later or to arrange
-for the figure material to be inserted by some mechanism outside of
-\TeX\ when the page is actually printed (e.g., using the \cs{special}
-command or the \cs{epsfbox} command described later).
-
- Imagine that you wish to insert into the text a drawing of a
-``\idx{penguin} diagram,'' which is about 6~cm tall. You could create
-the space for this figure at the top of a page, along with a caption,
-with the following commands:\index{figures}%
-\TeXexample
-|smalltt\figure{Penguin}
-\hrule
-\vskip 2cm
-\line{\hss (glue your penguin here) \hfil}
-\vskip 2cm
-\hrule
-\Caption
-Sample figure showing how easy it is to insert
-numbered figures with captions in \TeXsis.
-\endCaption
-\endfigure
-|endTeXexample
-\noindent
-This produces \Fig{Penguin} (we put the \cs{hrule}'s in just to show
-off the empty space). ``Penguin'' is the
-label for the figure, so to refer to the figure in the text we typed
-\CS{Fig}|{Penguin}|, which produced ``\Fig{Penguin}.'' The caption can be
-placed either before or after the figure: if it is to be at the top then
-\CS{Caption} must be the first token after |\figure|. As shown, the
-caption text must be terminated with \CS{endCaption}. When the caption is
-printed it will automatically start with the figure number in bold type,
-followed by the caption text. The caption is indented on both sides if
-it is more than one line long and centered otherwise.
-
- \CS{caption}\arg{text} is equivalent to \CS{Caption}\meta{text}
-\CS{endCaption} and may be more convenient for short captions.
-It should be avoided for very long captions to keep from overflowing \TeX's
-internal memory.
-
-\figure{Penguin}
-\hrule
-\vskip 2cm
-\line{\hss (glue your \idx{penguin} here) \hfil}
-\vskip 2cm
-\hrule
-\Caption
-Sample figure showing how easy it is to insert
-numbered figures with captions in \TeXsis.
-\endCaption
-\infiglist{Sample figure showing how easy it is
-to insert numbered figures with captions in \TeXsis.}
-\endfigure
-
- There are commands to create figures for each of the \idx{insertion
-classes} of Plain \TeX (that is, \cs{midinsert}, \cs{topinsert} and
-\cs{pageinsert}) along with the new insertion class
-added by \TeXsis\ (\cs{bottominsert}) .
-In addition, there are special commands for creating wide or full page
-figures while in double column mode (which is described later in
-Section~\use{sect.dcol}):
-\index{figures!placement}%
-\singlelinetrue
-\description{XfullFigureXXXXXX}\clump
-%
-\itm{\CS{figure}\arg{label\/}}
-Inserts a figure at the top of the current page, if there is enough room for
-it, or at the top of the next available page.
-%
-\itm{\CS{midfigure}\arg{label\/}}
-Inserts a figure at the current position, if there is enough room for it, or at
-the top of the next page if there is not.
-%
-\itm{\CS{fullfigure}\arg{label\/}}
-Inserts a figure on a separate page. The body of the figure should
-normally contain a \cs{vfill} to allow the figure to stretch to fill the
-whole page.
-%
-\itm{\CS{bottomfigure}\arg{label\/}}
-Inserts the figure at the bottom of the current page, if there is room
-for it, or on the bottom of the next page where there is room.
-%
-\itm{\CS{heavyfigure}\arg{label\/}}
-Inserts a figure at the current position, if there is room for it on the
-page, or at the bottom of the page following if there is not. This is
-therefore like \CS{midfigure}, except that if the figure can't be fit on
-the page it ends up on the bottom of a following page, not the top.
-%
-\itm{\cs{widetopfigure}\arg{label\/}}
-Inserts a figure at the top of a page across both columns in
-double column format. Equivalent to \CS{figure} in single column
-format. \cs{widefigure} is a synonym.
-%
-\itm{\cs{widefullfigure}\arg{label\/}}
-Inserts a full page figure across both columns in double column
-format. Equivalent to \CS{fullfigure} in single column format.
-%
-\itm{\CS{endfigure}}
-Ends any of the figure insertions described above.
-%
-\enddescription
-\noindent
-In all cases \meta{label\/} is an internal label which is assigned to
-the figure number. The figure number will include the chapter and
-section numbers in the format ``$cc.ss.nn$'' if \cs{showchaptIDtrue} and
-\cs{showsectIDtrue} have been selected.
-\index{figures!placement}%
-
- The body of the figure can include any vertical mode
-commands, as in the example above. When you are simply leaving
-space for a figure to be glued in later a convenient way to specify the
-amount of space to leave is to \cs{vskip} by some amount proportional to
-the width of the current column or page. The dimension \cs{colwidth} is
-the width of the page (the \cs{hsize}) in single column mode and the width
-of the current column in double column mode. So for example, if you
-have a figure which was half again as tall as it is wide you could say
-\index{figures!size}%
-\example
-\cs{vskip} |1.5|\cs{colwidth}
-\endexample
-Another way to standardize the space reserved for figures is to define
-your own dimension, such as |\myfigsize|, to use in the \cs{vskip}
-above. For example,
-\TeXexample
-\newdim\myfigsize
-\myfigsize= 1.5\colwidth
-|endTeXexample
-\noindent
-and then |\vskip\myfigsize|. This has the same effect as the previous
-example, but |\myfigsize| can be changed to any valid dimension.
-\index{figures!size}%
-
-
-%==================================================*
-\subsection{Encapsulated PostScript Graphics}
-
-Instead of simply gluing figures into a paper by hand it is possible to
-have computer generated graphs and drawings automatically inserted into
-a document. Unfortunately, the method can vary from
-computer to computer and printer to printer. Recall that \TeX\
-produces as output a \idx{DVI file}, which contains device independent
-instructions for typesetting the document. To actually print the
-document the \idx{DVI file} must be translated into instructions for
-the specific printer being used by a suitable device driver. It is at
-this stage, when the device driver is converting the \idx{DVI file} to
-printer instructions, that graphs and drawings may be inserted.
-However, since different printers may require different kinds of
-instructions, there are many different device drivers, each having its
-own way of including drawings in the document.
-
-In recent years some standardization has become possible, because many
-printer manufacturers have chosen \idx{PostScript} as the ``language''
-for giving instructions to their printers. PostScript contains
-commands both for drawing and for typesetting text. Still, there are
-some problems, because there are many different device drivers for
-converting \idx{DVI file}s to \idx{PostScript}, and they all treat the
-inclusion of figures slightly differently. Also, while all of these filters
-require that the drawings to be included are themselves already in
-PostScript, there are several variations of \idx{PostScript}, leading to
-further problems of incompatibility.
-
-Until there is some standardization for inserting drawings into \TeX\
-documents (and perhaps to encourage it) we recommend using the scheme
-which (a) seems to be the easiest to use and the most well thought
-out, and (b) is potentially available to the widest group of users.
-Our choice is, first, to use a specific variation of PostScript known
-as ``Encapsulated'' \idx{PostScript} (EPS).
-\index{Encapsulated PostScript|see{PostScript}} Most newer computer
-programs which produce graphics output, including Mathematica, |xfig|,
-and |paw|, can produce EPS output files. To include these in the text
-we have chosen to rely on the program |dvips| \index{dvips} by Tomas
-Rokicki,\reference{Rokicki} Tomas Rokicki, \booktitle{{\tt dvips}
-User's Manual}.
-The source code for {\tt dvips} is available from CTAN
-in the directory {\tt dviware/dvips}
-\endreference
-\index{Rokicki, Tomas} along with his \TeX\ macros for including EPS
-graphics, called |epsf.tex|. Be warned that there are other programs
-called ``dvips,'' but as far as we know only Rokicki's version will
-work with |epsf.tex|. We expect that when including drawings in \TeX\
-is standardized, it will be based on Rokicki's scheme or something
-close to it.
-
-\bigskip
-
-To include EPS graphics in a document using the |epsf.tex| macros you
-must first input the macros. Somewhere early in your manuscript file you
-should put:
-\TeXexample
-\input epsf.tex
-|endTeXexample
-You can have the macros report the size of a figure when it is
-included by saying:
-\TeXexample
-\epsfverbosetrue
-|endTeXexample
-At the point where you want a graph or drawing included
-you simply say:
-\example
-\CS{epsfbox}|{foo.ps}|
-\endexample
-This will include the drawing from the file called `|foo.ps|,' which must
-already exist in the current directory. \TeX\ will leave enough room
-for the figure (by creating a box of the correct size) and will use a
-\cs{special} command to insert instructions into the DVI file telling
-the DVI to PS translator to read in the \idx{EPS file} |foo.ps|.
-
-Once the document has been processed by \TeXsis\ and the DVI file has
-been produced you will convert it to a PS file with the ``\idx{dvips}''
-program. If your DVI file is called |myfile.dvi| then the command is
-simply:
-\TeXexample
-dvips myfile
-|endTeXexample
-This will convert |myfile.dvi| to PostScript,
-and depending on how dvips is set up at your installation it will either
-put the output in the file |myfile.ps| or it will send it directly to
-the default printer (see the man pages for dvips on how to change this
-behavior, or try a short example to see how it is set up on your computer).
-Note that the EPS files to be included must be in the same directory as
-|myfile.dvi| when you run dvips, so that they can be merged into the final
-output file (or you can specify the full path filename in the
-\CS{epsfbox} command).
-
-On Unix systems you may not be able to use the |lpr -d|
-command if you have included EPS files in the document. This command
-runs the DVI file through dvips (or some other DVI to PS filter) in a
-different directory, and the EPS files will therefore not be included
-unless you have used a full path name for the file.
-
-
-If you use the latest version of
-the |xdvi| program to preview DVI files on your workstation
-you will find that it automatically includes EPS graphics in the
-display, but some other previewing programs (such as |texsun|, or older
-versions of |xdvi|) will not. Even if the previewer does not know how
-to deal with the \cs{special} commands in the DVI file, you will
-see that \TeX\ has left room for the figure. Once you have converted
-your DVI and \idx{EPS file}s into a PS file you can preview that file
-if you have a PostScript previewer, such as GhostScript. Then your
-graphs and drawings will appear just as they would if you had printed
-the PS file.
-
-\bigskip
-
-Sometimes you will find that more room has been left for the figure than
-is really needed. The way \CS{epsfbox} decides how much room to leave is
-by reading the first part of the \idx{EPS file} to find a line
-which looks like:
-\TeXexample
-%%BoundingBox: 67 176 544 616
-|endTeXexample
-\noindent
-The two pairs of numbers are the coordinates of the lower left and upper
-right corners of the figure, respectively. They are measured in
-printer's points (1/72${}{\hbox{nd}}$ of an inch). If you don't like
-the positioning of the figure given by the original bounding box in the
-PostScript file you can override it by specifying a new bounding box
-like so:
-\TeXexample
-\epsfbox[0 180 540 700]{file.ps}
-|endTeXexample
-\noindent
-You may have to experiment with positioning the BoundingBox for the best
-effect, and it may help to look at the \idx{PostScript} file to see what the
-default BoundingBox is and adjust things using that coordinate system.
-
-\bigskip
-
-You can also control the size of the included graphic using
-\CS{epsfxsize} or \CS{epsfysize} before you call \CS{epsfbox}. The
-figure will be enlarged or reduced to fit the dimension you specify.
-Saying
-\example
-\CS{epsfxsize}|=|\meta{dimen} \CS{epsfbox}|{figure.ps}|
-\endexample
-will scale the drawing in the file |figure.ps| so that its {\sl width\/}
-is \meta{dimen}, with the height scaled accordingly, while saying
-\example
-\CS{epsfysize}|=|\meta{dimen} \CS{epsfbox}|{graph.ps}|
-\endexample
-will scale the drawing in the file |graph.ps| so that its {\sl height\/} is
-\meta{dimen}, with the width scaled accordingly. You can only specify
-the width or height, but not both at the same time. Whatever change of
-size you specify will only be applied to the \CS{epsfbox} command which
-immediately follows. After that, subsequent included graphics will
-revert to their natural sizes unless you also specify a particular size
-for them.
-
-The \CS{epsfbox} command creates a box of the proper size, into which
-the figure is later drawn.
-That is all.
-If you want the figure to be centered across the page then you will
-have to do so yourself, using \cs{centerline} or something similar.
-The advantage of this is that since figures are simply treated as
-boxes, you can stack them or arrange them in a row, or do whatever
-else you would with boxes.
-This gives you much more flexibility to construct complicated figures
-from several EPS files.
-
-\figure{Penguin2}
-\centerline{\epsfysize=4cm\epsfbox{penguin.eps}}
-\Caption
-Example of including EPS graphics in a figure.
-\endCaption
-\endfigure
-
-So now consider the earlier example of including a 4~cm tall
-\idx{penguin} diagram in a figure, but now assuming that the drawing
-exists as an EPS graphic in the file |penguin.eps|.
-Assume also that we need to override the default bounding box in that
-file.
-The commands to do this are:
-\TeXexample
-\figure{Penguin2}
-\centerline{\epsfysize=4cm \epsfbox{penguin.eps}}
-\Caption
-Example of including EPS graphics in a figure.
-\endCaption
-\endfigure
-|endTeXexample
-\relax
-The results are shown in \Fig{Penguin2}.
-The drawing was created with Bill Dimm's {\sl FeynDiagram}
-package,\reference{FeynDiagram}
-Dimm, Bill,
-\booktitle{FeynDiagram Tutorial},
-available at \URL{ftp://ftp.hepth.cornell.edu}
-\endreference
-which is a set of C++ objects which make it fairly easy to create EPS
-\idx{Feynman Diagrams} by writing short C++ programs. It was converted
-from a |.ps| to a |.eps| file using |ps2epsi|.
-
-%==================================================*
-\subsection{Simple Tables \label{sect.tbls}}
-
- Simple tables\index{tables!simple} (without ruled lines) are constructed
-in \TeX\ with \idx{alignment tabs} or with \cs{halign}. The reader who
-is not familiar with these should look at Chapter~22 in \TeXbook. In
-\TeXsis\ simple tables with table numbers and captions are
-treated much the same as figures. For example, saying
-\TeXexample
-|smalltt\midtable{table example}
-\caption{Charged leptons.}
-\centerline{\vbox{\halign{#\ \hfil & #\ \hfil & #\hfil \cr
-Name & Mass & Lifetime \cr
-$e^-$ & .511 MeV & $>2 \times 10^{22}$ yr. \cr
-$\mu^-$ & 105 MeV & $2.197 \times 10^{-6}$ sec. \cr
-$\tau^-$ & 1784 MeV & $3.3 \times 10^{-13}$ sec. \cr}}}
-\endtable
-|endTeXexample
-\noindent
-produces the following table, in the middle of the page:
-\vskip 0pt
-\midtable{table example}
-\caption{Charged leptons.}
-\centerline{\vbox{\halign{#\ \hfil & #\ \hfil & #\hfil \cr
-Name & Mass & Lifetime \cr
-$e^-$ & .511 MeV & $>2 \times 10^{22}$ yr. \cr
-$\mu^-$ & 105 MeV & $2.197 \times 10^{-6}$ sec. \cr
-$\tau^-$ & 1784 MeV & $3.3 \times 10^{-13}$ sec. \cr}}}
-\intablelist{Charged leptons.}
-\endtable
-\noindent
-Note the use of \cs{centerline} and a \cs{vbox} to center the table. The
-reference to this table in the text was produced by typing ``|\Tbl{table
-example}|.'' Note also that we used \cs{caption} followed by the text in
-brackets as an alternative method of defining the caption;
-However \cs{caption}
-should only be used when the caption is short. Table captions are
-traditionally placed above the table, so \cs{Caption} or \cs{caption} should
-be the first token after \CS{table}\arg{label\/} and its siblings.
-
-There are a number of different kinds of table insertions, and they
-match closely the different kinds of insertions used for figures:
-\description{xwidefullTablexx\qquad}\clump
-%
-\itm{\CS{table}\arg{label\/}}
-Inserts a table at the top of next available page.
-%
-\itm{\CS{midtable}\arg{label\/}}
-Inserts a table at the current position if there is room or at
-the top of a page if necessary.
-%
-\itm{\CS{fulltable}\arg{label\/}}
-Inserts a table on a separate page. The body of the table
-should normally contain a \cs{vfill}.
-%
-\itm{\CS{bottomtable}\arg{label\/}}
-Inserts the table at the bottom of the current page, if there is room
-for it, or on the bottom of the next page where there is room.
-%
-\itm{\CS{heavytable}\arg{label\/}}
-Inserts a table at the current position, if there is room for it on the
-page, or at the bottom of the page following if there is not. This is
-therefore like \CS{midtable}, except that if the table can't be fit on
-the page it ends up on the bottom of a following page, not the top.
-%
-\itm{\cs{widetoptable}\arg{label\/}}
-Inserts a table at the top of a page across both columns in
-double column format. Equivalent to \CS{table} in single column
-format.
-%
-\itm{\cs{widefulltable}\arg{label\/}}
-Inserts a full page table in double column format. Equivalent to
-\CS{fulltable} in single column format.
-%
-\itm{\CS{endtable}}
-Ends any of the tables above.
-%
-\enddescription
-Again, in these macros \meta{label\/} is an internal label which is assigned to
-the table number. The table number will include the chapter and section
-numbers in the format ``$cc.ss.nn$'' if |\showchaptIDtrue| and
-|\showsectIDtrue| have been selected. The table can then be referred to
-in the text by saying \cs{Tbl}\arg{label\/}.
-
-%==================================================*
-% RULED TABLES:
-
-\subsection{Ruled Tables \label{sect.ruled}}
-\input TXSruled.doc
-
-%==================================================*
-\subsection{Lists of Figures and Tables}
-
-In large technical documents it is often desirable to have a list of the
-figures and/or tables which appear in the document, along with a brief
-caption and the number of the page on which the figure or table appears.
-This is similar to
-a table of contents, but is separate from it. In \TeXsis\ you can add a
-figure or table to a list of figures or tables by using \CS{infiglist}
-after \cs{figure} or \CS{intablelist} after \cs{table}, similar to the
-way you would use \cs{caption}. The syntax is \CS{infiglist}\arg{text}.
-The text is the text of the (possibly abbreviated) caption which is to
-appear in the list of figures. Remember though, if a table has a
-caption it should
-appear above the table body, so the \cs{caption} must still be the first
-thing after \cs{table}; the \CS{infiglist} can come later.
-\index{lists!of figures}\index{lists!of tables}%
-
-As an example, consider the ``penguin diagram'' already discussed.
-To add an entry for this figure in the list of figures it
-would be entered as follows:
-\TeXexample
-\figure{Penguin}
-\centerline{\epsfbox{/home/fermi/qcd/penguin.eps}}
-\caption{Example of including EPS graphics in a figure.}
-\infiglist{Example of including a figure in the list of figures.}
-\endfigure
-|endTeXexample
-\relax
-The \cs{caption} text is what is put under the figure in the body of the
-paper, while the \CS{infiglist} text is what shows up in the list of
-figures, and these do not have to be the same.
-
- To produce the list of figures at the end of the document you say
-\CS{ListFigures}, and similarly to produce the list of tables say
-\CS{ListTables}. Even if the list is to appear at the front of the
-document, along with the table of contents, you should print it at the
-end and move the list to the front afterwards. This is because until
-the document is actually processed \TeX\ does not know on which page the
-figure or table appears.
-
- One word of caution: figures and tables are produced by putting them
-in ``floating inserts'', which \TeX\ saves up and prints when there is
-room. The entry into the list of figures or tables is not made until
-the item actually makes its way into the output DVI file. If you ask
-for the list of figures or tables before one of these items is output it
-will not be in the list, and in fact that entry for the figure or table
-list will later end up spewing out on your terminal. To be sure that
-all floating insertions have been output you should say \cs{supereject}
-before you print the list of figures or tables.
-
-%==================================================*
-\subsection{Listing Figure and Table Captions}
-
-When a manuscript is submitted to some journals, like the Physical
-Review, one is supposed to include a separate list of the captions of all
-figures and tables. This is similar to the lists created by
-\CS{ListFigures} and \CS{ListTables}, but the page numbers are not
-supposed to be included. It is very easy to use the caption information
-stored by \CS{infiglist} and \CS{intablelist} to make just a list of
-captions, without including the page numbers. The command to make a
-list of all the figure captions is \CS{ListFigureCaptions}, and
-similarly all the table captions can be listed with
-\CS{ListTableCaptions}. Just as with \CS{ListFigures} and
-\CS{ListTables} these should appear at the end of the job, so that all
-of the caption information will have already been stored.
-
-It should be said that this method of making a list of captions assumes
-that you have put the same captions under the figures, with \cs{Caption}
-or \cs{caption}, as the caption in the list of figures entered with
-\CS{infiglist}.
-
- It may help to know a little bit more about how the macros
-\CS{ListFigures} and \CS{ListFigureCaptions} work. The \CS{infiglist}
-command writes the figure caption information you provide to a file
-which has the same name as your manuscript file but with the extension
-|.fgl|, meaning ``figure list'' (for tables the file name extension is
-|.tbl|). The page number on which the figure appears is also recorded
-in this file. When the whole document has been processed all of the
-figure captions will have been saved in this file, and \CS{ListFigures}
-and \CS{ListFigureCaptions} simply read this file back in. One of them
-uses the page numbers to construct a table of contents for the figures,
-while the other just prints out the figure captions by themselves. In
-either case, it is important that all the caption information be in the
-file when the list is to be made, which is why a \cs{supereject} may be
-necessary to flush all floating insertions to the output.
-
-%==================================================*
-\subsection{Printing Figures and Tables at the End of a Document}
-
-When working on a paper to be sent for publication it is sometimes
-necessary to print all of the figures at the end of the document. To cause
-this to be done you simply have to say
-\example
-\cs{FiguresLast}
-\endexample
-at some point before you call \cs{figure} and its relatives, and then put
-\example
-\cs{PrintFigures}
-\endexample
-\index{figures!at end of document}%
-\index{tables!at end of document}%
-\noindent
-at the end of the document. \cs{FiguresLast} causes \cs{figure} to save the
-definition of your figure in an auxiliary file instead of immediately
-creating the figure, and \cs{PrintFigures} reads the material back in from
-that file. If you say \cs{PrintFigures} without first saying
-\cs{FiguresLast} nothing will happen. You can return to having the
-figures printed where they are defined by saying \cs{FiguresNow}.
-In that case \cs{PrintFigures} does nothing; you have to have said
-\cs{FiguresLast} for \cs{PrintFigures} to read any stored figures back in.
-
-Tables can also be saved until the end of the document by saying
-\cs{TablesLast} and then \cs{PrintTables}. \cs{TablesNow} is the
-opposite of \cs{TablesLast}.
-
-\pagecheck{4cm}
-
-One important note: Since the figure or table material is copied to the
-file in which it is held one line at a time it is important to use
-\cs{Caption} and \CS{endCaption} for long captions instead of \cs{caption}.
-If you use \cs{caption} \TeX\ will try to read the whole caption at once,
-which may result in the error message
-``{\tt TeX capacity exceeded, sorry.}''\index{TeX capacity
-exceeded@{\tt TeX capacity exceeded, sorry}}
-
-
-%==================================================*
-\subsection{Nonstandard Figure and Table Placement}
-
-On rare occasions you may need to have a figure or table from one
-section of your document appear in another section of the document. For
-example, if the introductory section is very short but has a figure,
-that figure might end up at the top of the first page when you really
-want it to appear at the top of the second page. You can cause the
-figure to come out later by moving it farther back in the manuscript
-file, but if it is moved into the next section it will then have the
-wrong figure number.
-\index{figures!nonstandard placement}%
-\index{tables!nonstandard placement}%
-
-The solution to this problem is to have a way to override or modify the
-way figure and table numbers are assigned. Since the first part of the
-figure or table number is the chapter or section number you need to change
-this by saying
-\example
-\cs{setSectionID}\arg{something-else}
-\endexample
-This changes the section number part of the figure and table numbers to
-whatever you put as \meta{something-else}. It will also effect equation
-numbers, so it is best to have this inside of a group, so that the
-change goes away at the end of the group. Next you have to change the
-figure or table number. \TeXsis\ keeps count of tables and figures in
-global variables, and increments these counters globally when a new
-figure or table is created. Thus just changing the counter inside a
-group won't work, because the counter outside of the group would still
-be modified. To temporarily change the value of such a counter you use
-\example
-\cs{setcnt}\arg{counter}\arg{value}
-\endexample
-where \meta{value} is the temporary value to assign to the counter
-\meta{counter}. This should be done inside of a group, and when the
-group ends the counter will go back to its previous global value. You
-should only use \cs{setcnt} once within a given group!
-
-An example will make this procedure clear.
-Suppose that Figure~\use{Fg.intro.17} is a part of
-Section~\use{sect.intro}, but we wanted to show it much later in this
-Manual (such as right about now).
-It can be created in this section by saying:
-\TeXexample
-\begingroup % changes are temporary
-\setSectionID{1} % changes the section ID
-\setcnt\fignum{16}% figure counter is 1 less than we want
-\midfigure{intro.17}
-\centerline{\epsfysize=4cm\epsfbox{|penguin.eps}}
-\caption{A bizarrely placed figure for Section~\use{sect.intro}}
-\infiglist{A bizarrely placed figure for Section~\use{sect.intro}}
-\endfigure
-\endgroup % everything goes back the way it was
-|endTeXexample
-
-\begingroup % changes are temporary
-\setSectionID{1} % changes the section ID
-\setcnt\fignum{16} % figure number is 1 less than we want
-\midfigure{intro.17}
-\centerline{\epsfysize=4cm\epsfbox{\penguin.eps}}
-\caption{A bizarrely placed figure for Section~\use{sect.intro}}
-\infiglist{A bizarrely placed figure for Section~\use{sect.intro}}
-\endfigure
-\endgroup % everything goes back the way it was
-
-In this case the figure number in the counter \cs{fignum} is set to one
-less than the value we want, so that it comes out correctly when
-\cs{bottomfigure} increments the count. You can use \cs{setcnt} to
-modify any of \TeXsis's global counters. The complete list is given in
-Section~\use{sect.labels} (where the use of \cs{use} is also described).
-
-% If we are using Larry Ewing's penguin2.eps then we need to
-% acknowlege it:
-
-\def\tmp{penguin2}
-\ifx\penguin\tmp
- The drawing in \Fig{intro.17}, which is the official \idx{Linux}
- Penguin, was created by \idx{Larry Ewing} of Texas A\&M University
- and turned into a scalable vector based postcript file by \idx{Neal
- Tucker}.
-\fi
-
-
-By the way, you should never move a figure out of a {\sl Chapter},
-unless you move it to the end of the document, and the appropriate way
-to do that is with \cs{FiguresLast}.
-
-%>>> EOF TXSfigs.doc <<<
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/texsis/base/TXSfmts.doc b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/texsis/base/TXSfmts.doc
deleted file mode 100644
index 7923cea3982..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/texsis/base/TXSfmts.doc
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,604 +0,0 @@
-%% file: TXSfmts.doc - Formats and Style Files - TeXsis version 2.18
-%% @(#) $Id: TXSfmts.doc,v 18.3 2001/04/06 21:52:07 myers Exp $
-%======================================================================*
-% (C) copyright 1994-2000 by Eric Myers and Frank E. Paige.
-% This file is a part of TeXsis. Distribution and/or modifications
-% are allowed under the terms of the LaTeX Project Public License (LPPL).
-% See the file COPYING or ftp://ftp.texsis.org/texsis/LPPL
-%======================================================================*
-\ifx\undefined\bs \texsis\input TXSdocM.doc\input Manual.aux\fi
-
-\section{Style Files and Specialized Formats \label{sect.fmts}}
-
-Section~\use{sect.papers} described the basic layout of a \TeXsis\
-document and the |\paper|, |\preprint|, |\Manuscript| and |\book| macros
-for typesetting simple documents. It is often necessary to modify the
-details of the layouts for such documents, particularly when submitting
-camera ready manuscripts for conference proceedings. Since \TeXsis\ is
-built on plain \TeX, you can of course use the full power of \TeX\ to
-format a document as you please. However, \TeXsis\ contains macros to
-produce documents in several of the common formats used in the physics
-community. These and other specialized formats are described in this
-section.
-
-It would be very inefficient for \TeXsis\ to load the definitions of all
-of the possible document styles listed below when at most only one of
-them will be used. \TeXsis\ therefore puts these specialized
-definitions in files known as ``style'' files (which generally have
-filename extensions of ``|.txs|'') and only loads the particular style
-file when it is needed. Besides saving space this also allows for quite
-a bit of flexibility, because it is easy to modify style files or to
-create new ones. For example, if the proceedings of a conference must
-be typeset in a particular way (as is often the case) then the commands
-to set-up a document in exactly the right way can be put in a style file
-and e-mailed to all conference participants. Another use of specialized
-style files is to define a \cs{thesis} format which conforms to the
-rules and regulations of a particular university.
-
-
-%=========================*
-\subsection{Specialized Document Styles \label{sect.styles}}
-
-The following styles for various conference proceeding formats,
-journals, and thesis formats are distributed with \TeXsis~\fmtversion.
-Use these in place of |\paper| or |\preprint|. The name of the style
-file from which the definitions are loaded is shown in brackets.
-%
-\description{XNorthHollandTwo\quad}\clump
-%
-\itm{\CS{AIPproceedings}}
-Similar to |\paper|, but specialized to the American Institute of
-\hbox{Physics} (AIP) format. [AIP.txs]
-%
-\itm{\CS{IEEEproceedings}}
-An IEEE format using oversized double column paper. See \Sect{dcol}.
-[IEEE.txs]
-%
-\itm{\CS{IEEEreduced}}
-An IEEE format reduced to 75\% of full size and printed with 9~pt.\
-type for $8\frac{1}{2}\,{\rm in} \times 11\,{\rm in}$ paper. [IEEE.txs]
-%
-\itm{\CS{NorthHolland} }
-Format for producing camera-ready copy for proceedings published by
-North-Holland/Elsevier. This is a single column format with titles
-and authors left justified and in eleven point type. [Elsevier.txs]
-%
-\itm{\CS{NorthHollandTwo}}
-The North-Holland double column format for oversized paper.
-[Elsevier.txs]
-%
-\itm{\CS{nuclproc}}
-The ``NUCLPROC'' style for Nuclear Physics Proceedings. [nuclproc.txs]
-%
-\itm{\CS{WorldScientific}}
-Similar to |\paper|, but specialized to the World Scientific
-proceedings format. [WorldSci.txs]
-%
-\itm{\CS{PhysRev}}
-Emulates the page layout and appearance of the {\sl Physical Review}.
-[PhysRev.txs]
-%
-\itm{\CS{PhysRevManuscript}}
-Similar to |\Manuscript| but customized for papers submitted to the
-{\sl Physical Review}. [PhysRev.txs]
-%
-\itm{\CS{thesis}}
-Similar to \cs{book}, but for printing a thesis. The default
-|\thesis| format conforms to the requirements of the Yale
-Graduate School, but it can (and probably should) be modified for
-your own installation. [thesis.txs]
-%
-\enddescription
-Other even more specialized styles are available, and some of them
-can be found on the \TeXsis\ anonymous ftp server, in the directory
-|/pub/texsis/styles|.
-
-\bigskip
-
-The IEEE and North Holland double column formats in the list above use
-the double column macros described in Sect.~\use{sect.dcol}. For
-example, \cs{NorthHollandTwo} sets up a document with an overall width
-of 21.3~cm, a page length of 27.1~cm and a column width of 10.0~cm.
-(Note that this is just about as wide or a little wider than most
-small laser printers can print, so provisions have been made for
-shifting the printed page horizontally to print one column at a time
-if necessary.) A document printed with this format might have the
-following basic structure:
-\TeXexample
-|smalltt\texsis
-\NorthHollandTwo % set up double columns
-\titlepage % but still single column mode
-
- |<title page material>
-
-\endtitlepage % ends the title material
-\doublecolumns % now start double column mode
-
- |<text of paper>
-
-\enddoublecolumns % balance the final columns
-\bye
-|endTeXexample
-\noindent
-Saying \cs{NorthHollandTwo} only defines the double column layout; it
-does not turn on double column mode. The title material is printed in
-single column format across the full page width, then the main body is
-printed in double column format once \cs{doublecolumns} appears. It is
-important to say \cs{enddoublecolumns} at the end of the document to
-balance the columns on the last page. Formatting text in balanced
-double columns can be quite tricky, so you should read \Sect{dcol}
-carefully before trying to use any of the double column macros.
-
-%==============================*
-\subsubsection{Physical Review Formats}
-
-The \CS{PhysRevManuscript} style is similar to \cs{Manuscript} but is
-customized to satisfy the requirements for manuscripts submitted to
-the {\sl Physical Review}. It uses true double
-spacing, and it places the tables and figure captions at the end of
-the document. By simply switching from this to \cs{preprint} you should
-be able to produce a version suitable for distribution as a preprint
-from the same manuscript file.
-
-The \CS{PhysRev} and \CS{PhysRevLett} styles are not intended for
-submission but rather emulate the page layouts in the {\sl Physical
-Review} and {\sl Physical Review Letters} respectively. We have
-attempted to reproduce accurately the double column layout, headlines,
-footlines, reference style, etc., used in the actual journals. This
-is still work in progress, but it may be useful both to see how a
-paper would look in print and as an example for constructing other
-styles. Setting up the headlines and page numbering requires calling
-a few extra macros:
-%
-\example
-|\texsis| \n
-|\PhysRev| \n
-|\TitleBanner{|\meta{Running Title Headline}|}| \n
-|\AuthorBanner{|\meta{Running Author Headline}|}| \n
-|\VolumeBanner{|\meta{series}|}{|\meta{vol}|}{|\meta{issue}%
-|}{|\meta{page}|}| \n
-|\titlepage| \n
-...
-\endexample
-%
-In |\VolumeBanner| the \meta{series} should be one of A, B, C, D, E,
-for the {\sl Physical Review} or L for {\sl Physical Review Letters};
-the volume, issue, and starting page arguments are self-explanatory.
-Both \CS{PhysRev} and \CS{PhysRevLett} typeset the document in double
-columns, so to make full use of these layouts you will need to read
-about the double column macros described in \Sect{dcol}.
-In particular, you should be aware of the following: in both the
-\CS{PhysRev} and \CS{PhysRevLett} styles, double column mode is begun
-automatically at the end of the title material (\cs{endtitlepage}).
-Since any double column material is inside a group, any definitions made
-at that point will only be defined inside that group. If you want to
-define macros for use in the rest of your paper, you should do so before
-the title material (or use \cs{gdef}).
-
-
-%=========================*
-\subsubsection{Thesis or Dissertation Format}
-
-The style file {\tt \idx{thesis.txs}} contains two alternative
-definitions of \CS{thesis}, one for Yale University (called
-|\YaleThesis|) and the other for the University of Texas at Austin
-(called |\UTthesis|). The default is that saying \CS{thesis} gives you
-|\YaleThesis|, but this is easily changed by saying |\let\thesis=\UTthesis|.
-
-If you are not at Yale or UT you will need to change the
-macros in |thesis.txs| to create your own version of the \CS{thesis}
-macro. Every university has different requirements for how a thesis is
-typed or typeset, and these requirements often conflict. Perhaps the
-first thing you should do if you want to write a thesis using \TeXsis\
-is find out if someone else at your university has already done so, and
-then copy their definition of \CS{thesis}. If you end up creating a
-new style file for your university then we hope that you will make it
-available for other students to use. We would also be willing to help,
-by putting such style files on the \TeXsis\ anonymous ftp server.
-If you have such a file (or other macros) you would like to contribute,
-send us e-mail at {\tt texsis@texsis.org}.
-
-
-%=========================*
-\subsection{Creating New Styles}
-
-It is very easy to create a new document style and style file.
-By convention, \TeXsis\ style files end with the filename extension
-``|.txs|,'' so all you need to do is put the definitions and macros
-defining this new document style into such a file, and then read that
-file in when beginning the document. For example, suppose you create a
-style file called |mine.txs| which contains a document style called
-|\mystyle|, which is a slightly altered version of \cs{paper}:
-\TeXexample
-\def\mystyle{\paper
- \hsize=|<dimen>
- \vsize=|<dimen>
- \showsectIDfalse
- ...
- }
-|endTeXexample
-\noindent
-You could then simply read in this file at the beginning of the document,
-with \cs{input}, and then invoke |\mystyle|, like so,
-\TeXexample
-\input mine.txs
-\mystyle
-|endTeXexample
-
-However, you may have noticed that none of the special document styles
-mentioned in \Sect{styles} were actually loaded with \cs{input},
-although they are in fact read from a style file. This was done using
-the \CS{autoload} command. Saying
-\TeXexample
-\autoload\AIPproceeings{AIP.txs}
-|endTeXexample
-defines |\AIPproceeings| to be a simpler instruction which, if invoked,
-automatically loads the style file |AIP.txs|, which contains the real
-definition of |\AIPproceedings|. After the style file has been loaded
-this real |\AIPproceedings| is automatically called. It then appears as
-if the definition of the macro was in \TeXsis's memory all the time,
-though it really was only loaded from the file when called for.
-
-As a practical example of using \CS{autoload}, suppose that you are a
-student at Excited State University and you want to create a customized
-\cs{thesis} macro which will load automatically from a style file called
-|ESUthesis.txs|. You could copy the macros in the file |thesis.txs|
-to this new file, and then edit them as needed. Then, to make the
-new definition load automatically you would say
-\TeXexample
-\autoload\thesis{ESUthesis.txs}
-|endTeXexample
-\noindent
-To make this new definition of \cs{thesis} available to
-anyone using \TeXsis\ on your machine you would want to put this
-\CS{autoload} command in the file |TXSsite.tex| before building the
-\TeXsis\ format. This is described in more detail in Appendix~\use{install}.
-To make the new definition automatically available just to you in your
-thesis directory you could put the command in a file called
-|TXSmods.tex| in that directory.
-
-Important note: many \TeXsis\ style files and source files use the ``|@|''
-character in the names of macros which are to be ``hidden'' from the
-casual user. Since ``|@|'' is not a letter these macros can't normally
-be used. If you are writing a style file which needs to use these
-hidden macros you should say \CS{ATunlock} first, to make ``|@|'' a
-letter, and then \CS{ATlock} when you are done to turn ``|@|'' back
-into a non-letter.
-
-
-
-
-\Ignore % The stuff below is maybe way too technical?
-
-You may also need to make changes in some of more complicated macros.
-This is most easily made by copying the original definition from one
-of the |TXSxxxx.tex| files into |mine.txs| and editing it. For
-example, if you want the abstract to be in 9~pt.\ type, copy the
-definition of |\abstract| from |TXStitle.tex| and add |\ninepoint| to
-it:
-%
-\TeXexample
-|smalltt\def\abstract{% begin abstract of a paper or treatise
- \endmode % end any previous field
- \bigskip\bigskip % some space above
- \centerline{ABSTRACT}% % ``ABSTRACT''
- \medskip % space below that
- \bgroup % begin \abstract group
- \let\endmode=\endabstract % \endmode ends \abstract
- \narrower\narrower % bring in margins
- \ninepoint % NEW FOR \mystyle STYLE
- \singlespaced} % single spaced
-|endTeXexample
-
-While some of the macros you need to change may be complicated, the
-changes \hbox{you} will actually need to make will probably still be fairly
-simple. For example, in the definition of |\section| in |TXSsects.tex|
-you probably want to change only the part that actually prints the
-section heading. This is a small part of the whole and is reasonably
-well commented. The default is to print the section head left
-justified, ragged right, with a hanging indentation whose width is set
-by the section number:
-%
-\TeXexample
-|smalltt%
-% Print the Section title:
-%
- \ifx\tbf\undefined\def\tbf{\bf}\fi % default \tbf is \bf
- \vbox{% % keep heading in \vbox
- {\raggedright %
- \pretolerance=2000\hyphenpenalty=2000 % no hyphenation
- \setbox0=\hbox{\noindent\tbf\@fullID}%% find width of ID
- \hangindent=\wd0 \hangafter=1 % for hanging indent
- \noindent\unhbox0{\tbf{#1}}\relax % number and title
- \medskip}}% %
- \nobreak %
-|endTeXexample
-%
-If instead you want the section headings to be centered with two
-spaces (|\ \ |) after the number, you can replace this part of the
-|\section| macro
-%
-\TeXexample
-|smalltt%
-% Print the Section title:
-%
- \ifx\tbf\undefined\def\tbf{\bf}\fi % default \tbf is \bf
- \vbox{% % keep heading in \vbox
- {\raggedcenter % USE RAGGED CENTER
- \tbf\@fullID\ \ #1 % ID AND TITLE
- \endraggedcenter % END RAGGED CENTER
- \medskip}}% %
- \nobreak %
-|endTeXexample
-%
-\noindent
-You can leave the rest of the \cs{section} macro alone and it will work
-as before.
-
-\endIgnore
-
-
-
-%==================================================*
-\subsection{Overhead Transparencies (Slides)}
-
-\TeXsis\ contains a simple \CS{slides} format for making overhead
-transparencies or similar material.
-While \TeX\ is not a convenient language for graphical page layout, it
-is sometimes useful to be able to convert a paper to transparencies or
-visa versa.\Footnote*{However, until recently one of the
-authors of \TeXsis\ preferred to make neatly lettered transparencies by
-hand, using colored pens, rather than using a printer that could only
-print in black and white.
-He's changed his mind now that it is possible to produce text
-in color.}
-If you want to use |\slides|, simply begin your manuscript file with
-%
-\TeXexample
-\slides
-|endTeXexample
-instead of (or in addition to) |\texsis|.
-%
-This will produce
-%% NOT ANYMORE $8\frac{1}{2}\,{\rm in} \times 10\frac{1}{2}\,{\rm in}$
-pages with $1\,{\rm in}$ margins in
-the ``portrait'' orientation with 24~pt.\ type, with a ragged right
-margin and lots of incentive to suppress hyphenation.
-%% NOT ANYMORE and bottom margins.
-\CS{slides} also defines \CS{bl} to insert a blank line and
-\CS{np} to create a new page, since these are often useful for slides.
-Since the \CS{slides} format is very simple, it is not loaded from a
-style file.
-
-%==================================================*
-\subsection{Color PostScript Output \label{sect.color}}
-
-Now that color printers are fairly common, it is useful to have some
-way to produce text that is printed in different colors.
-The simplest use of this is for producing overhead transparencies, as
-with the \CS{slides} format.
-\TeXsis\ has a simple set of macros, in the style file {\tt
-color.txs}, which lets you change the colors of text printed using
-PostScript.
-This only works for PostScript output produced by\index{Rokicki,
-Tomas} Tom Rokicki's {\tt dvips} program,\cite{Rokicki} using the
-profile file {\tt color.pro} that is usually included with {\tt
-dvips}.
-
-To use these macros, you must first input the definitions,
-\TeXexample
-\input color.txs
-|endTeXexample
-To change the color of all text which follows, use the command \CS{SetColor},
-as in
-\TeXexample
-\SetColor{Green}
-|endTeXexample
-Keep in mind that this will change \undertext{all}
-text, including page numbers and headlines and footlines. To print a
-small portion of text in some other color, use
-\CS{colorit},
-as in
-\TeXexample
-\colorit{Red}{The text inside these brackets is colored Red}
-|endTeXexample
-You can change the color of the background using \CS{background},
-as in
-\TeXexample
-\background{Yellow}
-|endTeXexample
-
-\bigskip
-\pagecheck{2in}
-
-The 12 basic colors available are
-\example
-\settabs 4\columns
-\+& Black & White & Gray \cr
-\+& Red & Green & Blue \cr
-\+& Cyan & Magenta & Yellow \cr
-\+& Purple & Orange & Brown \cr
-\endexample
-Note that the case is important---the names must begin with an initial
-capital letter.
-
-For the basic colors listed above some shortcuts are also defined.
-Specifically, you can simply use the color name as a command, with the
-text to be colored as a single argument, as in
-\TeXexample
-\Red{This text is colored Red}
-|endTeXexample
-or you can say |\text|\meta{Color} to change the text color,
-as in
-\TeXexample
-\textGreen
-|endTeXexample
-You can add shortcuts for other colors besides the basics
-with the \CS{addColor} command. Saying
-\TeXexample
-\addColor{Salmon}
-|endTeXexample
-will define |\Salmon| and |\textSalmon| as shortcuts
-for |\colorit{Salmon}{|\meta{text}|}| and |\setColor{Salmon}|.
-
-Although the basic colors listed above should be enough for most
-simple applications, there are actually a whole host of other colors
-available. In fact, all of the colors found in a box of 64 Crayola
-Crayons are defined in {\tt color.pro} for |dvips|. You can define
-short-cuts for all of these simply by saying \CS{Crayolas}.
-You can produce a list of all of the colors, with each printed in its
-own color, by saying \CS{ListColors}.
-
-The commands so far have just about the same syntax as those in the
-macro package called {\tt COLORDVI.TEX}, by Jim
-Hafner\reference{colordvi} Hafner, Jim, the {\tt COLORDVI.TEX} macros
-are included in the {\tt dvips} distribution. See \Ref{Rokicki}
-\endreference\space
-(although the internal workings are slightly different).
-Any plain \TeX\ file which uses {\tt COLORDVI.TEX} should also work
-using {\tt color.txs}.
-But the {\tt color.txs} macros also include commands to specifically
-manipulate the PostScript color stack.
-To change the color temporarily by pushing it onto the stack, and then
-revert to the previous color by popping the stack, use \CS{PushColor}
-and \CS{PopColor}, as in
-\TeXexample
-This text is in some color, probably black.
-\PushColor{Purple}
-This text will be purple.
-\PopColor
-This text will be back in the previous color.
-|endTeXexample
-
-Be aware that the color changes have nothing to do with TeX's grouping
-mechanism (\ie\ curly brackets), but are based only on the PostScript
-color stack.
-If you really want the color to change back when a \TeX\ group ends
-(whenever that might happen), you can use
-\cs{aftergroup}, as in
-\TeXexample
-\begingroup\PushColor{Red}\aftergroup\PopColor
-|endTeXexample
-Then later when the group is ended, the \CS{PopColor} is automatically
-executed and the color reverts to its previous value.
-One nice way this can be used is to color all displayed equations,
-by putting this all in \cs{everydisplay}, like so
-\TeXexample
-\everydisplay={\PushColor{BurntOrange}\aftergroup\PopColor}
-|endTeXexample
-A displayed equation is always constructed within a new group, and
-when it ends the \CS{PopColor} on the \cs{aftergroup} stack is invoked
-automatically and the text reverts to the previous color.
-
-\bigskip
-
-
-If the 64 colors listed by \CS{ListColors} are not enough for your
-purposes, you can also define your own, using \CS{SetCmykColor} or
-\CS{PushCmykColor}.
-Colors are specified as a quadruple of intensity values between 0.0 and 1.0
-(CMYK means Cyan, Magenta, Yellow, and blacK). For example:
-\TeXexample
-\SetCmykColor{.2 .3 .4 .1}
-|endTeXexample
-will give you a nice tan, while
-\TeXexample
-\PushCmykColor{.5 .5 .1 .2} Old Blue Eyes \PopColor
-|endTeXexample
-will print the text in the shade of blue specified by that particular
-CMYK quadruple.
-
-
-%==================================================*
-\subsection{Twin Page Output}
-
-It is sometimes desirable to produce preprints or other documents in a
-compact format with two pages on each physical page in landscape
-orientation. While this can be done with \cs{SetDoubleColumns}, a much
-simpler approach is sufficient. \TeXsis\ contains a macro called
-\CS{twinout} which redefines the output routine to produce two pages
-per page, without attempting to balance columns or allowing spanned
-equations, tables, etc. (thus avoiding many of the possible problems
-with the more powerful double column macros). \CS{twinout} can be used
-with any of the standard formats described in \Sect{papers} or
-\Sect{fmts} or even with Plain \TeX. Since \CS{twinout} does not
-select fonts, the user must do so:\index{twin page output}
-%
-\TeXexample
-\texsis
-\tenpoint
-\def\Tbf{\twelvebf}
-\def\tbf{\tenbf}
-\twinout
- |<text>
-|endTeXexample
-Alternatively, the \CS{twinformat} command can be used to produce any
-\TeXsis\ format in \CS{twinout} layout with 10~pt fonts. Thus the above
-commands can be replaced by
-\TeXexample
-\texsis
-\twinformat
- |<text>
-|endTeXexample
-Here \CS{twinformat} automatically sets up 10~pt fonts and appropriate
-values for the title bold face fonts, just as in the previous example.
-\CS{twinout} use the following dimensions:
-%
-\description{Xnormhsize\qquad}\clump
-%
-\itm{\CS{twinhsize}}
-Total width for twin column output.
-%
-\itm{\CS{twinvsize}}
-Column height for twin column output.
-%
-\itm{\CS{twincsize}}
-Column width for twin column output.
-%
-\itm{\CS{normhsize}}
-Normal value of \cs{hsize} in portrait mode.
-%
-\itm{\CS{normvsize}}
-Normal value of \cs{vsize} in portrait mode.
-%
-\enddescription
-All of these have sensible default values for $8.5\,{\rm in} \times
-11\,{\rm in}$ paper but can be reset before \CS{twinout} is called. The
-"normal" sizes should print properly with the default device driver
-and printer. Appropriate default values for all these dimensions can
-be set in |TXSsite.tex|.
-
- \CS{twinout} puts \cs{LandscapeSpecial} on each page. This is null by
-default but can be redefined to be an appropriate \cs{special} command
-to produce landscape output with your device driver and printer. For
-example, with |dvips|\cite{Rokicki}\index{dvips}\index{Rokicki, Tomas}
-and a PostScript printer, use
-\TeXexample
-\def\LandscapeSpecial{\special{papersize=11in,8.5in}}
-|endTeXexample
-A default value can be set in |TXSsite.tex|.
-
- \CS{twinprint} is a substitute for \cs{preprint} which sets the
-title, author, and other titlepage material full size in landscape mode
-and then switches to \CS{twinout} twin column output with 10~pt type for
-the text of the paper. A typical preprint might read:
-\TeXexample
-\twinprint
-\titlepage
-\title
- |<paper title>
-\endtitle
-\author
- |<author's name and address>
-\endauthor
-\abstract
- |<text of abstract>
-\endabstract
-\endtitlepage
- |<text of paper>
-\bye
-|endTeXexample
-\nobreak\noindent
-This produces a nice, compact format for preprints.
-
-%>>> EOF TXSfmts.doc <<<
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/texsis/base/TXSfonts.doc b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/texsis/base/TXSfonts.doc
deleted file mode 100644
index dd722d2a74b..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/texsis/base/TXSfonts.doc
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,279 +0,0 @@
-%% file: TXSfonts.doc - Type Sizes and Styles - TeXsis version 2.18
-%% @(#) $Id: TXSfonts.doc,v 18.2 2000/05/17 00:19:46 myers Exp $
-%======================================================================*
-% (C) Copyright 1989, 1992 by Eric Myers and Frank E. Paige
-% This file is a part of TeXsis. Distribution and/or modifications
-% are allowed under the terms of the LaTeX Project Public License (LPPL).
-% See the file COPYING or ftp://ftp.texsis.org/texsis/LPPL
-%======================================================================*
-\ifx\undefined\meta\texsis\input TXSdocM.doc\draft\fi
-
-
-\section{Type Sizes, Type Styles, and Line Spacing \label{sect.fonts}}
-
-This section describes the \TeXsis\ commands for changing font sizes,
-typestyles and the spacing between lines. It also describes how you
-can make footnotes, and a special feature for balancing quotation
-marks.
-
-\subsection{Type Sizes and Styles}
-
-Plain \TeX\ is set up to use 10\pt\ type, with smaller sizes for
-superscripts and subscripts.
-\TeXsis\ expands the available type sizes to include 11, 12, 14, and
-16\pt\ type, and \TeXsis\ makes it easy to change from one size of
-type to another.
-Type sizes are selected with the following commands:
-\index{type sizes}%
-\description{Xtwentyfourpointpoint\qquad}
-\itm{\CS{ninepoint}}
-Gives 9 \pt\ type (not illustrated).
-\itm{\CS{tenpoint} }
-Gives {\tenpoint 10 \pt\ type, like this.}
-\itm{\CS{elevenpoint} }
-Gives 11 \pt\ type. (not illustrated).
-\itm{\CS{twelvepoint} }
-Gives {\twelvepoint 12 \pt\ type, like this.}
-\itm{\CS{fourteenpoint} }
-Gives {\fourteenpoint 14 \pt\ type, like this.}
-\itm{\CS{sixteenpoint} }
-Gives {\sixteenpoint 16 \pt\ type, like this.}
-\itm{\CS{twentypoint}}
-Gives 20 \pt\ type (not illustrated).
-\itm{\CS{twentyfourpoint}}
-Gives 24 \pt\ type (not illustrated).
-\enddescription
-In some implementations of \TeX\ there is insufficient room to load
-all of these fonts, so \idx{fonts} are loaded only when they are first
-used, and not all of them can be illustrated here.
-\TeXsis\ starts out with \CS{tenpoint}, just like Plain \TeX, but
-switches to \CS{twelvepoint} once you say \cs{texsis}.
-
-In Plain \TeX\ you can switch between Roman, Bold, or Italic
-typestyles with the commands \cs{rm}, \cs{bf}, and \cs{it}.
-The same is true with \TeXsis.
-These commands change the style of the type, but not the size.
-The complete set of commands to change typestyles is:
-\index{typestyles}%
-\description{~rm~\qquad}
-\itm{\cs{rm} }
-Gives Roman type. Available in all sizes.
-\itm{\cs{it} }
-Gives {\it italic type} for emphasis. Available in all sizes.
-\itm{\cs{sl} }
-Gives {\sl slanted type} for book titles, etc. Available in all sizes.
-\itm{\cs{bf} }
-Gives {\bf bold face type} for emphasis. Available in all sizes.
-\itm{\cs{tt} }
-Gives {\tt typewriter type} for listing computer programs, \TeX\
-examples, etc. Available in 10, 11, and 12~pt.
-\itm{\CS{mib}}
-Gives math italic bold in math mode (|$...$|) for titles. Available in
-10, 11, 12, 14, 16, 20, and 24~pt base sizes, but the minimum size for
-subscripts and superscripts is 10\pt.
-\itm{\CS{scr}}
-Gives script capital letters (using Ralph Smith's Formal Script fonts,
-the |rsfs| fonts, if they are available on your computer).
-Use |\scr| as you would use |\cal|.
-\enddescription
-
- \TeXsis\ includes the mathematics fonts in all sizes; these are
-used automatically when you type equations between the math quotes,
-|$...$|. Limited \idx{sans-serif fonts} are also available using the commands
-\cs{tenss} and \cs{twelvess}.
-
- Two special symbols, \CS{Tbf} and \CS{tbf}, are used to produce
-``\idx{Title bold face}'' and ``\idx{small title bold face}.'' The first is
-used to print the title of a paper and titles of the chapters of a
-paper, and the second is used to print the titles of sections of a
-paper. You are free to change the definitions of these control words,
-but if you do not they default to 14\pt\ boldface for \CS{Tbf} and 12\pt\
-boldface for \CS{tbf}.
-
- Math italic bold (\CS{mib}) is listed with the other fonts but
-is actually slightly different: it substitutes boldfaced versions of
-the math italic and math symbol fonts for the normal ones {\sl
-everywhere\/} in math mode (|$...$|). These fonts are available only
-with with Computer Modern fonts and only in 10\pt\ and larger sizes;
-the standard math fonts are used for smaller superscripts. Since
-\CS{mib} effectively redefines |$..$|, it must be placed before the
-math material (i.e., outside the math quotes) and the whole formula
-will be bold. For example,
-\TeXexample
-{\tbf\mib Observation of $Z^0 \to \mu^+\mu^-$}
-|endTeXexample
-will produce the indicated text in \CS{tbf} size with a bold formula,
-provided you have the right fonts. The easiest way to find out is to try
-it. Since the \CS{mib} fonts are not available everywhere, they are never
-loaded or used unless you explicitly ask for them.
-
- Plain \TeX\ includes a \idx{calligraphic script} font known as
-\cs{cal}, but the letters in this font are not quite what most
-physicists are accustomed to using for things like \idx{Lagrangian}
-densities or \idx{functional measure}s.
-Ralph Smith\index{Smith, Ralph} of U.C. San Diego has created a new
-``\idx{formal script}'' font with much better letters for such
-purposes, and \TeXsis\ supports this font provided that it is
-available on your computer.
-To get this new font you simply use \CS{scr} in place of \cs{cal}.
-An example is:
-\TeXexample
-$$
- {\scr L} = - \del^\mu \phi^\ast \del_\mu \phi + m^2 \phi^2
-$$
-|endTeXexample
-\noindent
-Unfortunately, we don't know if your computer has the |rsfs|
-fonts\index{rsfs font} so we won't try to show you the output from
-this example.
-The quickest way to determine whether the fonts are available on your
-system is to try this example and verify that \TeX\ does not complain
-about the font.
-If your system does not have the font then you can obtain it from
-CTAN, or from the \TeXsis\ ftp server. (See the front cover of this
-manual for instructions.)
-
-\bigskip
-\pagecheck{0.65\vsize}
-
-\subsection{Interline Spacing}
-
- When you use the macros \cs{tenpoint}, \cs{twelvepoint}, etc., the
-style of the type is reset to Roman, as if you'd also typed \cs{rm}. The
-\idx{baseline skip} (the \idx{distance between lines}) is also set to be
-suitable for the type size.
-Several commands are provided that vary the interline spacing, both in
-the text and in auxiliary material such as tables.
-These are:
-\description{~doublespaced~\qquad}\singlespaced\parskip=12pt
-%
-\itm{\CS{doublespaced}}
-Makes the baseline skip 1.5 times its normal value.
-True double spacing looks too wide with typesetting.
-%
-\itm{\CS{singlespaced} }
-Resets the baseline skip to its normal value.
-%
-\itm{\CS{TrueDoubleSpacing}}
-Makes the baselineskip twice its normal value.
-This usually looks too wide for a final document, but it is desirable
-in a manuscript being submitted to journals such as Physical Review.
-%
-\itm{\CS{triplespaced}}
-Makes the baseline skip 3~times its normal value.
-This should only be used for drafts of papers to leave room for notes
-or corrections.
-%
-\itm{\CS{widenspacing}}
-Increases the current spacing by a factor of 1.25.
-With single spacing this is the analog of $1 {1\over2}$ spacing on a
-typewriter.
-Repeating |\widenspacing| increases the spacing by 1.25~times whatever
-it already was; it does not reset the spacing to singlespaced first.
-\enddescription
-When \TeXsis\ is first started the default is |\singlespaced|, but once
-it is initialized with the |\texsis| command (or |\preprint| or
-|\paper|, etc...) the spacing is set to |\doublespaced|.
-
-
-\bigskip
-\pagecheck{0.65\vsize}
-
-\subsection{Footnotes}
-
- Even when a paper is double spaced, you may want to have the
-footnotes single spaced. Also, if the text is in 12~point type you may
-nevertheless want to have the footnotes in 10~point type.
-In \TeXsis\ you can do this easily using \CS{Footnote} in place of
-\cs{footnote}, as in this example:\Footnote\dag{This is an example of
-the use of {\tt\bs Footnote} in \TeXsis.}\index{footnotes}%
-\TeXexample
-... as in this example:\Footnote\dag{This is an example of
-the use of {\tt\bs Footnote} in \TeXsis.}
-|endTeXexample
-\noindent
-|\Footnote| also automatically puts the reference mark (in this case the
-dagger symbol |\dag|) in a superscript.\Footnote{*}{The footnote
-character is typeset in math mode, as if it were between two {\tt
-\$}'s.}\ \
-%
-The typestyle used for the text of the footnote is
-controlled by \CS{FootFont}, which defaults to:
-\TeXexample
-\def\FootFont{\tenpoint}
-|endTeXexample
-\noindent
-If you want to change this you can do so somewhere near the beginning of
-your document. The spacing between multiple paragraphs in a |\Footnote|
-(if you are prone to being so verbose) is set to zero, regardless of the
-\cs{parskip} in the main part of the document, but you can also change
-this by adding \cs{parskip}|=|\meta{amount} to your new definition of
-|\FootFont|. If you want a singlespaced footnote in the |\FootFont|
-typestyle but without putting a reference
-mark in the text you can use
-\CS{Vfootnote} just as you would use \cs{vfootnote} in Plain \TeX. And
-of course if |\Footnote| or |\Vfootnote| cannot do what you need even
-after changing |\FootFont| then you can always use \cs{footnote} or
-\cs{vfootnote} from Plain \TeX.%%
-%
-\Footnote{\ddag}{A technical footnote: With
-|\footnote| from plain \TeX\ the group is closed before the footnote is
-typeset, so any line spacing you set inside the footnote is lost. You
-can solve this by putting a |\par| or |\vskip 0pt| at the end of your
-footnote, but then the final strut is put on a separate line. Getting
-footnotes to work just right is tricky business, which is why we wrote
-\CS{Footnote}.}
-
-\bigskip
-
-Sometimes it is desirable to have footnotes numbered consecutively.
-This is easily done with \CS{NFootnote}, which keeps a count of the
-footnotes it has created and uses the numbers for the reference marks.
-Just as with \CS{Footnote}, the text is single spaced and printed in
-the \CS{FootFont} typestyle.\NFootnote{This is an example of a
-numbered footnote, which was created by saying ``|...printed in the
-{\tt\bs FootFont} typestyle.\NFootnote{This is an example ... }|''}
-The footnote counter is called \CS{footnum}, so if you want to start
-over numbering footnotes (at the begining of a new chapter, for
-example), then simply set this back to zero, by saying
-\TeXexample
-\footnum=0
-|endTeXexample
-
-
-%==================================================*
-\pagecheck{0.65\vsize}
-
-\subsection{Automatic Quote Balancing}
-
-One of the differences between typing and typesetting is the way in
-which quote marks are handled.
-On a typewriter you would simply use the non-oriented double-quote
-mark (|"|) both to begin and end the quoted material.
-In typesetting, however, quoted text begins with a left-quote mark
-(``) and ends with a right-quote mark ('').
-To produce these in \TeX\ you have to type two single-quote marks,
-either |``| or |''|.
-This is not very difficult to do, but unless you have an editing
-program which does it for you, it is easy to forget and use the
-double-quote marks instead.
-With \TeXsis\ that's okay.
-If you say\index{quote balancing}%
-\example
-\CS{quoteon}
-\endexample
-then the next time a double-quote mark comes along it will be
-translated into a left-quote mark.
-The double-quote mark after that will become a right-quote mark, and
-so on, so that material enclosed in double-quote marks will be typeset
-correctly.
-All you have to do is remember to use the double-quote marks in pairs.
-
- In some special cases you may not want \TeXsis\ to be so smart
-about double-quotes. You can turn this feature off by saying
-\example
-\CS{quoteoff}
-\endexample
-The default though, once you have said |\texsis|, is |\quoteon|.
-
-%>>> EOF TXSfonts.doc <<<
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/texsis/base/TXSinstl.doc b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/texsis/base/TXSinstl.doc
deleted file mode 100644
index e6a112c75b4..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/texsis/base/TXSinstl.doc
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,358 +0,0 @@
-% file: TXSinstl.doc - Installation Instructions - TeXsis version 2.18
-%% @(#) $Id: TXSinstl.doc,v 18.2 2000/05/17 00:19:46 myers Exp $
-%======================================================================*
-% Copyright (c) 1990, 1992, 1995, 1997 by Eric Myers and Frank Paige.
-% This file is a part of TeXsis. Distribution and/or modifications
-% are allowed under the terms of the LaTeX Project Public License (LPPL).
-% See the file COPYING or ftp://ftp.texsis.org/texsis/LPPL
-%======================================================================*
-\ifx\undefined\meta \texsis\input TXSdocM.doc\input Manual.aux\draft\fi
-
-
-\appendix{A}{Customization and Installation of \TeXsis \label{install}}
-
-\centerline{(\TeX sis version \fmtversion, as of \revdate)}
-
-\noindent
-This appendix contains information about how to install \TeXsis\ on
-several types of computer systems, and how to customize \TeXsis\ for a
-particular installation. The discussion below on ``Local
-Modifications'' may be of interest to any user, but the rest of this
-Appendix is probably only of interest to someone who is responsible for
-installing or maintaining \TeXsis.
-
-
-\subsection{Customization}
-
- There are three different mechanisms for making modifications to
-the basic \TeXsis\ macro package. It is better to use one of these
-mechanisms rather than modifying the original code.
-
-\subsubsection{Local Modifications}
-
- \TeXsis\ will read the file {\tt TXSmods.tex}, if it exists, from
-the current directory or search path every time you run \TeXsis. This
-lets you make your own \idx{custom modifications} or additions to
-\TeXsis. For example, say you have a directory specifically for a
-particular project you are working on and you are writing several
-different papers or other documents related to this project. You could
-add a file called {\tt TXSmods.tex} to this directory to contain extra
-macro definitions that are used in all of these documents, and these
-will be loaded automatically whenever you run \TeXsis\ in this
-directory. If you run \TeXsis\ from another directory these macros will
-not be loaded.
-
-\subsubsection{Site Modifications}
-
- If a file called {\tt TXSsite.tex} exits in the current directory
-at the time the \TeXsis\ format file is created (see below) then it is
-automatically read in at this time. The purpose of this file is to
-allow you to add definitions and macros that are local to your computer
-installation. For example, in this file you would define the control
-word \cs{ORGANIZATION} to give the name of your organization or
-institution. \cs{ORGANIZATION} is used at the top of memos and at the
-top of the title page of a \cs{preprint}. You might also put a
-customized \cs{letterhead} macro in this file, and you may well want to
-change the definition of \CS{LandscapeSpecial}, which controls how your
-laser printer is put into landscape mode. Note that the file {\tt
-TXSsite.tex} is only read {\sl once}, when the \TeXsis\ format file is
-created, not every time \TeXsis\ is run.
-A prototype site file, called |TXSsite.000|, is included in the standard
-distribution of \TeXsis.
-
-
-\subsubsection{Patches}
-
- \TeXsis\ will also automatically read in a file called
-{\tt TXSpatch.tex} from the standard input path, if it exists,
-every time \TeXsis\ is run.
-This file should contain additions or corrections (``patches'') to
-\TeXsis. This patch file lets you correct minor problems or make minor
-changes to \TeXsis\ without having to rebuild the format file.
-
-Whenever we find a problem with \TeXsis\ we try to correct it as soon
-as possible.
-To make the correction available to users before the next version of
-\TeXsis\ is released we issue patch files containing the corrections.
-The most current patch file should always be available at
-\URL{ftp://ftp.texsis.org/texsis}, or in {\tt
-macros/texsis} on any CTAN server.
-
-
-
-%==================================================*
-
-\subsection{Installation of \TeXsis}
-
-To use \TeXsis\ or any large macro package effectively you should run
-the |initex| program to create a pre-compiled format. The general method
-of doing this is machine independent, but the specific commands depend
-on the operating system on your computer. This appendix gives the
-appropriate commands for running |initex| and installing \TeXsis\ on a
-computer running UNIX, a VAX or Alpha running VMS, and for an IBM PC running
-PC\TeX\ under \idx{MS-DOS}. We assume that you are familiar with the
-operating system and that \TeX\ and the Plain format have already been
-installed.
-Notes on how to install \TeXsis\ on other kinds of machines (such as
-Atari or Apple computers, or on Linux) are available on the \TeXsis\
-ftp server (\URL{ftp://ftp.texsis.org/texsis}).
-
-VMS users should note that \TeXsis\ is also available with the latest
-release of DECUS \TeX, and much of the installation work has already
-been done or can be done almost automatically. You may want to get this
-version from CTAN rather than the ``raw'' distribution from the TeXsis
-ftp site.
-If you are installing from the DECUS distribution you should read the
-file |INSTALL.VMS| with that distribution.
-
-
-\subsubsection{Quick Install for Unix and \TeX~3.x}
-
-The current version for \TeX\ as of 1997 is 3.14159. If you have
-anything earlier than version 3.x then it is strongly recommended that
-you first upgrade your \TeX\ installation. Assuming that you have a
-current \TeX\ installation on a Unix computer, you can build and
-install \TeXsis\ by simply doing the following:
-
-
-\EnvRightskip=\parindent
-\enumerate\enumpoints
-\itm\llap{\square\qquad}%
-Edit the file |Makefile| and change parameters and paths as
-appropriate, following the directions given in the comments.
-The TEXDIR variable should point to the top-level \TeX\ directory
-on your system. The default directories under TEXDIR are those
-recommended by the TeX Directory Structure (TDS) working group of the
-\TeX\ Users Group.
-
-\itm\llap{\square\qquad}%
-(Optional) Copy the file |TXSsite.000| to |TXSsite.tex| and edit
-this file to contain appropriate site dependent information, such as
-definitions for the name of your |\ORGANIZATION|, or your
-\cs{letterhead}, or change \cs{LandscapeSpecial}.
-If you already have a |TXSsite.tex| file then copy it to the current
-directory so that it will be included when building the format file.
-
-\itm\llap{\square\qquad}%
-Give the command `|make|' to build the format file and the manual.
-
-\itm\llap{\square\qquad}%
-Give the command `|make install|' to install the files on the system.
-\endenumerate
-
-
-\pagecheck{0.20\vsize}
-\subsubsection{Detailed Installation}
-
-To install \TeXsis\ follow the steps below or their equivalents for
-your computer and operating system. If you are installing a system-wide
-version of \TeXsis\ then you may want to review the appropriate
-documentation on how \TeX\ itself is installed on your system.
-\enumpoints
-\enumerate
-\itm\llap{\square\qquad}%
-Create a separate directory to hold the \TeXsis\ files. This is not
-strictly necessary, but it is strongly recommended, since there are
-more than 70~files for the source code and
-documentation. On a Unix machine we recommend using
-|/usr/local/share/texmf/tex/texsis| or |/usr/local/lib/tex/texsis|, depending on
-where your other \TeX\ files are kept. For a VMS system,
-you should use a subdirectory of the main \TeX\ directory, whatever that
-happens to be. On an IBM PC
-it is best to use a top-level directory |C:\TEXSIS| on your hard disk,
-rather than a subdirectory of |C:\PCTEX|, to simplify backing up your
-files.
-
-\itm\llap{\square\qquad}%
-Copy all of the \TeXsis\ files into this directory. The \TeXsis\ source
-files all have names of the form |TXS|$xxx$|.tex|, and
-most of the documentation
-files have names |TXS|$xxx$|.doc|. \TeXsis\ style files end with
-the extension |.txs|. There will also be several other files in your
-distribution of \TeXsis, such as |texsis.tex| and |Manual.tex|.
-A complete list of the files can be found in a file called |MANIFEST|.
-
-
-\itm\llap{\square\qquad}%
-Make any necessary changes in the source code. You will probably want to
-copy the file |TXSsite.000| to |TXSsite.tex| and edit this file,
-changing the definition of \cs{ORGANIZATION}, \cs{LandscapeSpecial},
-and the letterhead macros.
-
-On VMS systems you may (or may not) want to define |\TeXsisLib| to be
-the \TeXsis\ directory and |\TXSpatches| to be the patch file in that
-directory.
-
-If you have problems with missing fonts, look at the documentation
-in the file |TXSfonts.tex|.
-
-
-\itm\llap{\square\qquad}%
-Create the format file |texsis.fmt| by running |initex|. \index{initex}
-On a Unix machine the command is:
-\example
-|% initex \&plain texsis '\dump'|
-\endexample
-You must remember the ``|\|'' to escape the ``|&|.''
-
-On a VMS system replace the |initex| command with |TEX/INIT|. You must
-also tell \TeX\ where to find the input files for both \TeXsis\ and
-Plain \TeX. The commands are:
-\example\obeylines\advance\rightskip by -1cm
-|$ DEFINE/USER TEXIN | \meta{texsis} \meta{plain}
-|$ TEX/INIT/NOFORMAT/TEXINPUTS=TEXIN: "&plain texsis \dump"|
-\endexample
-where \meta{texsis} is the specification for the device, directory, and
-subdirectories of \TeXsis, and \meta{plain} is the specifiation for
-the standard files like |PLAIN.TEX|.
-
-For an IBM PC with PC\TeX\ give the command,
-\example
-|TEX TEXSIS /I|
-\endexample
-and reply to the |*| prompt with ``\cs{dump}.'' (In some versions of
-PC\TeX\ the |TEX| command is replaced with |TEX386| or |TEX386b|. Check
-your manual to be sure.) \TeXsis\ will also work with |emtex| or any
-other version of ``big'' \TeX\ for the PC, but you will have to check
-the documentation for that particular implementation of \TeX\ for
-specific instructions for creating a preloaded format.
-
-In any case |initex| will load the Plain \TeX\ format and then the
-various pieces of \TeXsis, displaying a message for each piece.
-Finally it will spew out a list of fonts used and other information.
-This should contain near the end the statement ``No pages of output
-produced.'' (If it does not, something may be wrong with your distribution,
-although it is probably a minor problem. Check your editing of the
-|TXSsite.tex| file.) The preloaded format will be
-written to the file |texsis.fmt|.
-
-\itm\llap{\square\qquad}%
-Copy or move various files to where they need to be:
-\enumerate
-\itm
-Copy the format file to the place where your version of \TeX\ looks for
-pre-loaded formats. On Unix systems this is usually
-\example
-|/usr/local/share/texmf/tex/formats|.
-\endexample
-or some variation of this.
-For VMS machines make sure the file is in the directory named by
-|$TEX_FORMATS|.
-With PC-\TeX\ the file goes into |\PCTEX\TEXFMTS|.
-
-\itm
-Copy the \TeXsis\ style files (which end with the extension |.txs|) to
-the place your version of \TeX\ usually looks for input. Under Unix
-this should be
-\example\obeylines
-|/usr/local/lib/tex/inputs|
-(or sometimes |/usr/local/lib/tex/macros|).
-\endexample
-For VMS machines make sure these files are in the directory included
-in the path defined by the |TEX_INPUTS| logical. For PC-\TeX\ the
-proper place is |\PCTEX\TEXINPUT|.
-
-\itm
-If you have any run-time patches to add to \TeXsis\ copy the
-file |TXSpatch.tex| to the same \TeX\ inputs directory.
-If there is a |TXSpatch.tex| from a previous release of \TeXsis\ you
-should be sure to remove the old file if it is not being replaced.
-
-\endenumerate
-
-\itm\llap{\square\qquad}%
-Having created the format file, you need to make a command |texsis| to
-run \TeX\ using it. The way to do this is very dependent on the
-operating system.
-
-\enumerate
-
-\itm
-On a Unix system running \TeX~3.0 or higher you need only to make a link
-to the executable |virtex|\index{virtex} with the same name as the
-format you want to load. |Virtex| probably lives in |/usr/local/bin| or
-some similar place. The command to make the link is something like:
-\example
-|ln /usr/local/bin/virtex /usr/local/bin/texsis|
-\endexample
-
-For \TeX\ versions 2.9x you can build an ``undumped'' version of
-\TeXsis. You will have to see the \TeX\ distribution notes for a
-description of |undump|. \index{undump} However, this is now a very old
-version of \TeX\ (as of this writing \TeX\ is up to version~3.1415), so
-you should seriously consider upgrading to a newer version of \TeX.
-
-
-If you are going to create a ``private'' version of \TeXsis\ rather than
-installing it for the whole system then you need to add your \TeXsis\
-directory to the environment variables |TEXFORMATS| and |TEXINPUTS| and
-define the command |texsis| as follows. For the C-shell, put in your
-|.cshrc| file:
-\example\obeylines
-|alias texsis virtex \\\&texsis|
-|setenv TEXSIS_LIB $HOME/texsis/|
-|setenv TEXFORMATS ".:$TEXSIS_LIB:$TEXFORMATS"|
-|setenv TEXINPUTS ".:$TEXSIS_LIB:$TEXINPUTS"|
-\endexample
-(This assumes that |TEXFORMATS| and |TEXINPUTS| are already properly
-defined. If not, insert the proper directories.)
-
-\itm
-Under VMS, place in your |login.com| file the commands
-\example\obeylines
-|$ DEFINE TEXSIS_LIB| \meta{disk}|:[|\meta{directory}|]|
-|$ TEXSIS :== $TEX$:TEX.EXE &TEXSIS_LIB:TEXSIS|
-\endexample
-where |TEX$| is the logical name for the main \TeX\ directory. You can
-also put these commands in a \TeX\ initialization |.COM| file.
-
-
-
-\itm
-For PC\TeX\index{PCTeX@{PC\TeX}} you should find in the distribution a file
-|TEXSIS.BAT|. If you don't, you can create it. The file should contain:
-\example\obeylines
-|ECHO OFF|
-|\PCTEX\TEX &TEXSIS %1 /F 25000|
-\endexample
-(Replace the |TEX| command with |TEX386| or |TEX386b| if appropriate for
-your machine. For PC-\TeX\ versions 3.14 and greater the |/F 25000| is
-no longer needed.)
-Either put this file
-in a directory in your command path or add the directory it is in
-to your |PATH| statement.
-If you want to be able to load a patch file then you should also
-include a line such as
-\example
-|\def\TXSpatches{C:/TEXSIS/TXSpatch}|
-\endexample
-in the |TXSsite.tex| file. Because \TeX\ and MS-DOS both use
-backslashes for their own purposes the path is specified with {\sl
-forward} slashes;
-DOS understands them to be the same as a backslash.
-
-\endenumerate
-\endenumerate
-
-\bigskip\goodbreak
-
- After these steps have been carried out, \TeXsis\ should be
-installed and available to you, and to other users if installed
-system-wide. The command
-\example
-|texsis| {\sl name}
-\endexample
-should run \TeXsis\ on the file {\sl name}|.tex| and produce the file
-{\sl name}|.dvi|, which can be printed like any |.dvi| file.
-A good test is to go to the \TeXsis\ source directory (or the
-documentation directory, if the documentation files |TXS|$xxx$|.doc|
-have been put in a separate directory) and say
-\example
-|texsis Manual|
-\endexample
-On the first try this will produce several warning messages coming from
-undefined tags for forward references. These will be defined later in
-the document and saved in the file |Manual.aux|; Running \TeXsis\ a
-second time should produce the \TeXsis\ manual with no errors.
-
-%>>> EOF TXSinstl.doc <<<
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/texsis/base/TXSintro.doc b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/texsis/base/TXSintro.doc
deleted file mode 100644
index 6c8e1d60256..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/texsis/base/TXSintro.doc
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,353 +0,0 @@
-%% file: TXSintro.doc - Manual Intructions - TeXsis version 2.18
-%% @(#) $Id: TXSintro.doc,v 18.2 2000/05/17 00:19:46 myers Exp $
-%======================================================================*
-% (C) Copyright 1989, 1992, 1997 by Eric Myers and Frank E. Paige
-% This file is a part of TeXsis. Distribution and/or modifications
-% are allowed under the terms of the LaTeX Project Public License (LPPL).
-% See the file COPYING or ftp://ftp.texsis.org/texsis/LPPL
-%======================================================================*
-\ifx\undefined\meta \texsis\input TXSdocM.doc\input Manual.aux\draft\fi
-
-
-\section{Introduction \label{sect.intro}}
-
- \TeX\ is a computer typesetting system created by Donald
-Knuth\index{Knuth, Donald} of Stanford University.
-It is described succinctly in his book, \TeXbook.\reference{Knuth}
-D.E.~Knuth,
-\booktitle{The \TeX book} (Addison-Wesley, 1986)
-\endreference
-\TeX\ is especially well suited for typesetting technical material
-containing mathematical symbols and equations.
-As a result, \TeX\ in one form or another is now used by almost all
-mathematicians and most physicists for writing scientific papers and
-related documents.
-The journals of the American Mathematical Society are typeset with
-\TeX, and the journals of the American Physical Society now accept
-manuscripts written in \TeX.
-A large number of physicists also distribute preprint
-(pre-publication) versions of their papers, known as ``e-prints,'' via
-an archive server based at the Los Alamos National Laboratory.
-\TeX\ in some form is the {\it de facto} standard for such papers.
-
-There are actually several different ``flavors'' of \TeX.
-One of the reasons that \TeX\ is so useful is that it has a powerful
-macro capability --- to the point that \TeX\ can actually be
-considered to be a computer ``language.''
-As a result, there now exist a number of macro packages, or
-``formats,'' which either extend or replace the basic \TeX\ language
-of \TeXbook\ (which is commonly known as ``plain'' \index{plain TeX@{plain
-\TeX}}\TeX) by adding more advanced features or commands appropriate
-to more specialized types of documents.
-\TeXsis\ is one such macro package, designed specifically (but not
-exclusively) for physicists.
-\TeXsis\ provides the author with many useful commands with are either
-not available or not easily implemented by the casual user of plain
-\TeX.
-Among these are the ability to automatically number equations,
-references, figures and tables, and to refer to these ``numbered''
-objects easily by symbolic names which are independent of the values
-assigned to them when the document is processed.
-\TeXsis\ makes it easy to change the type style or size, and to
-control other aspects of the formatting.
-\TeXsis\ also includes special macros for printing in double columns
-and for constructing ruled tables.
-It is easy with \TeXsis\ to produce more specialized documents, such
-as letters, referee reports, and memoranda, or even a thesis or a book.
-
-Many physicists are now familiar, at least by name, with another
-\TeX-based format, the REVTEX package from the American Physical
-Society.
-REVTEX is in turn based on a more general format, known as
-\LaTeX.\reference{LaTeX}
-L. Lamport,
-\booktitle{\LaTeX, A Document Preparation System},
-(Addison-Wesley, 1985)
-\endreference
-\index{latex@{\LaTeX}}
-Unfortunately, \LaTeX\ differs from plain \TeX\ in several subtle but
-important ways, so that documents created using plain \TeX\ cannot be
-used with \LaTeX.
-In contrast, \TeXsis\ is functionally a superset of plain TeX, so that
-everything described in \TeXbook\ will also work in \TeXsis\ (even
-though the internal workings of some of the plain \TeX\ macros have
-actually been modified).
-This means that \TeXsis\ documents can also make use of just about any
-of the many smaller macro packages designed for use with plain \TeX,
-or an author can make use of the methods and tricks described in
-\TeXbook.
-Unfortunately, it also means that REVTEX and \TeXsis\ are mutually
-incompatible.
-
-\bigskip
-
-This manual explains how to use \TeXsis.
-Since it is a user's guide, it makes no attempt to describe how the
-various macros work; for that one should consult the source code,
-which is extensively commented.
-However, we do assume that the reader is already familiar with
-\idx{plain} \TeX.
-If you don't already know plain \TeX, a good way to learn is to read
-and work through the exercises in
-\booktitle{A Gentle Introduction to \TeX} by Michael~Doob.\reference{Doob}
-M.~Doob,
-\booktitle{A Gentle Introduction to \TeX\ (A Manual for Self-Study)},
-(\TeX\ User's Group, Providence).
-Also available as a plain \TeX\ file from CTAN or at\n
-\URL{ftp://ftp.texsis.org/pub/tex/gentle.tex}
-\endreference
-The source file for this (called {\tt gentle.tex}) is available on the
-\TeXsis\ ftp server, or on CTAN.
-You can also start by reading the \TeXbook, paying special attention
-to chapters~1-10 and 16-19.
-The manual by Spivak\reference{Spivak}
-M.~Spivak,
-\booktitle{PC\TeX\ User's Guide.}
-(Documentation distributed with PC\TeX)
-\endreference
-which accompanies PC\TeX\ (which is an implementation of \TeX\ for the
-IBM~PC) is also recommended.
-
-
-%==================================================*
-\subsection{Overview of this Manual}
-
-The main topics covered in the several sections of this manual
-\linkname{page.itemize}{are}:\tag{page.itemize}{\folio}
-\itemize \clump
-\itm \Sect{intro} --
-An introduction to \TeXsis\ and the philosophy behind the macros, and
-instructions on how to begin using \TeXsis.
-
-\itm \Sect{fonts} --
-Selecting sizes and fonts of type, choosing single, double, or triple
-spacing, and automatically handling quotation marks.
-
-\itm \Sect{eqns} --
-Automatic numbering of equations, automatic sizing of parentheses and
-brackets, and special symbols for physics equations.
-
-\itm \Sect{refs} --
-Defining new references, for which numbers are assigned automatically,
-citing references already so defined, and making a list of references.
-
-\itm \Sect{labels} --
-Labeling things like section numbers, figures, items in an outline, or
-page numbers, and referring to them in other parts of the document.
-
-\itm \Sect{papers} --
-Producing a complete paper, including the title page, chapters,
-sections, subsections, and appendices, a table of contents, running
-headlines, and an index.
-How to use the "master file" concept to split a long document into
-several files.
-
-\itm \Sect{figures} --
-Producing automatically numbered tables and figures and producing
-ruled tables.
-
-\itm \Sect{envmt} --
-Displaying text in special ways using "environments," including those
-for centered lines, lists of things, listings of computer programs, and
-\TeX\ examples.
-
-\itm \Sect{fmts} --
-Using specialized layouts for journals and conference proceedings, and
-creating new ones.
-
-\itm \Sect{letr} --
-Typing letters, form letters, memos and referee reports.
-
-\itm \Sect{dcol} --
-Producing double column output.
-
-\itm \Sect{misc} --
-Miscellaneous macros for ignoring text and doing various other useful
-things, and a checkpoint/restart feature for printing very long documents.
-
-\enditemize
-
-Several appendices are also included to deal with more technical
-matters.
-%
-Appendix~A explains how to install \TeXsis\ on Unix computers, on a
-VAX/VMS system, and on an IBM~PC. It also explains how to customize
-\TeXsis\ for your own installation. Appendix~B lists changes that have
-been made to \TeXsis\ in recent revisions. Appendix~C lists the fonts
-usually available with \TeXsis.
-
-Two examples of \TeXsis\ documents are included in the standard
-distribution. The first, in the file |Example.tex|, is a short
-(3~pages) example of a physics paper typeset with \TeXsis. The second
-is this manual itself, which was also created with \TeXsis. If you
-would like to look at the files used to create the Manual, the master
-file is called |TXSdoc.doc|, and the various sections of the document
-are in files with names of the form |TXS|$xxxx$|.doc|. For those who
-are comfortable programming in \TeX\ it is possible to extract specific
-macros from the \TeXsis\ source code or to modify or even rewrite these
-macros. The source code is contained in files with names of the form
-|TXS|$xxxx$|.tex|. We have tried wherever possible to include
-at least somewhat
-illuminating comments in the source code.
-
-%======================================================================*
-
-\subsection{Getting Started \label{sect.start}}
-
- Assuming that \TeXsis\ has been properly installed on your computer,
-using \TeXsis\ is as simple as using \TeX\ or \LaTeX.
-To run \TeX\ with the \TeXsis\ format to process a manuscript file
-called |myfile.tex| you simply give the command:
-\index{running@{running \TeXsis}}
-\def\HeadText{Getting Started}
-\TeXexample
-texsis myfile
-|endTeXexample
-As with any version of \TeX, the output from \TeX\ is put in the file
-|myfile.dvi|, which you may view on your computer terminal or print on
-a laser printer or other output device.
-
- Since \TeXsis\ is a superset of plain \TeX, any file that you
-process with plain \TeX\ can be processed with \TeXsis, and you will
-get the same results.
-In particular, plain \TeX\ defaults to 10~pt.\ type and single spacing
-between lines, and so does \TeXsis\ unless you initialize its special
-features.
-But since you are probably using
-\TeXsis\ because of these special features, you should begin your
-manuscript file with the initialization command
-\TeXexample
-\texsis
-|endTeXexample
-\noindent
-One of the things this command does is switch the output to 12~pt.\
-type, double spaced, which generally looks better on a small laser
-printer. Commands that allow you to change the type size or line
-spacing yourself are described in \Sect{fonts}. More
-specialized initialization commands may be used in place of (or
-in addition to) the |\texsis| command when you are using a
-pre-defined document layout. These are described in
-\Sect{fmts}.
-
- Note also that just as in plain \TeX\ there is a difference
-between uppercase and lowercase letters in control word names.
-Thus if you say \cs{TeXsis} instead of \cs{texsis} you won't
-initialize any special features but you will print out
-``\TeXsis.''
-
-
-%==================================================*
-\newpage
-\subsection{Some Philosophy \label{sect.philosophy}}
-
-In designing the \TeXsis\ macros we have tried to follow some basic
-guidelines which we feel make \TeXsis\ a more useful tool.
-It may help you while learning about \TeXsis\ to know what these
-guidelines are, especially if you are already familiar with other
-\TeX\ macro packages.
-However, you can skip this section without missing anything important
-to a first time user.
-
-The guidelines we have followed are: \index{philosophy}
-
-\itemize
-\itm
-\TeXsis\ is a superset of plain \TeX, so that anything
-you can't do in \TeXsis\ (and even those that you can) can be done
-with plain \TeX\ instead. \index{compatibility!with@{with plain \TeX}}
-This also means that \TeXsis\ is compatible with most plain
-\TeX\ macro packages, such as |epsf.tex| and |index.tex|, or other
-specialized macro sets.\Footnote\dag{We cannot completely guarantee this
-because other macro packages might define macros with the same names as
-used by \TeXsis, although we have taken several steps to prevent this
-kind of conflict.} Even if some of the plain macros are actually
-redefined in \TeXsis, they are required to still behave as described in
-\TeXbook.
-
-\itm
-When a \TeXsis\ macro is similar to a plain \TeX\ macro it should, when
-possible, have a similar name and syntax. \index{macros!syntax} Thus
-\cs{Footnote} in \TeXsis\ is used exactly like \cs{footnote} in plain
-\TeX, and in ruled tables ``|&|'' and ``|\cr|'' can be used exactly as
-they are in an |\halign|.
-
-\itm
-Macro names\index{macros!names} will be short and simple, but
-descriptive.
-Almost all plain \TeX\ macro names are in lower case for ease of
-typing, so macros with names containing uppercase letters can
-immediately be recognized as being a part of
-\TeXsis\ (instead of plain \TeX). As a general rule though we try
-to use lowercase for frequently used macro names for ease of typing.
-
-\itm
-There are two different ways in which arguments may be passed to
-macros, depending on the length of the argument.
-Short arguments are simply enclosed in curly brackets, the way \TeX\
-usually handles macro arguments.
-For example, the title of a section is created by the
-\cs{section}\index{macros!arguments} command with,
-\TeXexample
-\section{The nonlinear $\sigma$-model}
-|endTeXexample
-Longer amounts of text (many lines), and text which is considered to be
-in a special environment, is enclosed between commands of the
-form ``|\thing|'' and ``|\endthing|.'' An abstract, for example, is
-typed as,
-\TeXexample
-|smalltt\abstract
-A mechanism for total confinement of quarks, similar to that
-of Schwinger, is defined which requires the existence of
-Abelian or non-Abelian gauge fields. It is shown how ...
-\endabstract
-|endTeXexample
-This is similar to the |\begin{thing}| {\ttdots} |\end{thing}|
-construction in \LaTeX\ \index{latex@{\LaTeX}} but is slightly easier
-to type.\Footnote*{And, more importantly, is compatible with plain
-\TeX---|\end| signals the end of a document in plain \TeX,
-and shouldn't be used for anything else. However, if you really want
-to type |\begin{thing}| and |\end{thing}| you can do so, and \TeXsis\
-will understand it to mean |\thing| and |\endthing|.}
-The reason for preferring this way of delimiting text or arguments is
-that for very long pieces of material it is much easier to look for
-something like |\thing| and |\endthing| than it is to count curly brackets.
-
-\itm
-The fundamental purpose of \TeXsis\ is to typeset printed words and
-\hbox{equations} on a physical piece of paper.
-In other ``document mark-up'' languages, including SMGL, HTML, and
-\LaTeX, the primary goal is to create in the computer an abstract
-representation of a document which is independent of the way the
-document is printed.
-It can be useful to treat a document this way, and so we sometimes use
-similar ideas in \TeXsis, but this approach can also conflict with the
-goal of typesetting the document the way an author or editor would
-choose.
-Whenever there is such a conflict we will err on the side of
-``typesetting'' rather than on the ``abstract representation'' of the
-document.
-
-\itm
-The source code defining the macros should be available to the users,
-so that those who want to see how something is done can do so, and
-those who want to make their own modifications can do so.
-The macro definitions should include sufficient comments that
-(usually) someone with only a little bit of experience with \TeX\ can
-understand what is going on.
-Also, macros which perform similar functions and work together should
-be kept in a single file, but separate parts of the whole package
-should be kept in separate files.
-When possible these individual files should be usable on their own
-with plain \TeX.
-For example, it is possible to use just the double column macros of
-\TeXsis\ by saying |\input TXSdcol.tex|, and the ruled table macros
-can be used in plain
-\TeX\ by saying |\input TXSruled.tex|.
-
-\enditemize
-
-
-
-\newpage
-
-% >>> EOF TXSintro.doc <<<
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/texsis/base/TXSletr.doc b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/texsis/base/TXSletr.doc
deleted file mode 100644
index 4451a3c304b..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/texsis/base/TXSletr.doc
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,588 +0,0 @@
-%% file: TXSletr.doc - Letters and Memos - TeXsis 2.18
-%% @(#) $Id: TXSletr.doc,v 18.3 2000/06/01 21:54:30 myers Exp $
-%======================================================================*
-% (C) Copyright 1989, 1992, 1994, 1997 by Eric Myers and Frank E. Paige
-% This file is a part of TeXsis. Distribution and/or modifications
-% are allowed under the terms of the LaTeX Project Public License (LPPL).
-% See the file COPYING or ftp://ftp.texsis.org/texsis/LPPL
-%======================================================================*
-\ifx\undefined\bs \texsis\input TXSdocM.doc\input Manual.aux\draft\fi
-
-
-\section{Letters, Memos and Referee Reports \label{sect.letr}}
-
- The commands \CS{letter}, \cs{memo}, \cs{referee} and
-\cs{formLetters} invoke special styles for producing letters or
-memos.
-The letter formats follow closely the letter format given in
-Appendix~E of \TeXbook, although there are some differences and some
-additions.
-\index{letters}
-
-
-\subsection{Letters}
-
- \CS{letter} is designed for typing basic business-style letters
-on letterhead stationary. It uses the following commands:
-\description{~closing\qquad}\clump
-
-\itm{\CS{letter}}
-Initialize the letter format.
-
-\itm{\CS{dated}\arg{date}}
-Sets the current date to be \meta{date} rather than today's date.
-This redefines \cs{today} to be the date you give. If omitted,
-\cs{today} just gives the current date.
-
-\itm{\CS{withEnvelope}}
-Signals that an envelope should also be printed.
-See Section~\use{sect.env} to find out how this works.
-
-\itm{\CS{letterhead}\arg{phone-ext}}
-Puts the date and phone number \<phone-ext> at the top of the page, so
-that it will appear near the letterhead when the letter is printed on
-your institutional stationary.
-
-\itm{\CS{address}}
-The name and address of the recipient should follow, in \cs{obeylines}
-format. The first line is used as the name of the addressee in a running
-headline for pages after the first.
-
-\itm{\CS{body}}
-Begins the body of the letter. The line immediately below this should
-be the opening salutation, (e.g. ``Dear Ann Landers,'').
-
-\itm{\CS{closing}}
-Begins the closing material, in \cs{obeylines} format. The first line
-following is the closing salutation (e.g. "Sincerely Yours,") and the
-second is the sender's name. When the letter is printed, room is left
-for a signature. Optional additional lines can be added after the name
-for the sender's title, or similar information.
-
-\itm{\CS{annotations}}
-Optional annotations follow, in \cs{obeylines} format.
-
-\itm{\CS{cc}}
-Carbon copy. A "cc:" and the names following are printed,
-properly aligned.
-
-\itm{\CS{Encl}}
-Enclosure. This is like \CS{cc} but "Encl:" is printed
-for a list of enclosures.
-
-\itm{\CS{ps}}
-Optional postscript follows. This is not in \cs{obeylines} format.
-
-\itm{\CS{endletter}\qquad}
-Ends the letter. You can say \cs{bye} instead.
-\enddescription
-
-The \CS{letter} document format automatically sets up a running headline
-for all pages after the first, containing the addressee's name (taken
-from the first line following \cs{address}), the date, and the page
-number. If you wish, you can turn off these running headlines by saying
-\cs{nopagenumbers}. If you want to change the name of the addressee you
-can simply redefine the macro called \CS{addressee} anytime after
-\cs{address} has been used (using \cs{gdef}, so that the re-definition
-exists outside of the group used to enclose the address). Or, if you
-don't want the person's name used at all, simply redefine \CS{addressee}
-to be empty, like so: |\gdef\addressee{}|.
-
-\bigskip
-
- The use of some of these macros is illustrated by the following
-example:
-\TeXexample
-\texsis
-\letter
-\dated{1 April 1999}
-\letterhead{7734}
-\address
-Prof.~D. Knuth
-Stanford University
-Stanford, CA~94305
-\gdef\addressee{Knuth, the \TeX\ God}
-\body
-Dear Prof.~Knuth:
-
- We enclose the documentation and source code for a \TeX\
-macro package which we have developed for physics papers.
-
-\closing
-Sincerely yours,
-Eric Myers
-Frank E.~Paige
-\ps This stuff is also available by anonymous ftp.
-\endletter
-|endTeXexample
-
-By default the closing material is indented about 3.5 inches.
-The actual amount is set by \CS{longindent}, which you can change.
-You should put the change on the same line as the \CS{closing},
-like so:\index{letters!adjusting size}
-\TeXexample
-\closing\longindent=0pt
-Sincerely yours,
-Joe User
-|endTeXexample
-\noindent
-This example puts the closing material flush with the left margin. You
-should not put \CS{longindent}|=0pt| on the line following, because
-\CS{closing} uses that line as the closing salutation (like
-``Sincerely,'').
-
-The default ``letterhead'' created by \CS{letterhead} is pretty plain --
-it just puts the date and phone number at the top of the page. The
-idea is that you can put your own office letterhead stationary in the
-printer and when you print the letter on this paper the date and phone
-number will be in an appropriate position.\Footnote*{If you can't put
-stationary in your printer you can copy it onto stationary with a
-copying machine.}
-Alternatively, you can create a different letterhead macro to actually
-print a letterhead at the top of the page. The physics department at
-Excited State University could have a custom |\ESUletterhead| macro
-which prints their logo and letterhead (it should still take a phone
-number as an argument, to make it easier to switch between
-|\ESUletterhead| and |\letterhead|.) These kind of custom macro
-definitions should be put in a local site file, as described in
-Appendix~\use{install}.
-
- If a letter is somewhat too short or too long to fit on a page,
-its length can be adjusted indirectly by changing the width of the text.
-To do this insert \CS{letterwidth}\arg{width} immediately after
-\cs{letter} to set the width of the text.
-Not only does this change the \cs{hsize} to the size you specify, but it
-also adjusts the margins and centers the text appropriately (so it is
-preferable to simply changing the \cs{hsize}).
-
-\bigskip
-
-A simple Unix shell script called \idx{{\tt letr}} is included with
-the current \TeXsis\ distribution to make it easier to compose
-letters.
-Saying
-\TeXexample
-letr -m Hutu |endTeXexample will create a template file |Hutu.tex|, if
-there is not already a file by that name, and then start you editing
-the file.
-It then automatically runs your file through \TeXsis, and the envelope
-file too if it exists (see the next section).
-The |-m| flag, which is optional, should tell your printer to go into
-``manual feed'' mode to wait for you to feed in your own stationary.
-(Manual feed mode is always selected for an envelope printed by |letr|.)
-
- Keep in mind that this only works on Unix and the script
-has to be executable and exist in your ``path''. Ask a local wizard
-for help if you don't know what this means.
-
-
-%======================================================================*
-
-\subsection{Envelopes \label{sect.env}}
-
-Many laser printers can print on envelopes, as long as you arrange to
-put the address and return address in the right place, and print the
-material in ``landscape'' mode (turned 90\degree\ on the page).
-The simplest way to do this is to simply say \CS{withEnvelope} at the
-beginning of your file, after the \cs{letter}.
-When you run your letter through \TeXsis, it will then create a file
-with the same name but an extension of |.env|, which contains the
-commands to print the envelope.
-Run {\sl that} file through \TeXsis\ and print the output in landscape
-mode and you will get your envelope.
-If you are using |dvips| the appropriate command is
-\example
-|dvips -m -t landscape myfile.dvi|
-\endexample
-The ``|-t landscape|'' rotates the output, while the ``|-m|'' puts the
-printer in manual feed mode so that you can feed in the envelope.
-
-You will have to figure out how your printer wants the envelopes to be
-fed to it.
-Some take the envelope down the middle, while others want it over to
-one side or another.
-You can adjust for different envelope sizes, or shift the position of
-the printing over a bit to make it easier to feed in the envelope, by
-changing the parameters \CS{EnvlWidth}, \CS{EnvlHeight}, and
-\CS{ENvlVoffset}. The default values are
-\TeXexample
-\newdimen\EnvlWidth \EnvlWidth=24cm
-\newdimen\EnvlHeight \EnvlHeight=10.5cm
-\newdimen\EnvlVoffset \EnvlVoffset=1.25in
-|endTeXexample
-
-The actual printing of the envelope is done by the macro
-\CS{MakeEnvelope}, which takes two arguments.
-The first is the address, while the second is the return address.
-Line endings in either are respected, or you can use \cs{n} to cause a
-line break.
-
-Saying \CS{withEnvelope} simply causes a \CS{MakeEnvelope} command to
-be written to the |.env| file when you say \cs{endletter} or \cs{bye}.
-You can edit that file before your run it through \TeXsis\ if you
-don't like the form of the address or return address.
-Alternatively, \CS{withEnvelope} will use the two macros
-\CS{theSignature} and \CS{ReturnAddress} to construct the return
-address.
-The default value for \CS{theSignature} is taken to be the name
-appearing after the closing salutation, below \cs{closing}.
-If you want to change it to something else you should include a new
-definition {\em after} the \cs{closing}, using |\gdef|.
-For example,
-\TeXexample
-\closing
-Sincerely yours,
-Joe User
-\gdef\theSignature{Joe's Mamma}
-|endTeXexample
-This would use ``Joe's Mamma'' as the name on the return address,
-even though ``Joe User'' would appear in the closing of the letter.
-
-
-
-%======================================================================*
-\pagecheck{0.5\vsize}
-
-\subsection{Memos \label{sect.memo}}
-
- Saying \CS{memo} sets up a special format for memoranda,
-including a header at the top of the page with the name of your
-organization and the word "MEMORANDUM". The organization name defaults
-to \cs{ORGANIZATION}, which you can change if you like simply by
-saying \index{memos}
-\example
-|\def|\cs{ORGANIZATION}\arg{name}
-\endexample
-(This can be done once in the file |TXSsite.tex| before compiling
-\TeXsis, as described in
-Appendix~\use{install},\index{memos!customization} or you can explicitly
-put the name of your organization in your file.) The commands for the
-memo format are:
-\description{Xendmemo\quad}\clump
-%
-\itm{\CS{memo}}
-Initialize \TeXsis\ for memo format.
-%
-\itm{\CS{faxmemo}}
-A document format similar to \CS{memo}, but for faxes.
-Included in the header is a space to enter the number of pages sent.
-A return fax number is also included if it is defined in
-\CS{FaxNumber}.
-%
-\itm{\CS{Date}}
-Prints the word "{\twelvess Date:}" and the date, which must be on the
-same line. If no date is given, then the current date is used, as given
-by \cs{today}. If you would rather have the date in the upper right hand
-corner, as in a letter, use |\letterdate| instead of \CS{Date}.
-%
-\itm{\CS{To}}
-Prints the word "{\twelvess To:}" and the name(s) which follow.
-%
-\itm{\CS{From}}
-Prints the word "{\twelvess From:}" and the name(s) which follow
-%.
-\itm{\CS{Subj}}
-Prints the word "{\twelvess Subject:}" and the subject which
-follows. The subject may be several lines long. The first line
-of the subject field is used in a running headline at the top of
-all pages following the first.
-%
-\itm{\CS{FAX}}
-Prints ``{\twelvess FAX \#:},'' for entering a fax telephone number.
-%
-\itm{\cs{n}}
-New line for |\To|, |\From|, or |\Subj|.
-%
-\itm{\CS{nopagenumbers}}
-Turns off the running subject headlines and the page numbers.
-This must be typed after |\memo| since it is redefined by the
-memo format.
-%
-\itm{\CS{Text}}
-Begins the text of the memo. You can also say \cs{body}.
-%
-\itm{\CS{annotations}\qquad}
-Optional annotations follow, in \cs{obeylines} format.
-%
-\itm{\CS{cc}}
-Carbon copy. A "cc:" and the names following it are printed,
-properly aligned in \cs{obeylines} format.
-%
-\itm{\CS{Distribution}\qquad}
-This is like \CS{cc} but prints "Distribution:" instead.
-%
-\itm{\CS{Encl}}
-This is like \CS{cc} but prints "Encl:" instead, as for letters.
-%
-\itm{\CS{ps}}
-Optional postscript follows. This is not in \cs{obeylines} format.
-%
-\itm{\CS{endmemo}}
-Ends the memo. You can say \cs{bye} instead.
-\enddescription
-
- All of these commands with mixed case names have synonyms which are
-the same name but in all lower case letters. The use of the \cs{memo}
-format is illustrated by the following example:
-\TeXexample
-|smalltt\memo
-\To \TeXsis\ Users
-\From E. Myers and F.E. Paige
-\Date
-\Subj \TeXsis\ 2.18
-\text
- \TeXsis\ 2.18 is now available. The new version adds
-several features and corrects various bugs.
-\Distribution
-A. Blake
-I. Harrity
-B. Nichols
-\endmemo
-|endTeXexample
-
-If the memo is longer than one page a headline containing the subject
-and page number is put across the top of all pages after the first. If
-the subject is longer than one line only the first line of the subject
-is used in this headline. You can easily change what is used as this
-subject line by changing the definition of the macro \CS{subjectline}
-anywhere in the body of the memo. For example, although the subject of
-your memo might be simply ``Annual Report,'' you might make the headline
-more specific by defining:
-\TeXexample
-\def\subjectline{Annual Activity Report for Buckaroo Banzai}
-|endTeXexample
-\nobreak\noindent
-Then this longer title will appear with the page number on all pages
-after
-the first.
-
-
-%======================================================================*
-\subsection{Referee Reports}
-
- The \CS{referee} format creates a document very much like a
-\cs{memo}, although there are some important differences.
-\index{referee reports}
-Referee reports are supposed to be confidential, so instead of
-printing the name of your organization at the top of the first
-page it puts the words ``Referee Report.'' In the
-\CS{referee} format you can use the same commands that are used in
-the \cs{memo} format, such as |\To| and |\Date|, but if you use
-\cs{From} a warning message will be printed on your screen. (This
-is only a warning, it still does what it has been asked to do!)
-
-\bottomfigure{Referee}
-\begingroup
-\def\resetcounters{\relax} % don't globally change the section number
-\line{\hfil
-\tightboxit{\hbox{\vbox to 11cm{\leftskip=1cm
-\referee\ninepoint\hsize=8.5cm\rightskip=1cm
-\centerline{{\twelvepoint\bf Referee Report}}
-\bigskip
-\memoitem{DATE:} 1 April 2001
-\memoitem{TITLE:} \TeXsis\ -- \TeX\ Macros for Physicists
-\memoitem{AUTHORS:} E.~Myers and F.E.~Paige
-\memoitem{MANUSCRIPT:} LP-3105
-\text
-This is pretty good, but it's too long
-for Physical Review Letters.
-\vfill}}}
-\hfil}
-\endgroup
-\caption{Sample Referee Report}
-\endfigure
-
-
- There are also some additional commands for the referee
-report format:
-\description{~authors\qquad}\clump
-%
-\itm{\cs{title}}
-The title of the paper being reviewed should follow this on the
-same line. This is similar to |\Subj| in the memo format.
-%
-\itm{\cs{author}}
-Prints ``{\twelvess AUTHOR:}'' and the name that follows on the
-same line.
-%
-\itm{\cs{authors}}
-Same as \cs{author} for a paper with more than one author.
-%
-\itm{\CS{MSref}}
-Prints ``{\twelvess MANUSCRIPT:}'' and the manuscript reference number
-which follows.
-\enddescription
-
- The text of the report should begin with \cs{text} or
-\cs{body}, just as for a memo, and the whole document should end
-with |\endmemo| or \cs{bye}. An example of the referee report
-format is given by the following:
-\TeXexample
-\referee
-\date 1 April 1999
-\title \TeXsis\ -- \TeX\ Macros for Physicists
-\authors E.~Myers and F.E.~Paige
-\MSref LP-3105
-\text
-This is pretty good, but it's too long
-for Physical Review Letters.
-\bye
-|endTeXexample
-This produces a report which looks something like \Fig{Referee}
-
-
-
-%======================================================================*
-\subsection{Form Letters \label{sect.form}}
-
- The \CS{formLetters} layout makes it simple to send
-identical or similar letters to a list of people.
-\index{form letters}\index{letters|see{form letters}}
-\index{mail merge|see{form letters}}
-The body of the form letter is stored in one file using the standard
-\TeXsis\ letter format, while the control commands and a list of
-addresses are put in a second file. The body of the letter should begin
-with \cs{body} and end with \cs{endletter}, and it can contain an
-arbitrary number of control sequences defined for each recipient. It
-can make use of all the features of the letter format. For example,
-the letter body might contain the following
-
-\TeXexample
-|smalltt\body
-Dear \Whoever:
-
-\if P\Job
- I wish to apply for a postdoctoral position
-\else\if F\Job
- I wish to apply for a faculty position
-\else
- I wish to apply for a postdoctoral or faculty position
-\fi\fi
-at your institution. Enclosed you will find my curriculum vitae,
-a list of publications, and ...
-
-\closing
-Sincerely yours,
-Joe Postdoc
-\Encl
-Publication list
-Curriculum vita
-\endletter % don't say \bye here!
-|endTeXexample
-This example addresses the letter to |\Whoever|, and it uses the
-first text if |\Job| is |P|, the second if |\Job| is |F|, and the
-third otherwise. Thus form letters are very flexible.
-
- The mailing list file initializes the form letter macros and
-contains the list of addresses. \TeXsis\ should be run on this file, not
-on the file containing the body of the letter! For the example above it
-would have the form:
-\TeXexample|smalltt
-\texsis
-\formLetters{\letterhead{7734}}{letterbody.tex}
-
-\BL Prof.\ John Doe
- Department of Physics
- University of Nowhere
- Nowhere, OK 73019 USA
- \V\Whoever{Professor Doe}
- \V\Job{F}\EL
-
-\BL Dr.\ Buckaroo Banzai
- Physics Department
- The Banzai Institute
- Grovers Mill, NJ 08544
- \V\Whoever{Dr.\ Banzai}
- \V\Job{P}\EL
-...
-\endform
-\bye
-|endTeXexample
-\noindent
-
- The first argument of \cs{formLetters} is something like the usual
-\cs{letterhead} macro, with your phone number. Depending on your
-letterhead this might have multiple parameters or might even be several
-control sequences (all enclosed in a set of curly braces, of course).
-The second argument to \cs{formLetters} is the name of the file
-containing the body of the letter. The idea is that the stuff in the
-first argument gets put into the letter {\it before} the address, while
-the body of the letter (read from the file) is what goes after the
-address. Each letter begins with \CS{BL} ("Begin Letter") and has the
-name of the addressee on the same line and the address on the following
-lines. Any ``variables'' used in the letter can be defined using
-\cs{V}, which is just an abbreviation for \cs{gdef}. Because \cs{V} is
-simply \cs{gdef}, if you omit \cs{V} from an address entry, the value
-defined in a previous entry will be used. If necessary, variables can
-also be defined before the \CS{BL}. Each address in the mailing list is
-ended by \CS{EL} ("End Letter"). When the \CS{EL} is executed it reads
-in the file containing the text for the letter and actually produces the
-letter.
-
- Any address in the list can be ignored simply by replacing the
-\CS{BL} with \CS{IL} ("Ignore Letter"). In particular, this can be done
-by a simple global edit after each batch of letters is made, and the
-same file can then be used to send a second mailing by changing \CS{IL}
-back to \CS{BL} for a select subset of addresses.
-
-In earlier versions of \TeXsis\ the
-\cs{formLetters} command was called \cs{formletters}.
-The first is now prefered, though the second will also be accepted.
-Also, as of \TeXsis\ version 2.17 the form letter macros have actually
-been moved to the style file {\tt Formletr.txs}.
-This style file is \cs{autoload}'ed, so as long as you have that file
-on your system you should not notice a difference.
-
-
-\bigskip
-\nosechead{Mailing Labels}
-
- The same address file can be used to produce mailing labels
-instead of letters simply by replacing |\formLetters{...}{...}| with
-\CS{formLabels}. It is assumed that there are three columns of names and
-addresses to fit on standard photocopy machine mailing labels. With the
-default parameters nine labels each 1~in.\ high are printed per column
-with the top and bottom rows left blank. This can be changed, and the
-alignment of the labels can be adjusted, by setting appropriate values
-for the following dimensions:
-\TeXexample
-|smalltt
-\fullHsize=8.500in % hsize for label page
-\fullVsize=9.999in % vsize for label page
-\lblHsize=2.833in % width of standard label
-\lblVsize=1.000in % height of standard label
-\lblVoffset=0.100in % vertical starting position
-\lblHoffset=-0.500in % horizontal starting position
-|endTeXexample
-Choosing appropriate values may require some experimentation with your
-printer and labels. When the correct values are found, they can be
-set in the file |TXSsite.tex| before compiling the format (see Appendix~A).
-
- Please note that earlier versions of \TeXsis\ used
-\cs{formlabels} rather than \CS{formLabels}, but the latter is now
-prefered.
-
-\bigskip
-\nosechead{Printing Envelopes}
-
- Instead of printing mailing labels and then peeling these off to
-put them on envelopes, it is possible to print addresses from your
-mailing list directly onto envelopes, if your printer is capable of
-feeding envelopes. To do this, simply use \CS{formEnvelopes} in place
-of \CS{formLabels}. Then each address is simply fed into a
-\cs{MakeEnvelope} command.
-To set the return name and address you can define \cs{theSigature}
-and \CS{ReturnAddress}, as in this example:
-\TeXexample
-\texsis
-\def\theSignature{Joe Rockhead}
-\def\ReturnAddress{Department of Physics\n
- University of Delphi\n
- Oracle, UT 65432}
-\formEnvelopes
-|endTeXexample
-You will probably have to print the output in ``landscape'' mode,
-and you may want to adjust the size or placement of the envelopes,
-as described in Section~\use{sect.env}.
-
-%>>> EOF TXSletr.doc <<<
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/texsis/base/TXSmisc.doc b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/texsis/base/TXSmisc.doc
deleted file mode 100644
index 399be609773..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/texsis/base/TXSmisc.doc
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,298 +0,0 @@
-%% file: TXSmisc.doc - Miscellaneious Macros - TeXsis version 2.18
-%% @(#) $Id: TXSmisc.doc,v 18.2 2000/05/17 00:19:46 myers Exp $
-%======================================================================*
-% (C) Copyright 1992 by Eric Myers and Frank E. Paige
-% This file is a part of TeXsis. Distribution and/or modifications
-% are allowed under the terms of the LaTeX Project Public License (LPPL).
-% See the file COPYING or ftp://ftp.texsis.org/texsis/LPPL
-%======================================================================*
-\ifx\undefined\bs \texsis\input TXSdocM.doc\input Manual.aux\draft\fi
-
-\section{Miscellaneous Macros \label{sect.misc}}
-
-There are a number of useful macros in \TeXsis\ which don't fit into any
-of the topics covered in previous sections but which still deserve some
-discussion. We will simply lump them all together in this final
-section.
-
-\subsection{{\tt\string\draft} mode}
-
-Saying \CS{draft} turns on a number of features which are useful for
-making a draft copy of a document. The disclaimer ``{\tt Preliminary
-Draft}'' is added to the bottom of each page of the document, along with
-the page number and a time and date stamp. The page number will let you
-keep track of the page order even when using a document format which
-does not print page numbers (such as the \cs{nuclproc} or
-\cs{NorthHollandTwo} camera-ready formats). The date/time stamp
-can help you tell later drafts from earlier versions of the same
-document. \CS{draft} sets \cs{eqnotracetrue} so that equations
-are marked with their internal labels in the right margin next to
-the equation number (as described in Section~\use{sect.eqns}).
-Other kinds of errors, such as trying to use undefined labels for citations
-equations, are also marked in the right-hand margin. \CS{draft} also
-sets \cs{overfullrule}|=1em| so that over full \cs{hbox}es are marked
-with a black box.
-Without \CS{draft}, initializing \TeXsis\ with \cs{texsis} sets
-\cs{overfullrule}|=0pt| so that over-full hboxes don't
-get these kinds of marks (while with plain \TeX\ you do get these
-marks).
-
-\bigskip
-%======================================================================*
-\subsection{Ignoring blocks of text}
-
-Sometimes you'd really like to take out a whole paragraph or an even
-larger section of a document, but only temporarily, and you don't want
-to actually delete it from the manuscript file. Recalling that in
-\TeX\ everything on a line following the comment character ``{\tt\%}'' is
-discarded, you could put a {\tt\%} on each line to be ignored,
-but that could be a lot of work. Instead, you can use \CS{comment}.
-The syntax is:
-\TeXexample
-\comment/* anything in here is ignored */
-|endTeXexample
-\noindent
-Everything between the |/*| and the |*/| is completely ignored. By
-removing the |\comment/*| and the |*/| the text can easily be restored
-to its previous state. You can include several paragraphs of text in
-the material to be ignored, or even several pages, but with one
-important restriction: All the curly brackets |{| and |}| must match in
-the text to be ignored. If there is a |{| with no closing |}| in the
-commented text then \TeX\ will skip the |*/| while searching for the
-closing |}|!
-
-Along the same lines is \CS{Ignore}, which will ignore everything
-following it up to \cs{endIgnore} (with the same restrictions above
-about matching grouping brackets). The useful thing about these is that
-if an \cs{endIgnore} is encountered before an \CS{Ignore} then the
-\cs{endIgnore} is simply ignored. Is that too confusing? What this means
-is that if you have a document with a large block of conditional text
-that you may or may not want included you can choose to include the text
-by simply removing (or commenting out) the \CS{Ignore}. If the block of
-conditional text looks like
-\smallskip\goodbreak
-\def\1{\meta{unconditional text}}\def\2{\meta{more unconditional text}}
-\TeXexample
-|1
-\Ignore
-Having obtained these eigenvalues we would like to
-know their degeneracies. For a given $l$ the ...
-...
-It is relatively easy to show that the number of
-independent components of such a tensor is ${N+l \choose l}$.
-\endIgnore
-|2
-|endTeXexample
-\noindent
-then even if the block of text to be ignored spans many pages it can be
-restored simply by changing the ``|\Ignore|'' to ``|%\Ignore|.'' Then
-the |\Ignore| is itself ignored, and when \TeX\ reaches the |\endIgnore|
-this also does nothing. The effect is the same as if these two commands
-were completely removed from the manuscript file, but it is easily
-reversed.
-
-Why are there two ways to ignore blocks of text? \cs{comment} was
-created first, and some programmer-types may prefer it because of the
-similarity it bears to comments in the C programming language.
-\cs{Ignore} is newer and probably a little more useful, but \cs{comment}
-will remain for those who want to use it.
-
-%======================================================================*
-\subsection{Checkpoint/Restart \label{sect.chkpt}}
-
- The checkpoint/restart feature allows long documents to be printed in
-pieces. You can, for example, process and print the first chapter of a
-thesis (or a book) and then later do the same for following chapters.
-Saying \CS{checkpoint}|{NAME}| saves the settings of important counters
-like the current page number and the last equation number in a file
-called |NAME.chk|. Saying \CS{restart}|{NAME}| reads in this file and
-resets the counters to their previous values.
-\index{checkpoint}\index{restart}\index{restore|see{restart}}
-
- As an example consider a document with two major chapters.
-Using a Master File you would first process the first chapters
-with the following:
-\TeXexample
-\thesis
-\input chap1
-\checkpoint{chap1}
-\bye
-|endTeXexample
-With this printed you could resume at the next page number with
-the correct subsequent numbers for equations, figures and tables
-by saying:
-\TeXexample
-\thesis
-\restart{chap1}
-\input chap2
-\bye
-|endTeXexample
-\noindent
-Normally |\checkpoint| and |\restart| are silent,
-but you can say \CS{endstat} to see the values of the counters
-saved by |\checkpoint|. The output looks like this:
-\TeXexample
-% Last PAGE number IS 63.
-% Last CHAPTER number IS 0.
-% Last EQUATION number IS 47.
-% Last FIGURE number IS 1.
-% Last REFERENCE number IS 9.
-% Last SECTION number IS 13.
-% Last TABLE number IS 0.
-|endTeXexample
-
-Modern laser printer drivers or filter programs like |dvips|, |dvi2ps|,
-or QTeX have
-options that let you select which pages of a document are printed,
-or there is a useful program called |dviselect|, which can select
-certain pages out of a dvi file into a smaller dvi file. These offer
-other ways to selectively print only part of a document
-and still get the page and equation numbers correct.
-
-%======================================================================*
-\subsection{Other Goodies...}
-
-These macros do various useful things:
-\singlelinetrue % make label overhang
-\description{unobeyspaces}\clump %
-
-
-\itm{\CS{jtem}\arg{label}\arg{dimen}}
-Similar to plain \TeX's |\item|, but sets the label \arg{label} with a
-variable hanging indentation \arg{dimen}.
-
-\itm{\CS{leftpar}\arg{text}}
-Turns the \meta{text} into a paragraph with a ragged {\sl left} margin.
-
-\itm{\CS{pagecheck}\arg{dimen}}
-Checks the amount of space remaining on the current page, and if this is
-less then \meta{dimen} then skips to a new page.
-
-\itm{\CS{topspace}}
-Use this like \cs{vskip} to create a blank space to the top of a page
-(because any space inserted with \cs{vskip} is thrown out if it appears
-at the top of a page). Example: |\topspace 2.54cm|.
-
-\itm{\CS{unobeylines}}
-The opposite of \cs{obeylines}, so line endings are no longer respected.
-
-\itm{\CS{unobeyspaces}}
-The opposite of \cs{obeyspaces}, so that spaces in the manuscript file
-are not counted exactly.
-
-\enddescription
-
-%----------------------------------------%
-\pagecheck{3cm}
-
-\subsubsection{Underlines}
-
-These macros let you underline words or create a ``blank'' line:
-\index{underlines}
-
-\description{unobeyspaces}\clump %
-
-\itm{\CS{undertext}\arg{text}}
-Underlines the \meta{text}, as in this \undertext{example}. This is
-generally okay for words but not phrases or sentences.
-
-\itm{\CS{theBlank}\arg{length}}
-Creates an underline of the specified length where one can ``fill in the
-blank.'' For example, saying `` |Name: \theBlank{6cm}| produces:
-``\hbox{Name:~\theBlank{6cm}}''.
-
-\enddescription
-
-%----------------------------------------%
-\subsubsection{Boxes}
-
-These macros let you put boxes around text or equations, or
-something similar:
-\index{boxes}
-
-\description{unobeyspaces}\clump %
-
-\itm{\CS{tightbox}\arg{box}}
-Puts a ruled box around the argument (which must be a box), with no
-intervening space.
-Example: |\tightbox{\hbox{Boo}}| produces ``\tightbox{\hbox{Boo}}'',
-
-
-\itm{\CS{loosebox}\arg{box}}
-Puts a ``loose'' box around the \meta{box}, with about one \cs{jot} of
-space between the edge of the \meta{box} and the enclosing box. What you
-do with this resulting box is up to you. Rules are {\sl not\/} put
-around this outer box, but you can enclose it in a \CS{tightbox} to do
-so, as in |\tightbox{\loosebox{Boo}}|, which gives
-``\tightbox{\loosebox{Boo}}.'' If you want the contents of this box to
-match the baseline of the current line, lower it by a \cs{jot}, as in
-|\lower\jot\tightbox{\loosebox{Boo}}|, which gives
-``\lower\jot\tightbox{\loosebox{Boo}}''.
-
-
-\itm{\CS{spine}\arg{text}}
-Creates a label enclosed in a ruled box, suitable for the spine of a
-3-ring binder. The box will be at least 15~cm long, but will extend if
-the text requires more space. The default type size is 24~pt, but can
-be changed in the \meta{text}. If the label is longer than the width of
-a page then it should be printed in landscape mode. Instructions for
-installing the label in the spine of a binder are printed (but only once).
-
-\pagecheck{5\baselineskip}
-
-\itm{\CS{eqnbox}\arg{math-expr}}
-Puts a box around the mathematical expression \meta{math-expr}.
-This can be useful for highlighting an important result.
-You can use this in any kind of math
-mode, but usually you will want to use it in a displayed equation,
-like so:
-\TeXexample
-$$
-\eqnbox{E=mc^2}
-\EQN 47$$
-|endTeXexample
-which produces:
-$$
-\eqnbox{E=mc^2}
-\EQN 47$$
-In an in-line math expression it appears like so: \eqnbox{E=mc^2}.\n
-Be careful not to over-use this, or its utility is lost!
-
-\itm{\CS{eqnmark}}
-Putting a box around an equation can be to distracting, but it is nice
-to have a way to mark ``important'' results. This is an alternative
-to \CS{eqnbox}. Simply put \CS{eqnmark} at the beginning of the
-displayed equation, immediately after the |$$|, and it will put a marker
-defined by \CS{eqnmarker} at the left edge of the equation (the default
-is ``$\eqnmarker$'').
-For example, typing
-\TeXexample
-$$\eqnmark
-E=mc^2
-\EQN 47$$
-|endTeXexample
-\noindent
-produces
-$$\eqnmark
-E=mc^2
-\EQN 47$$
-Note that \CS{eqnmark} does not work with \cs{eqalignno} or \cs{EQNalign}
-(which is just as well, so that you can't overuse it).
-
-\enddescription
-
-%==================================================*
-
-\subsubsection{Read the Code}
-
-There are a number of other macros in \TeXsis\ which are not
-described in this manual, either because (a) we didn't have time
-to describe everything, or (b) they are works in progress.
-In either case, if you are familiar enough with \TeX\ to write
-some simple macros for yourself, then you are familar enough to
-read through the code and find other useful goodies, or learn some new
-tricks. Just keep in mind that anything not described in the manual
-may be subject to change in a future release. And let us know if you
-find any mistakes.
-
-%>>> EOF TXSmisc.doc <<<
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/texsis/base/TXSprns.doc b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/texsis/base/TXSprns.doc
deleted file mode 100644
index 03f734edea7..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/texsis/base/TXSprns.doc
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,95 +0,0 @@
-%% file: TXSprns.doc - Parentheses Sizing - TeXsis version 2.18
-%% @(#) $Id: TXSprns.doc,v 18.2 2000/05/17 00:19:46 myers Exp $
-%======================================================================*
-% (C) Copyright 1989, 1992 by Eric Myers and Frank E. Paige
-% This file is a part of TeXsis. Distribution and/or modifications
-% are allowed under the terms of the LaTeX Project Public License (LPPL).
-% See the file COPYING or ftp://ftp.texsis.org/texsis/LPPL
-%======================================================================*
-\ifx\undefined\meta \texsis\input TXSdocM.doc\draft\fi
-
-
-\subsection{Automatic Parentheses Sizing \label{sect.paren}}%
-Plain \TeX\ provides automatic adjustment of the sizes of parentheses
-and other delimiters when you use \cs{left} and \cs{right}, as in
-\index{parentheses!sizes}
-\example
-|$$|
-\cs{left}|(| \meta{math material } \cs{right}|)|
-|$$|
-\endexample
-\TeXsis\ provides similar automatic sizing of parentheses and square
-brackets in displayed equations without the need of typing \cs{left} and
-\cs{right}. You must still use \cs{left} and \cs{right} for all other
-delimiters, and they can be used for parentheses and square brackets if
-desired. This feature is turned on and off with \CS{autoparens} and
-\cs{offparens} respectively; the default, once you say \cs{texsis}, is
-\CS{autoparens}. Thus, for example,
-\TeXexample
-|smalltt\autoparens
- $$
-( a \over b )
- $$
-|endTeXexample
-produces
-\autoparens
- $$
-( a \over b )
- $$
-whereas
-\TeXexample
-|smalltt\offparens
- $$
-( a \over b )
- $$
-|endTeXexample
-\goodbreak\noindent
-produces
-\offparens
- $$
-( a \over b )
- $$
-\autoparens
-which is not what one normally desires.
-
- The automatic sizing of parentheses works by making |)|, |(|, |]|,
-and |[| active characters in displayed equations and defining them to be
-macros which use \cs{left} and \cs{right} to size the parentheses. While
-this normally works properly and simplifies the typing of equations, it
-will fail if the \cs{left} and \cs{right} operators are not properly
-balanced, such as when a long equation is split between two or more
-lines with \cs{eqalign} or \cs{EQNalign}. Almost all such problems can be
-solved by using the control sequences \cs{lparen}, \cs{rparen}, \cs{lbrack},
-and \cs{rbrack}, which are taken from Plain \TeX\ and which give just the
-standard parenthesis and bracket characters. For example,
-$$
-\EQNalign{
-F &= \Biggl\lbrack (a \over b) + (c \over d) \cr
-&\qquad + (e \over f) + (g \over h) \Biggr\rbrack \cr}
-$$
-can be produced with
-\TeXexample
-$$
-\EQNalign{
-F &= \Biggl\lbrack (a \over b) + (c \over d) \cr
-&\quad + (e \over f) + (g \over h) \Biggr\rbrack \cr}
-$$
-|endTeXexample
-\noindent
-Note that in this example the parentheses are balanced on one line and
-so can be sized automatically, while the brackets span two lines and so
-must be sized ``by hand.'' The \cs{vbig} macro described in the next section
-provides additional flexibility for sizing.
-
- If all else fails, you can use \cs{offparens} to turn off the
-automatic sizing of parentheses and put in \cs{left} and \cs{right} or
-explicit sizes yourself. In any case, you must put \cs{left} and
-\cs{right}, if needed, in in-line equations (math expressions which are
-not displayed equations), because. \CS{autoparens} only applies to
-displayed equations, not in-line math text.\Footnote\dag{Previous
-versions of \TeXsis\ used the control sequence \cs{onparens} to provide
-automatic parentheses sizing in {\it all} math-mode expressions. While
-you can still use this, we do not encourage it since it may cause
-problems with other uses of these characters.}
-
-%>>> EOF TXSprns.doc <<<
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/texsis/base/TXSrefs.doc b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/texsis/base/TXSrefs.doc
deleted file mode 100644
index 5d3f5c46449..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/texsis/base/TXSrefs.doc
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,474 +0,0 @@
-%% file: TXSrefs.doc - References and Citations - TeXsis version 2.18
-%% @(#) $Id: TXSrefs.doc,v 18.5 2000/05/17 00:19:46 myers Exp $
-%======================================================================*
-% (C) Copyright 1989, 1992, 1999 by Eric Myers and Frank E. Paige.
-% This file is a part of TeXsis. Distribution and/or modifications
-% are allowed under the terms of the LaTeX Project Public License (LPPL).
-% See the file COPYING or ftp://ftp.texsis.org/texsis/LPPL
-%======================================================================*
-\ifx\undefined\meta\texsis\input TXSdocM.doc\input Manual.aux\draft\fi
-
-
-\section{References and Citations \label{sect.refs}}
-
- \TeXsis\ includes instructions for making citations to the
-literature in the text of a document.
-References are processed in the standard format used by many American
-physics journals: they are automatically assigned consecutive numbers
-as they appear in the text and are listed in numerical order at the
-end of the document.
-In the text a citation appears as a superscript number corresponding
-to the reference cited, though other methods of citation are possible
-(see Section~\use{sect.cite}).
-When each reference is defined it is given a \idx{label}, which is
-associated with the number assigned to the reference.
-Subsequent citations to the same reference are made using this label,
-so there is no need to know the particular number assigned to the
-reference. Indeed, the number may change as the document goes through
-editing and revision, \index{references}\index{citations|see{references}}
-but the references will still automatically be in the correct order.
-
-
-\subsection{Entering References}
-
- \TeXsis\ is flexible enough that the text of the references may be
-entered in two different ways, either all references at once at the
-beginning of the document or each one individually at the point in the
-text where the work is first cited.
-In either case, \TeXsis\ stores the text of all of the references in
-numerical order until it is asked to print the list at the end of the
-document, by saying \cs{ListReferences}.
-
- To make a citation to a new reference and to enter the text of the
-reference, use the command \CS{reference}\arg{label}, where
-\meta{label} is the label to be used to refer to this reference.
-This is followed by the text of the reference, which is terminated by
-\cs{endreference}. An example is:
-\TeXexample
-To this end we will follow Feynman\reference{Feynman, 1949}
-R.P.~Feynman, Phys.\ Rev.\ \vol{76}, 749 (1949)
-\endreference
-in developing the propagator approach.
-|endTeXexample
-\noindent
-This would appear in the text of the document as,
-\example
-To this end we will follow Feynman\reference{Feynman, 1949}
-R.P.~Feynman, Phys.\ Rev.\ \vol{76}, 749 (1949)
-\endreference
-in developing the propagator approach.
-\endexample
-and the text of the reference would be saved until the list of
-references is printed at the end of the document.
-If you look at the end of this manual you will see it.
-
- There are several things to take note of in the example above. Most
-importantly, there is no space between the word in the text where the
-citation is made ("Feynman")\index{Feynman, Richard P.}
-and the \CS{reference}. This is so the
-superscript reference number will appear in the text right after the
-word to which the citation is attached, with no intervening space. Note
-also in the reference text the tie (|~|) between the initials and the
-name, the control spaces (\hbox{\tt\bs\ }) after the abbreviations, and
-the use of the \CS{vol} macro for the volume number;
-\CS{vol}\arg{number} prints the volume \meta{number} with an underscore
-below it.
-(This is easier to read than boldfaced volume numbers on small laser
-printers, but if you prefer something else you can simply redefine the
-\CS{vol} macro).
-Similarly, \CS{booktitle}\arg{title} will print the title of a book,
-in slanted type.
-Finally, note that there is no punctuation at the end of the reference
-text.
-This is because \TeXsis\ automatically supplies the appropriate
-punctuation when it prints the list of references.
-Normally this will simply be a period (.), but it is possible to have
-multiple references assigned to the same reference number, in which
-case the references are separated by semi-colons, with the last
-reference terminated by a period.
-How to do this is described below.
-
- Since typing the text of a journal citation is somewhat complicated,
-the \CS{journal} macro was created to make things a little easier.
-The format is
-\example
-|\journal| \meta{journal name}|;|\meta{volume}|,|\meta{page number}%
-|(|\meta{year}|)|
-\endexample
-This constructs the journal citation for you, with periods automatically
-replaced by ``\hbox{\tt .\bs\char`\ }'' in abbreviations and the volume
-number underlined for you by |\vol|. It is important that the field
-separators (the semi-colon, the comma and the parentheses), all be
-present and in the right order or \TeX\ will look as far forward as it
-takes to find the next one it wants. There should be no extra spaces
-between the arguments.
-
-Besides making it a little easier to type a citation to a journal
-article, using \CS{journal} lets you switch from the American form of
-citation to the European form very easily. In the American form the
-page number follows the volume, followed by the year in parentheses. In
-the European form the year follows the volume number and the the page
-number comes after that. Normally \TeXsis\ uses the American form, but
-you can change to the European form simply by saying
-\example
-\CS{Eurostyletrue}
-\endexample
-The arguments to \CS{journal} are always in the American order,
-no matter how they are eventually printed.
-
-A number of abreviations which are commonly used in references
-and which are usually set in italics are defined as simple control
-words.
-Thus saying \CS{cf} produces ``\cf'', saying \CS{etal}
-produces ``\etal'', saying \CS{ie} produces ``\ie'', and
-saying \CS{ibid} produces ``\ibid''
-
-
-Sometimes you want to print the title of a journal article, and
-sometimes you don't. An easy way to control this is to enter the
-title using \CS{ArticleTitle}, as in\index{Schwinger, Julian}
-\TeXexample
-\reference{Schwinger, 1951}
-J.~Schwinger,
-\ArticleTitle{On Gauge Invariance and Vacuum Polarization}
-\journal Phys. Rev.;82,664(1951)
-\endreference
-|endTeXexample Then if you say \CS{ShowArticleTitletrue}, the title
-will be printed (in slanted type, with a trailing comma), but with
-\CS{ShowArticleTitlefalse} (the default)
-it will not.
-
-
-\bigskip
-
- To enter several references with the same reference number simply
-begin the next \CS{reference} immediately after the previous
-\cs{endreference}, and begin the labels of all but the first reference with
-an asterisk "|*|", as in the following example:
-\TeXexample
-The vacuum polarization term can be regularized
-by introducing a cut-off at high
-frequencies.\reference{Pauli and Villars, 1949}
-W.~Pauli and F.~Villars, \journal Rev. Mod. Phys.;21,434(1949)
-\endreference
-\reference{*Schwinger, 1948}
-J.~Schwinger, \journal Phys. Rev.;74,1439(1948)
-\endreference
-|endTeXexample
-This produces the single citation
-\index{Schwinger, Julian}\index{Villars, F.}\index{Pauli, W.}%
-\example
-The vacuum polarization term can be regularized
-by introducing a cut-off at high
-frequencies.\reference{Pauli and Villars, 1949}
-W.~Pauli and F.~Villars, \journal Rev. Mod. Phys.;21,434(1949)
-\endreference
-\reference{*Schwinger, 1948}
-J.~Schwinger, \journal Phys. Rev.;74,1439(1948)
-\endreference
-\endexample
-The "|*|"\index{*@{\tt *}'d citations}
-at the beginning of the second label tells \TeXsis\ not
-to assign a new reference number to this reference, but instead
-just to add it to the text of the previous one.
-Of course you
-could type the text of both references between one \cs{reference}
-and \cs{endreference}. An advantage to following the example
-above is that the second reference can be given a reference
-number of its own simply by deleting the "|*|" at the beginning of
-the label. Similarly, two references with different reference
-numbers can be lumped together into one citation by inserting a
-"|*|" in front of the label of the second reference. Another
-advantage to keeping the references separate is that it is easy
-to move references around, either within a document that is being
-revised or between documents. It is therefore recommended that
-each reference be entered separately, although this is obviously
-not required.
-
- Instead of putting the \cs{reference} \dots \cs{endreference} in
-the text it may be more convenient to type them all together,
-especially if they already
-appear that way in the manuscript. This can be
-done without producing any unwanted printed numbers by using
-\index{references!entering a list}
-\example\obeylines
-\CS{referencelist}
-|\reference{1}| {\it text 1...} |\endreference |
-|\reference{2}| {\it text 2...} |\endreference |
-|...|
-|\reference{last}| {\it last text...} |\endreference|
-\cs{endreferencelist}
-\endexample
-The \CS{referencelist} must appear at the beginning of the
-document, so that the reference labels are defined before they
-are used. This is best put into a separate file which is \cs{input}
-by the master file. Of course the list of references is not
-printed until the end of the document, when \cs{ListReferences} is
-called.
-
-\subsection{Citations to Defined References}
-
- All subsequent citations to a previously defined reference are made
-using its label.
-If a \CS{referencelist} is used, then \undertext{all} citations
-appearing in the text will be made in this way, since then the initial
-reference definitions print nothing.
-The construction \CS{cite}\arg{label} prints the reference number
-corresponding to the label as a superscript.
-For example,
-\TeXexample
-A good discussion of this is given by Doob\cite{Doob} in section~7.
-|endTeXexample produces
-\example
-A good discussion of this is given by Doob\cite{Doob}
-in section 7.
-\endexample
-since Michael Doob's\index{Doob, Michael} book \booktitle{A Gentle
-Introduction to \TeX} is in fact \Ref{Doob} of this document and has
-the label "|Doob|."
-If several \CS{cite}'s are given in succession then the corresponding
-numbers are printed separated by commas.
-Unlike \cs{reference}, which defines the reference numbers, \CS{cite}
-does not know if references are sequential, so it cannot replace a
-sequence of numbers by a range.
-To avoid a long sequence of reference numbers use instead
-\CS{citerange}\arg{first label}\arg{last label} to print the numbers
-corresponding to the first and last labels as a range.
-
- The construction \CS{Ref}\arg{label} produces ``Ref.~$nn$'' in the
-text, with $nn$ the number of the reference corresponding to the
-label. For example, the ``\Ref{Doob}'' in the previous paragraph was
-typed into the manuscript file as |\Ref{Doob}|. \CS{Ref} is simply
-shorthand
-for |Ref.~\use{Ref.|\<label>|}|, and you can change what is printed
-simply by changing the definition of \CS{Ref}. For example, if you said
-\TeXexample
-\def\Ref#1{reference~\use{Ref.#1}}
-|endTeXexample
-\noindent
-then |\Ref{Doob}| would produce ``reference~\use{Ref.Doob}'' instead.
-See Section~\use{sect.labels} for more on how to use \cs{use}.
-
-%==================================================*
-
-\subsection{Listing the References}
-
- After the text of the document is complete a printed list of the
-references can be obtained by saying
-\TeXexample
-\ListReferences
-|endTeXexample
-This prints the numbers at the left hand edge of the page with the
-text indented by \CS{refindent}, which is chosen so that the equation
-numbers line up, and it puts a \CS{refskip} (initially equal to a
-\cs{smallskip}) between references.
-The reference format can be changed by redefining the command
-\CS{refFormat}, which is executed just before the references are
-printed and which initially is simply \cs{relax}.
-For example, to have the reference list printed with a ragged right
-margin, with no vertical skip in between references, one could say
-\index{references!printing the list}
-\index{lists!of references}
-\TeXexample
-\def\refFormat{% formatting for the list of references
- \raggedright % ragged right margin
- \refindent=2cm % instead of ``natural'' value
- \let\refskip=\bigskip % more space between entries
- }
-\ListReferences % now do it
-|endTeXexample
-
-
-No heading is printed for the reference list --- you have to do this
-yourself in whatever format is appropriate.
-Often you will want to use \cs{nosechead} (or perhaps
-\cs{beginsection} from Plain \TeX), but sometime you may want
-to use \cs{chapter} or \cs{section} instead.
-The choice is up to you.
-
-When you have several references under the same number, the |*|'d
-references described earlier, they will each normally be printed
-begining on a new line.
-You can supress the extra line ends and run the reference text
-together by saying \CS{refbreaksfalse}.
-To go back to breaking lines between multiple citations you should say
-\CS{refbreakstrue}.
-
-Once the list of references has been printed, everything is reset so
-that you can start over collecting new references.
-This is useful if you want to print the references at the end of each
-chapter of a book, or at the end of each paper in a conference
-proceedings.
-
-
-
-%==================================================*
-\subsection{Citation Styles \label{sect.cite}}
-
-Superscript reference numbers are the simplest form of citation, and
-the default in \TeXsis, but there are also several other popular
-conventions for making citations.
-One common one is to display the reference number enclosed in squaqre
-brackets rather than as a subscript.
-Another is to display a ``citation key,'' such as the first author's
-last name and the year, either in brackets or parentheses.
-\TeXsis\ is flexible and allows you to use any of these citation
-styles.
-
-To cause the reference numbers to appear within brackets simply say
-\CS{CiteByNumber}.
-(To go back to superscript reference numbers say
-\CS{CiteBySuperscript}.)
-It would be nice if that is all you had to do to switch from one
-citation style to another, but there is one complication.
-When a citation appears at the end of a sentence it looks best if the
-punctuation comes before a superscript, but after a reference number
-in brackets.
-Getting this right is more than a mere macro can easily do, so if you
-switch from one style to the other you will have to make appropriate
-corrections to your document for citations that appear at the end of
-sentences.
-
-\Ignore % Duh?
-Both \CS{CiteBySuperscript} and \CS{CiteByNumber} list the references
-by number when you say \cs{ListReferences}.
-\endIgnore
-
-
-Another citation style which was more popular in journals many years
-ago is to cite the work in the text using a superscript number, but to
-put the text of the reference at the bottom of the page as a footnote
-rather than at the end of the paper or chapter as an ``endnote.''
-This is achieved by saying \CS{CiteByFootnote}.
-This can be useful for a draft of a paper even if you will eventually
-use a different citation style, because it makes it easier to check
-the reference text as you proofread the paper.
-By the same reasoning it's actually a nice citation style for
-scientific books and papers in general, because the reference text is
-right there.
-If the author thinks it is important enough to his/her argument to
-cite another work then it is probably imporant for the reader to see
-the reference text at that point.
-We hope that this citation style gets used more than it has of late,
-though with the increased use hypertext it probably won't. (Why
-bother to put the reference text on the same page as the citation when
-you can click on the reference number and jump right to the
-appropriate point in the list of references?\ifhtml\phantom{.}
- See Section~\use{sect.hypertext} for details.\fi)
-
-As you might expect, if you use \CS{CiteByFootnote} then no list of
-references is produced should you also say \cs{ListReferences}.
-After all, the text of the references has already appeared so there
-are actually no references to list.
-
-It is probably not a good idea to mix \CS{CiteByFootnote} and numbered
-footnotes using \cs{Nfootnote}, since they are completely separate
-and keep track of their footnote numbers independently.
-%% BUT THIS COULD BE FIXED, EH?
-
-
-
-
-
-
-\bigskip
-
-Earlier versions of \TeXsis\ had only two citation styles, and for
-backward compatibility they are still supported.
-Saying \CS{superrefsfalse} is the same as saying \CS{CiteByNumber},
-while \CS{superrefstrue} is the same as \CS{CiteBySuperscript}.
-The older forms are supported so that you can print old documents that
-use them, but you should avoid including them in new documents since
-they might disappear some day.
-
-
-%==================================================*
-\subsection{Using \BibTeX}
-
-\BibTeX\ is a system for managing and using bibliographic databases.
-If you find you are always citing the same sources again and again in
-your papers, or if you have access to a bibliographic database someone
-else has already compiled (or which you yourself have compiled), then
-\BibTeX\ can make it much easier for you to make your list of references.
-All you need to do is specify the name of the database files to be
-searched (there can be several), and use the \cs{cite} command to
-refer to a paper listed in the database.
-Papers in the databases are indexed by a ``citation key,'' and all you
-have to do is use that key as the label in the \cs{cite} command.
-The first time you run your document through \TeXsis\ these references
-will be undefined, but if you then run the \BibTeX\ program it will
-extract the proper references from the databases, so that they
-will be properly defined (and formatted) the next time you
-process your document.
-
-Some extra work is needed to get started using \BibTeX.
-First, since \BibTeX\ is a separate program, you need to get that
-program---it isn't included with \TeXsis.
-You can get the standard distribution of \BibTeX\ from CTAN, in the
-directory {\tt bibliography/bibtex}.
-If you are not familiar with how to build and install \TeX\ and
-related programs then you will need to get your system adminstrator or
-\TeX\ guru to install it for you.
-You also need to have the ``reference style'' file for \TeXsis.
-This file, called {\tt texsis.bst}, tells \BibTeX\ how to write out
-references in the proper \TeXsis\ format.
-This file now comes with the standard \TeXsis\ distribution, but if
-you don't have it you can easily get it from the \TeXsis\ ftp site, or
-from CTAN, in the directory {\tt texsis/bibtex}.
-
-
-Once \BibTeX\ and {\tt texsis.bst} are installed it is fairly easy to
-use them.
-First you have to add to your manuscript files a couple of
-instructions that tell \BibTeX\ which bibliography database files to
-use and how to format the references.
-To specify the database files, use \CS{ReferenceFiles}, as in
-\TeXexample
-\ReferenceFiles{unix,internet,mylist}
-|endTeXexample
-In this case, \BibTeX\ will search for the references in the
-files {\tt unix.bib}, {\tt internet.bib}, and {\tt mylist.bib}.
-(Examples of these files are also included in the {\tt texsis/bibtex}
-directory on the ftp servers.)
-Next, you tell \BibTeX\ to use a ``style'' for creating references in a
-form that \TeXsis\ can understand, with
-\TeXexample
-\ReferenceStyle{texsis}
-|endTeXexample
-This tells \BibTeX\ to use the {\tt texsis.bst} style file,
-but you must leave off the {\tt .bst} extension.
-
-Once you have invoked \CS{ReferenceFiles} and \CS{ReferenceStyle} you
-can cite your references using \cs{cite}, as usual.
-The ``label'' you use for \cs{cite} should be the ``citation key''
-used in the bibliography database.
-You can also use \CS{nocite} to create a citation entry without
-putting a citation mark (superscript number or number in brackets) in
-the output.
-Finally, to print the list of references, simply say
-\cs{ListReferences}, as usual.
-This just lists the references---it's up to you to provide any heading
-or extra space before the list.
-
-Once you have set up your document this way, the only additional thing
-you have to do is run the \BibTeX\ program.
-Before you do, run your manuscript file through \TeXsis\ once.
-It will complain about undefined references, but it will also produce
-a list of the papers you cited, in order, in the {\tt .aux} file.
-Then run \BibTeX, like so:
-\TeXexample
-bibtex myjob
-|endTeXexample
-This uses the information in the {\tt .aux} file and
-extracts the references, in the proper order and with the proper
-\TeXsis\ \cs{reference} commands, into the file {\tt myjob.bbl} (the
-extension means ``bibliography list'').
-Finally, run \TeXsis\ again.
-This time, since the {\tt .bbl} file exists, it is read in as a
-\cs{referencelist} when the \CS{ReferenceFiles} command is executed.
-Now all of your citations will be properly defined, with no
-complaints.
-Just remember to run the \BibTeX\ program again if you add or delete
-citations or change their order.
-
-%>>> EOF TXSrefs.tex <<<
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/texsis/base/TXSrevs.doc b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/texsis/base/TXSrevs.doc
deleted file mode 100644
index a894b34948f..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/texsis/base/TXSrevs.doc
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,484 +0,0 @@
-%% file: TXSrevs.doc - Revision List - TeXsis version 2.18
-%% @(#) $Id: TXSrevs.doc,v 18.4 2001/04/21 16:46:17 myers Exp $
-%======================================================================*
-% (C) Copyright 1989, 1992, 1999 by Eric Myers and Frank E. Paige
-% This file is a part of TeXsis. Distribution and/or modifications
-% are allowed under the terms of the LaTeX Project Public License (LPPL).
-% See the file COPYING or ftp://ftp.texsis.org/texsis/LPPL
-%======================================================================*
-\ifx\undefined\meta\texsis\input TXSdocM.doc\input Manual.aux\draft\fi
-
-\def\Sect#1{{\sl Sect\-ion~\use{sect.#1}:\ }} % for revision sections
-
-\appendix{B}{Revisions}
-
- This appendix lists the major changes in \TeXsis\ as new versions
-have come out. It is organized by sections of the manual and is
-intended as a guide for users familiar with the previous version. There
-are many smaller changes in addition to those listed here.
-
-\begingroup %------- normal indent on everything
-\let\aftersubsection=\relax
-
-%-----------------------------------------------------------------------*
-\subsection{Revisions for Version 2.18 \label{rev.2.18}}
-
-The most noticable change is that as of version 2.18 the distribution
-of \TeXsis\ is covered by the \LaTeX\ Project Public License (LPPL).
-\TeXsis\ has been an ``open source'' software project since it was
-started in 1988, but we finally found that we had to be more explicit
-about the licensing, to give proper assurances that it could indeed be
-distributed freely. After considering several options we found that
-the the LPPL suited the needs and the spirit of \TeXsis\ most closely.
-
- Please note that the LPPL only applies to the \TeXsis\ source code and
-code derived from it, but it does not apply to \TeXsis\ style files
-(or other files) which were written independently
-without using \TeXsis\ source code. We hope that the authors of style
-files will choose to follow our lead and license their works under the
-LPPL, but they are free to choose whatever license they deem
-appropriate.
-
-Two patches were released for \TeXsis~2.17 to fix minor problems,
-and these have been incorporated into the current release.
-
-The default installation directory has been changed
-to |/usr/local/texmf| in the |Makefile| to conform to the recommendations of the \TeX\
-Directory Structure (TDS). You can, of course, easily change this by
-editing the |Makefile| before you install \TeXsis. This change has
-not yet been made in the installation instructions.
-
-\bigskip
-
-\Sect{start}
-Some common \LaTeX\ opening instructions are now detected and a
-warning message given. Thus if you try to run a \LaTeX\ file through
-\TeXsis\ you'll be given a little more help in figuring out your mistake.
-
-\Sect{refs}
-Different citation styles are now available by different names,
-and new ones (\cs{CiteByFootnote}, \cs{CiteByAuthor},
-\cs{CiteByTag}) have been added.
-
-This section of the manual has been broken into separated into
-subsections to make it easier to read.
-Documentation was added for \cs{ArticleTitle} and for BibTeX.
-
-A bug in \cs{ListReferences} was fixed, and the formatting
-adjusted for the new citation styles. \cs{CiteByFootnote} is now
-correctly syncronized to the same counter used by \cs{NFootnote}.
-
-
-\Sect{sects}
-Documentation was added for setting \cs{ChapterTitle},
-\cs{SectionTitle}, and \cs{SubsectionTitle}.
-
-A rare problem that appears when there are a large number of floating
-insertions was fixed.
-
-\Sect{headline}
-The \cs{bottompagenumbers} macro just puts the page number at the
-bottom of the page, but doesn't surround it by dashes.
-The number produced by \cs{PageNumber} will now always appear in
-|\rm| type.
-
-
-\Sect{color}
-The \cs{ListColors} macro was added.
-
-An example is now given in the manual showing how to automatically
-have every displayed equation printed in color, using |\PushColor| and
-|\aftergroup\PopColor|.
-
-\Sect{form}
-The file |TXSform.tex| has been renamed |Formletr.txs|, making this
-less-used feature a style file rather than a part of the core \TeXsis\
-macros.
-
-\Sect{dcol}
-The bottom insertions code has been moved to the file |TXSdcol.tex| so
-that it can be used with Plain \TeX\ by inputing that file by itself.
-
-
-%-----------------------------------------------------------------------*
-\subsection{Revisions for Version 2.17 \label{rev.2.17}}
-
-Most of the changes are internal, and won't be noticed by most users.
-But there are also a few major useful additions, such as \BibTeX\ support.
-
-\Sect{fonts}
-One can now use \cs{scr} in subscripts and superscripts.
-
-\Sect{symb}
-Added symbols \CS{sun} and \CS{earth} for astronomical symbols
-\sun\ and \earth.
-
-\Sect{refs}
-Added support for \BibTeX.
-Reference counters and files are reset so that you can go on to
-collect more references (as for separate chapters in a book).
-Many internal improvements to the referencing macros.
-
-\Sect{labels}
-The format of the |.aux| file has changed, and now matches more
-closely the format used by \LaTeX.
-This allows it to be used with packages like \BibTeX.
-If you have problems with an old |.aux| file, just delete it.
-A new one will be created when you process the document again.
-
-\Sect{sects}
-First paragraph of a chapter, section or subsection is not indented.
-
-\Sect{fmts}
-Added {\tt color.txs} macros to change the colors of PostScript output.
-These macros should be backward compatible with {\tt colordvi.sty}.
-
-\Sect{letr}
-The letter writing macros can now print envelopes.
-The form letter macros have moved to a style file, {\tt Formletr.txs}
-
-\Sect{memo}
-Added \cs{faxmemo} and \cs{FAX}.
-
-\Sect{misc}
-Fixed \cs{undertext}. \cs{spine} has moved to a style file, {\tt
-spine.txs}, but it auto-loaded from it, so the user shouldn't notice
-the difference.
-
-
-%-----------------------------------------------------------------------*
-\subsection{Revisions for Version 2.16 \label{rev.2.16}}
-We created a single file |mtexsis.tex| which can be used for
-processing \TeXsis\ e-prints and other documents if you have not
-installed \TeXsis.
-
-\Sect{fonts}
-Added \cs{NFootnotes} to produce automatically numbered footnotes.
-
-\Sect{eqns}
-Added a number of useful symbols. Removed the raised |\zeta| and
-|\chi|, which caused trouble in some contexts.
-
-\Sect{refs}
-Improved the treatment of spacing for reference numbers and for
-multiple citations.
-
-\Sect{papers}
-Reorganized the documentation so that document formats, the title
-page, chapters and sections, running headlines, the table of contents,
-and the index are all described together here.
-
-\Sect{sects}
-Fixed spacing and hyphenation for long section titles.
-
-\Sect{sects}
-Changed default value of \cs{sectionskip} and \cs{subsectionskip},
-so they are not quite so big.
-
-\Sect{conts}
-The page numbers for full-page tables and figures were wrong in the
-table of contents; this has been corrected.
-
-\Sect{conts}
-\cs{Contentstrue} and \cs{Contentsfalse} turn on and off the table of
-contents. The old |\ContentsSwitchtrue| is obsolete but still works.
-
-\Sect{figures}
-Figures and tables can now be inserted at the bottom of a page
-with \cs{bottominsert} or \cs{heavyinsert}.
-
-\Sect{figures}
-\cs{ListFigureCaptions} allow you to print the figure captions at the
-end of a document.
-
-\Sect{figures}
-In the previous version the obsolete \cs{Tablebody} was moved to a style
-file called |Tablebody.txs|. The name of this file has been changed to
-|Tablebod.txs| so that it can be used on a DOS PC.
-
-\Sect{fmts}
-Added \cs{PhysRevManuscript} style for manuscripts to be submitted to
-the {\sl Physical Review}, and \cs{PhysRev} and
-\cs{PhysRevLett} styles emulating the appearance of those journals.
-These are in the style files |PhysRev.txs|.
-Revised the |\IEEE| and |\WorldScientific| styles to follow those
-formats more closely. Moved twin page output to a style file.
-
-\Sect{fmts}
-Changed the method of loading site and style files so that they work
-even with OZ\TeX\ on a Macintosh.
-
-\Sect{dcol}
-Extensively revised the double column macros. They now support
-insertion of figures at the bottom of the page or of a column, allow
-figures to flow from one column to the next, and allow footnotes. The
-new version is backwards compatible except for the names of the
-headline and footline offsets, and can also be used by itself with Plain
-TeX.
-
-%-----------------------------------------------------------------------*
-\subsection{Revisions for Version 2.15 \label{rev.2.15}}%
-An index has been added to the manual, using the index making macros
-of |index.tex| and the MakeIndex program. We have included |index.tex|
-in the standard distribution of \TeXsis, but the only documentation at
-present is that contained in the source file.
-
-\Sect{intro}
-Added a separate file called |Example.tex| which contains a short
-example physics paper which uses the \TeXsis\ macros.
-
-\Sect{fonts}
-Support added for \cs{scr} using Ralph Smith's Formal Script fonts,
-assuming that they are available.
-
-\Sect{fonts}
-Added \cs{Footnote} to act like \cs{footnote} but with the text
-of the footnote singlespaced and in 10\pt\ type. (The font
-can be changed by changing \cs{FootFont}.)
-
-\Sect{refs}
-Modified \cs{reference}, \cs{cite}, etc., to insert extra space after
-a reference following the end of a sentence.
-
-\Sect{sects}
-Added \cs{pagecheck} to \cs{section} and \cs{subsection}, etc. These
-macros skip to to a new page if less than \cs{sectionminspace} space
-is left on the page. The initial setting for \cs{sectionminspace} is
-|0.25\vsize|. Also made the skips before the titles of sections and
-subsections variables \cs{sectionskip} and \cs{subsectionskip} in
-place of the previous fixed values.
-
-\Sect{fmts}
-The definition of \cs{thesis} has been moved to the style file
-|thesis.txs| so that it is easier to make local changes.
-The \cs{thesis} command automatically loads from this file.
-
-\Sect{fmts}
-Added the style file |PhysRev.txs| containing a definition of
-\cs{PhysRev} for a Physical Review format. A page proof layout
-should be available in the future.
-
-\Sect{figures}
-Added |epsf.tex| to the standard \TeXsis\ distribution and included
-documentation for \cs{epsfbox} and related macros.
-
-\Sect{figures}
-The macros for making lists of figures and tables have been improved
-(along the lines of the new table of contents macros).
-
-\Sect{letr}
-Modified \cs{formletters} to have a complete \cs{letterhead} macro or
-even more complicated things as one of the arguments, rather than just
-the phone number. This allows you to create more complicated
-letterheads. Note also that the order of arguments is now reversed from
-what it was previously! The first argument is the \cs{letterhead} stuff
-(it gets done {\sl before} the address) and the second argument is the
-name of the text file (it controls what is printed {\sl after} the
-address.
-
-\Sect{dcol}
-Introduced \cs{longequation} and \cs{endlongequation} for equations
-which span both columns. The definitions of these can vary from style
-to style, so they may or may not include a \cs{leftcolrule} and
-\cs{rightcolrule}.
-
-\Sect{misc}
-Added this section to the manual to explain miscellaneous useful macros
-which don't fit anywhere else.
-
-\Sect{misc}
-Added \cs{Ignore} and |\endIgnore| to ignore large blocks of text.
-This is slightly more clever than |\comment|, which remains available.
-
-
-
-%-----------------------------------------------------------------------*
-\subsection{Revisions for Version 2.14 \label{rev.2.14}}
-\smallskip
-\Sect{fonts}
-\cs{TrueDoubleSpacing} generates a document with 2 times the normal
-spacing, in contrast to \cs{doublespaced}, which gives 1.5 times the
-normal spacing.
-
-\Sect{eqns}
-Fixed a bug in \cs{bordermatrix}.
-
-\Sect{refs}
-An error which occurred if \cs{endreference} was followed by
-additional text on the same line has been fixed.
-
-\Sect{refs}
-Extra space is now inserted after a reference number which follows a
-period.
-
-\Sect{refs}
-\cs{refrange} can now be used with \cs{reference} or \cs{cite}; the
-correct numbers and ranges separated by commas are printed.
-
-\Sect{envmt}
-The internal spacing mechanism for environments has been modified to
-work with arbitrary \cs{baselineskip} and \cs{parskip} values. Some minor
-changes have been made to the center and flush environments.
-
-\Sect{envmt}
-The \cs{Listing} environment has been modified so that the characters
-|{} % & () $ #| and~{\tt \VT} are just ordinary printable characters and
-so that |\\| gives a printed |\|.
-
-\Sect{envmt}
-|\@startenv| and |\@endenv| to begin and end environments have been
-replaced with \cs{begEnv} and \cs{endEnv}, which are accessible to the
-user because the do not have |@| in their names.
-
-\Sect{ruled}
-The \cs{ruledtable} macros can now use \cs{tabskip} glue to produce a
-table of arbitrary width. Spacing of the tables has been improved and
-made more robust.
-
-\Sect{sects}
-|\addsectioncont| has been replaced with \cs{addTOC}, i.e., "add to
-Table Of Contents." The new macro is simpler and produces
-better-looking output.
-
-\Sect{sects}
-Spacing such as \cs{singlespaced} placed after the \cs{texsis}
-initialization now sets the spacing for the entire document; the
-explicit spacing commands in \cs{abstract}, etc., have been removed.
-
-\Sect{sects}
-A macro \cs{setSectionID} has been added to allow one to place a figure
-or table for one section in a different section if necessary and still
-get the correct number.
-
-\Sect{fmts}
-The \cs{NorthHolland} format now gives the more common single-column
-North-Holland/Elsevier format. \cs{NorthHollandTwo} produces the
-previous double-column oversized format. \cs{Manuscript} produces a
-preprint with true double spacing as requested by The Physical Review.
-
-\Sect{fmts}
-\cs{endtitle}, \cs{endauthor}, etc., can now be omitted from the titlepage
-material, since \cs{title}, \cs{author}, etc., now close the previous mode
-automatically.
-
-\Sect{letr}
-Letters and memos can now be ended with \cs{bye}.
-
-%----------------------------------------------------------------------*
-\pagecheck{0.2\vsize}
-\subsection{Revisions for Version 2.13 \label{rev.2.13}}%
-\smallskip
-
-\Sect{fonts}
-Italic fonts are now available in large sizes, e.g. for \cs{slides}. Math
-italic bold fonts have been added for titles.
-
-\Sect{eqns}
-By default parentheses and brackets are now ordinary characters except
-in math mode and so can be used, e.g., in file names. As a result,
-automatic sizing of parentheses works only in {\sl displayed\/} equations. You
-can restore the old behavior by saying |\onparens| at the beginning of
-the document.
-
-\Sect{refs}
-The text for references is now written with \cs{unexpandedwrite}. In
-practice this means that references can contain almost anything,
-including a \cs{Ref}.
-
-\Sect{refs}
-The \cs{journal} macro was added to make it easier to create standard
-citations to journal articles, and to be able to switch between the
-American and European styles.
-
-\Sect{refs}
-Superscript references are now in \cs{citestyle}, which is initially set
-to \cs{scriptstyle} but can be changed.
-
-\Sect{tbls}
-A way was created to save all figure and table insertions until the end
-of the document with \cs{FiguresLast}, and then print them with
-\cs{PrintFigures}, and similarly for tables.
-
-\Sect{fmts}
-The \cs{NorthHolland} document layout was added to produce camera-ready
-copy for Proceedings published by North-Holland/Elsevier. This is a
-double column format with titles left justified and eleven point type.
-
-Saying \cs{singlespaced} immediately after \cs{texsis} or its equivalent
-will now make the whole document single spaced.
-
-\Sect{dcol}
-The double column macros have been modified so that removing the
-\cs{setdoublecolumns} will produce a single column document.
-
-%----------------------------------------------------------------------*
-\subsection{Revisions for Version 2.12 \label{rev.2.12}}%
-\smallskip
-\Sect{start}
-A new command \cs{texsis} performs the initialization, and calling it more
-than once no longer causes an error. |\inittexsis| remains as a synonym.
-
-\Sect{fonts}
-\cs{ninepoint}, \cs{twentypoint}, and \cs{twentyfourpoint} commands have been
-added to select these sizes. The 9~pt.\ size is really too small for a
-standard laser printer, but it is useful if you must print IEEE format
-on $8.5\,{\rm in} \times 11\,{\rm in}$ paper. The large sizes are useful
-for slides and other special purposes.
-
-\Sect{tbls}
-The table and figure insertion macros has been extensively modified, and
-the syntax has been changed. |\topTable|, etc., have been replaced by
-|\table|, etc., which make the insertion and define the number for the
-tag. |\Tbl| and |\Fig| use the number. References to tables defined
-later in the paper are satisfied using the |.aux| file, so
-|\TOPTABLE|, etc., are no longer needed. The old names remain as
-synonyms but their use is discouraged.
-
-\Sect{tbls}
-\cs{ruledtable} and many associated macros have been added to make complex
-ruled tables, including those with entries spanning more than one
-column. |\Tablebody| is still available, but the new macros are much
-more flexible and should be used instead.
-
-\Sect{tbls}
-New macros have been added to list figures and tables.
-
-\Sect{fmts}
-New formats have been added. \cs{WorldScientific} and \cs{IEEEreduced} make
-conference proceedings in World Scientific format and in IEEE format at
-75\% of full size. \cs{referee} is based on the memo format and can be
-used for referee reports. \cs{slides} uses large type to make
-transparencies for overhead projectors and similar material.
-
-\Sect{fmts}
-An \cs{authors} macro for papers with multiple authors and facilities for
-putting footnotes on titles have been added.
-
-\Sect{fmts}
-\cs{bookpagenumbers} causes odd page numbers to be placed in the upper
-right corner and even ones in the upper left corner. Additional
-information on headlines is given.
-
-\Sect{letr}
-The form letter macros have been rewritten. The syntax is the same
-except that |\v| has been replaced by \cs{V} to avoid conflict with the
-Plain \TeX\ accent. Also, \cs{V} now also works with \cs{formlabels}.
-
-\Sect{letr}
-The new \cs{referee} format is described.
-
-\Sect{dcol}
-The double column format has been extended to handle floating
-insertions. \cs{topinsert} and \cs{pageinsert} produce insertions within a
-column, while \cs{widetopinsert} and \cs{widepageinsert} produce insertions
-across both columns.
-
-\Sect{labels}
-The tagging mechanism has been changed to add an |@| before and after
-the name. The practical effect is that using the name of a defined
-control sequence like |book| for a tag no longer produces an error.
-
-\endgroup % -- \everysubsection back to what it was
-
-
-%>>> EOF TXSrevs.doc <<<
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/texsis/base/TXSruled.doc b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/texsis/base/TXSruled.doc
deleted file mode 100644
index 826d042c07c..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/texsis/base/TXSruled.doc
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,604 +0,0 @@
-%% file: TXSruled.doc - Ruled Tables - TeXsis version 2.18
-%% @(#) $Id: TXSruled.doc,v 18.2 2000/05/17 00:19:46 myers Exp $
-%======================================================================*
-% (C) copyright 1994, 1999 by Eric Myers and Frank E. Paige.
-% This file is a part of TeXsis. Distribution and/or modifications
-% are allowed under the terms of the LaTeX Project Public License (LPPL).
-% See the file COPYING or ftp://ftp.texsis.org/texsis/LPPL
-%======================================================================*
-\ifx\undefined\bs \texsis\input TXSdocM.doc\draft\fi
-
-\noindent
-While \cs{halign} in Plain \TeX\ is convenient for making simple
-tables, it is still difficult to make tables with horizontal and
-vertical rules. Indeed, typesetting ruled tables in \TeX\ has often
-been likened to programming a computer in assembler language. Even
-\TeXbook\ acknowledges that ``people who know how to make ruled tables
-are generally known as \TeX\ Masters.''\reference{Masters}\relax
-D.E.~Knuth, {\sl The \TeX book} (Addison Wesley, 1986), page 245
-\endreference
-The macros described below take a great deal of the difficulty out of
-making ruled tables, so that anybody can become a
-\TeX\ Master, or at least a master of ruled tables.
-\index{ruled tables}\index{tables!ruled|see{ruled tables}}
-
-\def\VT{\char'174} % the vertical var character ``|'' is needed below
-
- The basic idea behind making a ruled table is similar to
-\cs{halign}, and the syntax is the same as the Princeton table macros
-known as |TABLES.TEX| by Ray Cowan\reference{Cowan} Ray F.~Cowan, {\sl
-Making Tables with Macros} (unpublished)
-\endreference\index{Cowan, Ray F.}
-(although the \TeXsis\ macros are quite different internally and run
-about 5 times faster). You begin the table material with \cs{ruledtable}
-and end it with \cs{endruledtable}. The table material is a list of items
-to appear in the rows and columns of the tables. Just as with \cs{halign},
-you can separate items in different columns with |&|\index{&@{\tt \&}}
-and end a row with
-\cs{cr}. The |&| \idx{alignment character}\index{&@{\tt \&}}
-separates columns without putting a
-vertical rule between the columns, while \cs{cr} ends a line and puts a
-thin horizontal rule under it. To get a vertical rule between columns
-replace the |&|\index{&@{\tt \&}}
- with a `{\tt\VT}' (the vertical line), and to end a line
-without a horizontal rule under it replace the \cs{cr} with \cs{crnorule}.
-One important thing to remember is to end the last line in the table
-with \cs{endruledtable} instead of \cs{cr}.
-
-\bigskip
-\pagecheck{2cm}
-
- As a first example, here is a simple ruled table,
-{\singlespaced
-\bigskip\tenpoint
-\ruledtable
-Year | World Population \cr
-8000 B.C. | ~~~5000000 \crnorule
-~~50 B.C. | ~200000000 \crnorule
-1650 A.D. | ~500000000 \crnorule
-1850 A.D. | 1000000000 \crnorule
-1945 A.D. | 2300000000 \crnorule
-1980 A.D. | 4400000000
-\endruledtable
-\smallskip}
-\pagecheck{2cm}\noindent
-and here are the instructions that created it,
-\TeXexample
-|smalltt\ruledtable
-Year |VT World Population \cr
-8000 B.C. |VT ~~~5000000 \crnorule
-~~50 B.C. |VT ~200000000 \crnorule
-1650 A.D. |VT ~500000000 \crnorule
-1850 A.D. |VT 1000000000 \crnorule
-1945 A.D. |VT 2300000000 \crnorule
-1980 A.D. |VT 4400000000
-\endruledtable
-|endTeXexample
-This example also appears in \TeXbook, on page~246, where it is typeset using
-|\halign|. Compare how the two are constructed
-and see which way you think is easier.
-
- By default each item in the table is centered in its column. Inside
-a table the tie character ``|~|''\index{~@{\tt\char'176}} takes up the space
-of exactly one digit (it is the same as saying
-|\phantom{0}|),\index{phantom@{\tt\bs phantom\lb 0\rb}} and this has been
-used to line up the digits of the entries in both columns. It is also
-possible to change the definition of the \cs{TableItem} macro so that each
-entry in each column is left or right justified. This is described a
-little bit later.
-
- Something to note about this example table is that the outer
-rules are thicker than the others. You can also get a thick
-vertical rule between columns by using ``{\tt\bs\VT}'' in place of
-``{\tt\VT}'', and you can get a thick horizontal rule below a row by
-replacing the \cs{cr} with \cs{crthick}. The widths of thick and
-thin rules are controlled by the dimensions \cs{thicksize} and
-\cs{thinsize}. If you don't want thick rules at all simply say
-|\thicksize=\thinsize|, which makes the thick rules as thin
-as the thin rules.
-
- Some synonyms: \cs{CR} is the same as \cs{crthick}, \cs{nr} is the
-same as \cs{crnorule}, and \cs{crrule} is the same as \cs{cr} (actually
-it's the other way around). \cs{tab} is the same as |&|\index{&@{\tt \&}}
---- it separates columns without a vertical rule. \cs{vb} is the same as
-{\tt\VT}, it separates columns with a thin vertical bar, while
-\cs{Vb} is the same as {\tt\bs\VT} and separates the columns with a
-thick vertical bar. You can also use \cs{dbl} to separate columns
-with a double vertical rule.
-
- As in Plain \TeX\ you can use \cs{span} in place of
-|&|\index{&@{\tt \&}} (or the other column separators) to join two
-columns together into one, and you can use \cs{omit} as the very first
-token in a column to tell it to omit the fancy column layout (the
-centering or other spacing).
-You can also use \cs{multispan} to \cs{span} and \cs{omit} several
-columns, just as in an \cs{halign}.
-The only difference is that the number of columns you tell it to
-\cs{multispan} is the number of columns of the table it spans --- in a
-ruled table constructed with \cs{halign} you would count the columns
-{\sl and} any vertical rules (because the rules are also columns of
-the \cs{halign}).
-
-
-
-\table{example-II}
-\caption{Another example of a ruled table.}
-\intablelist{Example of a ruled table --- AT\&T Common Stock.}
-\singlespaced
-\tenpoint
-\ruledtable
-\multispan3\hfil AT\&T Common Stock \hfil\CR
- Year \dbl Price | Dividend \cr
- 1971 \dbl 41-54 | \$2.60 \cr
- ~~~2 \dbl 41-54 | \$2.70 \cr
- ~~~3 \dbl 46-55 | \$2.87 \cr
- ~~~4 \dbl 40-53 | \$3.24 \cr
- ~~~5 \dbl 45-52 | \$3.40 \cr
- ~~~6 \dbl 51-59 | ~~.95
-\endruledtable
-\endtable
-
- \Tbl{example-II} is another sample table, again taken
-{from} \TeXbook. Something important to notice is that the last
-ruled table example didn't have a table number or a caption,
-while this one does. That's because the last example was created
-using just \cs{ruledtable}, while this example is inside of
-\cs{table}. The point is that \cs{table} and \cs{ruledtable} do
-separate things and can be used either separately or together;
-\cs{table} creates the space for the table and gives it a caption
-and a number, while \cs{ruledtable} actually constructs the body of
-the ruled table. The instructions that created \Tbl{example-II}
-are:
-\smallskip\goodbreak
-\TeXexample
-|smalltt\table{example-II}
-\caption{Another example of a ruled table.}
-\singlespaced
-\ruledtable
-\multispan3\hfil AT\&T Common Stock \hfil\CR
-Year \dbl Price |VT Dividend \cr
-1971 \dbl 41-54 |VT \$2.60 \cr
-~~~2 \dbl 41-54 |VT \$2.70 \cr
-~~~3 \dbl 46-55 |VT \$2.87 \cr
-~~~4 \dbl 40-53 |VT \$3.24 \cr
-~~~5 \dbl 45-52 |VT \$3.40 \cr
-~~~6 \dbl 51-59 |VT ~~.95
-\endruledtable
-\endtable
-|endTeXexample
-\bigskip\goodbreak
-
-\table{SiHCl}
-\caption{Parameters used in the MS-X$\alpha$ calculations for
- the chlorosilane molecules, H$_{\rm x}$SiCl$_{\rm 4-x}$;
- x=0--4.}
-\intablelist{Example of a ruled table --- Parameters used in the
- MS-X$\alpha$ calculations for the chlorosilane molecules,
- H$_{\rm x}$SiCl$_{\rm 4-x}$; x=0--4.}
-\singlespaced
-\tenpoint
-\ruledtable
-\vctr{Molecule} | \vctr{Region} | Radius |
- \vctr{$\alpha _{\rm HF}$}|\multispan{2} $l_{\rm max}$ \crnorule
-\cskip | \cskip | \cskip |\cskip| \crule | \crule \crpart
- | | (au) | | initial state | final state \CR
-
-SiCl$_4$ | outersphere | 6.21 | 0.7238 | 4 | 7\crnorule
- | Si | 2.20 | 0.7275 | 2 | 3\crnorule
- | Cl | 2.40 | 0.7233 | 2 | 3\cr
-
-SiHCl$_3$ | outersphere | 6.21 | 0.7260 | 4 | 7\crnorule
- | Si | 2.16 | 0.7275 | 2 | 3\crnorule
- | Cl | 2.40 | 0.7233 | 2 | 3\crnorule
- | H | 1.20 | 0.7772 | 1 | 2\cr
-
-SiH$_2$Cl$_2$ | outersphere | 6.25 | 0.7295 | 4 | 7\crnorule
- | Si | 2.20 | 0.7275 | 2 | 3\crnorule
- | Cl | 2.40 | 0.7233 | 2 | 3\crnorule
- | H | 1.20 | 0.7772 | 1 | 2\cr
-
-SiH$_3$Cl | outersphere | 6.30 | 0.7360 | 4 | 7\crnorule
- | Si | 2.20 | 0.7275 | 2 | 3\crnorule
- | Cl | 2.40 | 0.7233 | 2 | 3\cr
-
-SiH$_4$ | outersphere | 4.10 | 0.7524 | 4 | 7 \crnorule
- | Si | 2.04 | 0.7275 | 2 | 3 \crnorule
- | H | 1.20 | 0.7772 | 1 | 2
-\endruledtable
-\bigskip\bigskip
-\endtable
-
-Sometimes it is desirable to have rules across only some of the columns
-of a table. In this case put \cs{crule} in the columns that are to have
-rules, \cs{cskip} in the columns where no rules are desired, and
-end the line with \cs{crpart}, which signals that the line contains a
-partial rule. The column headings in \Tbl{SiHCl} are an example of
-partial rules in a table.
-That table was created with the commands,\reference{Bozek, 1991}
-J.D.~Bozek, Ph.D. thesis (unpublished), Department of Chemistry,
-University of Western Ontario, London, Ontario CANADA
-\endreference\relax
-\TeXexample
-|smalltt\table{SiHCl}
-\caption{...}
-\singlespaced\tenpoint
-\ruledtable
-\vctr{Molecule} |VT \vctr{Region} |VT Radius |VT
- \vctr{$\alpha _{\rm HF}$}|VT\multispan{2} $l_{\rm max}$
-\crnorule
-\cskip |VT \cskip |VT \cskip |VT\cskip|VT \crule |VT \crule \crpart
- |VT |VT (au) |VT |VT initial state |VT final state \CR
-SiCl$_4$ |VT outersphere |VT 6.21 |VT 0.7238 |VT 4 |VT 7 \crnorule
- |VT Si |VT 2.20 |VT 0.7275 |VT 2 |VT 3 \crnorule
- |VT Cl |VT 2.40 |VT 0.7233 |VT 2 |VT 3 ...
-...
-\endruledtable
-\endtable
-|endTeXexample
-\bigskip\goodbreak
-
-
- Ruled tables are normally centered on the page, but you can turn
-off the centering with \cs{noncenteredtables}.
-Then the table becomes just another piece to add to a horizontal list.
-One thing this lets you do is have two tables side by side on the
-page, like so:
-\nobreak
-\noncenteredtables\index{ruled tables!centered}
-\bigskip
-\line{\tenpoint\ruledtable
-Item ABC | Item DEF \cr
-Item GHI | Item JKL \endruledtable
-\hfil
-\ruledtable
-Data 111 | Data 222 \cr
-Data 333 | Data 444 \cr
-Data 555 | Data 666 \endruledtable}
-\bigskip
-\pagecheck{5\baselineskip}
-\noindent
-This pair of tables was produced by saying:
-\TeXexample
-|smalltt\noncenteredtables
-\medskip
-\line{\ruledtable
-Item ABC |VT Item DEF \cr
-Item GHI |VT Item JKL \endruledtable
-\hfil
-\ruledtable
-Data 111 |VT Data 222 \cr
-Data 333 |VT Data 444 \cr
-Data 555 |VT Data 666 \endruledtable}
-\smallskip
-|endTeXexample
-\noindent Saying \cs{centeredtables} turns table centering back on.
-Tables are then centered across the page, and a table is then
-added to a {\sl vertical\/} list.
-\bigskip\goodbreak
-
- Usually \cs{ruledtable} makes tables as wide as their natural
-width, but it is possible to make them wider by setting the dimension
-\cs{tablewidth} to the width desired before saying \cs{ruledtable}. We can
-make the same table in \Tbl{example-II} but with the width set to
-10cm: \index{ruled tables!size}
-\bigskip
-\noncenteredtables
-\tablewidth=10cm
-\line{\tenpoint\hfil\vbox{\singlespaced
- \ruledtable
- \multispan3\hfill AT\&T Common Stock \hfill\CR
- Year \dbl Price | Dividend \cr
- 1971 \dbl 41-54 | \$2.60 \cr
- ~~~2 \dbl 41-54 | \$2.70 \cr
- ~~~3 \dbl 46-55 | \$2.87 \cr
- ~~~4 \dbl 40-53 | \$3.24 \cr
- ~~~5 \dbl 45-52 | \$3.40 \cr
- ~~~6 \dbl 51-59 | ~~.95\rlap*
- \endruledtable
- \hbox{* (first quarter only)}
-\vss}\hfil}
-\smallskip
-\noindent
-The careful reader will notice that the version of
-\Tbl{example-II} in \TeXbook\ had a footnote to the last entry,
-and we have added that here. To do so we had to put the footnote in an
-\cs{hbox} and stack it under the table, so we had to turn off table
-centering. The table is therefore a bit more complicated to make, but
-not much: \index{ruled tables!footnotes}
-\TeXexample
-|smalltt\noncenteredtables
-\tablewidth=10cm
-\line{\tenpoint\hfil\vbox{\singlespaced
- \ruledtable
- \multispan3\hfill AT\&T Common Stock \hfill\CR
- Year \dbl Price |VT Dividend \cr
- 1971 \dbl 41-54 |VT \$2.60 \cr
- ~~~2 \dbl 41-54 |VT \$2.70 \cr
- ~~~3 \dbl 46-55 |VT \$2.87 \cr
- ~~~4 \dbl 40-53 |VT \$3.24 \cr
- ~~~5 \dbl 45-52 |VT \$3.40 \cr
- ~~~6 \dbl 51-59 |VT ~~.95\rlap*
- \endruledtable
- \hbox{* (first quarter only)}
-\vss}\hfil}
-|endTeXexample
-\centeredtables % turn back on!
-\noindent
-If we had not wanted to add the footnote, then the table would have
-been typed the same way as \Tbl{example-II} except for setting
-the \cs{tablewidth}.
-
- Important note: \cs{tablewidth} is turned ``off'' after the
-table is made, so the next table will have its natural width unless
-you explicitly set \cs{tablewidth} again! \index{ruled tables!size}
-\bigskip\goodbreak
-
- \cs{ruledtable} normally inserts a \cs{quad} of space around each
-item. If you have a very wide table, especially one with many columns,
-you may wish to reduce this. \cs{TightTables} make this spacing a single
-space, the minimum acceptable. \cs{LooseTables} restores the default
-spacing. You can define this space to be something else by
-re-defining \cs{tablespace}, for example as \index{ruled tables!spacing}
-\TeXexample
-\def\tablespace{\ \ }
-|endTeXexample
-\noindent
-If the table is still too wide with \cs{TightTables}, you will probably
-have to reformat it or print it in landscape mode (tilted 90\degrees on
-the page).
-\bigskip\goodbreak
-
-
- The careful reader may also have noticed that in the
-examples in \Tbl{example-II} and \Tbl{SiHCl} we said
-\cs{singlespaced}. That's
-because the spacing of the rows of a table can be controlled just like
-the spacing of the text with \cs{singlespaced}, \cs{doublespaced},
-etc. \index{ruled tables!spacing}
-The space between the rows of a table is set by a strut called
-\cs{tstrut}, which holds the rows apart. Its default definition is
-\TeXexample
-\def\tstrut{\vrule height 3.1ex depth 1.2ex width 0pt}
-|endTeXexample
-\noindent
-You can change the spacing between rows by changing the definition of
-this strut. One of the things \cs{singlespaced} does is define the
-\cs{tstrut} to be 0.5ex higher and deeper than a parenthesis.
-\cs{doublespaced}, \cs{triplespaced}, and \cs{widenspacing} all increase the
-height and depth of the strut in proportion to the increase in the
-baseline spacing.
-
- If you put something in a table which is larger than the strut,
-then it will touch the rules above or below. You can fix this by
-inserting your own strut into that row. More simply, you can say
-\cs{bigitem}\arg{stuff}, and the ``stuff'' will be positioned correctly
-with a nice amount of space above and below. \index{ruled tables!spacing}
-\medskip
-
- You can also decide whether or not you want diagnostic messages
-printed when a table is created. Saying \cs{tableinfotrue} causes a
-message to be printed on your terminal every time a ruled table is
-created. The message tells you how many rows and columns were in the
-table. This is useful information, because it can tell you immediately
-if you made a mistake in the table or left out a row or column.
-\cs{tableinfotrue} is the default, but you can turn off these messages
-by saying
-\cs{tableinfofalse}. In any case, you will be warned if a row has a
-different number of columns from the previous one.
-\medskip
-
- The tables we have demonstrated so far all contain numbers, but
-sometimes it is desirable to have an entry in a table which is a
-paragraph of text. \index{ruled tables!text} For that purpose, you can
-use \cs{para}\arg{text}. The width of the paragraph is determined by
-the dimension \cs{parasize}, which defaults to 4 inches.
-\medskip
-
-Tables \use{Tb.tablemac;a} and \use{Tb.tablemac;b} summarize the most
-important commands for making ruled tables.
-
- Finally, we can discuss how you can change how each column of
-a table is constructed. The macros which build the table take
-each entry and pass it to a macro called \cs{TableItem}. The
-default definition of \cs{TableItem} is:
-\vskip 0pt\goodbreak
-\TeXexample
-|smalltt\def\TableItem#1{% % centers item in ruled table
- \hfil\tablespace % left glue
- #1\killspace % item, no space after
- \tablespace\hfil % right glue
- }%
-|endTeXexample
-
-
-%% TABLE A
-
-\bottomtable{tablemac;a}
-\caption{Basic table macros for use with {\tt\bs ruledtable}.}%
-\intablelist{Basic macros for {\tt\bs ruledtable}}%
-\tablewidth=\hsize
-\LeftJustifyTables
-\ruledtable
-\sl Macro name\relax
- | \sl Description \relax \crthick
-\tt\bs ruledtable\relax
- | \para{Starts a ruled table.}\cr
-\vtop{\noindent\hsize=1.6in\normalbaselines
- \tt\char124\quad \rm (vertical bar)\hfil\break
- or \tt\bs vb\hfil}\relax
- | \para{Separates one column from the next, with a
- a thin vertical rule between them.}\cr
-\tt\&\ \rm or\tt\ \bs tab \relax
- | \para{Separates one column from the next, but with
- no rule between them.}\cr
-\tt\bs cr\relax
- | \para{Ends the current row, and starts the next
- one. The completed row will be separated from
- the next with a thin horizontal rule.}\cr
-\vtop{\noindent\hsize=1.6in\normalbaselines
-\tt\bs crthick \hfil\break \rm or \tt\bs CR\hfil }\relax
- | \para{Similar to {\tt\bs cr}, but the rows will
- be separated with a thick horizontal rule.}\cr
-\vtop{\noindent\hsize=1.6in\normalbaselines
-\tt\bs crnorule \hfil\break \rm or \tt\bs nr\hfil }\relax
- | \para{Similar to {\tt\bs cr}, but the rows will
- not be separated by a rule.}\cr
-\tt\bs\char124 \relax
- | \para{Same as {\tt\char124}, but with a thick vertical rule.}\cr
-\tt\bs dbl
- | \para{Same as {\tt\char124}, but with two thin vertical rules.}\cr
-\tt\bs endruledtable\relax
- | \para{Ends the ruled table.}%
-\endruledtable
-\line{\hfil {\sl Continued...}}%
-\endtable
-
-%% TABLE B (FULL PAGE)
-
-\fulltable{tablemac;b}
-\caption{Additional macros for use with {\tt\bs ruledtable}.}
-\intablelist{Additional macros for {\tt\bs ruledtable}}
-\tablewidth=\hsize
-\LeftJustifyTables
-\line{{\sl Continued...}\hfil}
-\smallskip
-\ruledtable
-\sl Macro name\relax
- | \sl Description \relax \crthick
-\tt\bs multispan\lb{\it n}\rb\relax
- | \para{Makes the next entry span the next $n$
- columns, where $n$ is an integer, $n>0$.
- See {\tt\bs omit} below.} \cr
-\tt\bs omit \relax
- | \para{This \TeX\ primitive causes the normal
- template for its entry to be omitted, allowing
- the user to do something else with this entry.} \cr
-\tt\bs para\arg{text}\relax
- | \para{Formats {\sl text\/} into a neat little
- paragraph like this one. The width of the
- paragraph produced is determined by the dimension
- {\tt\bs parasize}. The default is 4 inches. } \cr
-\tt\bs parasize=\meta{dimen} \relax
- | \para{Sets the width of paragraphs for the {\tt\bs para}
- macro.} \cr
-\tt\bs TableItem\arg{stuff}\relax
- | \para{Used in the standard template, this
- macro centers its argument in the column. The
- user can redefine it for special effects.} \cr
-\tt\bs tablespace
- | \para{The spacing around each item for {\tt\bs TableItem}.}\cr
-\vtop{\noindent\hsize=1.4in\normalbaselines
-\tt\bs LooseTables \hfil\break
-\tt\bs TightTables\hfil}\relax
- | \para{Set {\tt\bs tablespace} to {\tt\bs quad} and {\tt\bs\ }
- respectively.\hfill\break\ }\cr
-\vtop{\noindent\hsize=1.6in\normalbaselines
-\tt\bs TrailingSpaces \hfil\break
-\tt\bs NoTrailingSpaces \hfil}\relax
- | \para{Use trailing spaces and glue items in table entries
- (default) or ignore them. See text.}\cr
-\tt\bs bigitem\arg{stuff}\relax
- | \para{Use this for something that would normally
- not fit in one line of a table to make the spacing
- between rows large enough for this item.} \cr
-\tt\bs vctr\arg{stuff}\relax
- | \para{Centers the item {\sl vertically\/} so that
- it can appear between two rows.}\cr
-\tt\bs centeredtables\relax
- | \para{Turns table centering on. Each table
- will be centered left-to-right on the page.
- This is the default.} \cr
-\tt\bs noncenteredtables\relax
- | \para{Turns table centering off. Each table
- is returned as an {\tt\bs hbox}, and it is up
- to the user to place it as desired.} \cr
-\vtop{\noindent\hsize=1.6in\normalbaselines
-\tt\bs tableinfotrue \hfil\break
-\tt\bs tableinfofalse\hfil}\relax
- | \para{Turns on or off the diagnostic message telling
- you how many rows and columns were found in the
- table. }\cr
-\tt\bs thicksize=\meta{dimen} \relax
- | \para{This dimension specifies the thickness
- of the thick rules in the table. The default
- size is 1.5 points.} \cr
-\tt\bs thinsize=\meta{dimen} \relax
- | \para{This dimension specifies the thickness
- of thin rules in the table. The default
- size is 0.8 points.} \cr
-\tt\bs tablewidth=\meta{dimen} \relax
- | \para{Specifies how wide to make the next
- table. If not specified, the table is made to
- its natural width. This value is reset
- following the construction of each table.}
-\endruledtable
-\vfill
-\endtable
-
-
-The \cs{hfil} glue on both sides of the argument causes the item to be
-centered in the column, while \cs{tablespace} (which defaults to \cs{quad})
-insures that there will be at least some amount of space between the
-item and the vertical rules on each side. Because of the way that
-\TeX\ handles macro arguments, if you type a table with spaces between
-the text and the next column separator, an extra \cs{space} will be
-inserted into the table. If you first say \cs{NoTrailingSpaces}, then
-\cs{killspace} in the above macro is defined to remove any trailing glue
-items. \cs{hfill} is redefined by the table macros so that if it is the
-last token in an entry, then that entry is properly left justified,
-but to insert any other trailing glue, you must say
-\example
-\meta{text}\meta{glue}|\null|
-\endexample
-\noindent
-The default is \cs{TrailingSpaces}, which does incorporate any trailing
-spaces into the table but which also treats any trailing glue items
-normally.
-
-
- You can change the definition of \cs{TableItem} to suit your own
-purpose. The simplest modification is to omit the \cs{hfil} on the left
-or right so that each entry is right or left justified. This is so
-commonly used that saying \cs{RightJustifyTables} or
-\cs{LeftJustifyTables} makes the appropriate change for you. Saying
-\cs{NoJustifyTables} restores \cs{TableItem} to its original centering
-function. \index{ruled tables!customization}
-
- Since \cs{TableItem} is used to create every column of the table, you
-cannot use it to modify a single column. To justify just one column
-you can simply put \cs{hfill} to the left or right of each item in the
-column, since \cs{hfill} is infinitely more stretchy than \cs{hfil}. (The
-behavior of glue items other than \cs{hfill} depends on whether
-\cs{NoTrailingSpaces} has been set.) With a little more work it is
-possible to design special or unusual tables by redefining the
-``preamble'' of the table. This is possible because \cs{ruledtable}
-uses \cs{halign} with a preamble called \cs{TablePreamble}. The default
-definition of \cs{TablePreamble} is:
-\TeXexample
-\def\TablePreamble{% % \ruledtable preamble
- \TableItem{####}% % the first item
- \plaintab\plaintab % && means repeat this
- \TableItem{####}% % the subsequent items
- \plaincr}% % end of preamble
-|endTeXexample
-\noindent
-The syntax for \cs{TablePreamble} is like an \cs{halign} preamble in Plain
-\TeX\, but with |&| replaced by \cs{plaintab}, \cs{cr} replaced by
-\cs{plaincr}, and |#| replaced by |####|. If you have read this far and
-want to try changing \cs{TablePreable} then you should read the source
-code and the comments that go with it in the file |TXSruled.tex.|
-
-As a final note we point out that it is also possible for you to create
-your own column separators with the macro \cs{nextcolumn}. This macro
-takes a single argument which is used to separate one column of the
-table from another. Thus for example, the \cs{dbl} macro for creating a
-double vertical rule between columns is defined as:
-\TeXexample
-\def\dbl{%
- \nextcolumn{\vrule width\thinsize
- \hskip\thinsize\vrule width\thinsize}}
-|endTeXexample
-\relax
-\index{ruled tables!customization}
-
-%>>> EOF TXSruled.doc <<<
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/texsis/base/TXSsects.doc b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/texsis/base/TXSsects.doc
deleted file mode 100644
index 34263d458f4..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/texsis/base/TXSsects.doc
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,899 +0,0 @@
-%% TXSsects.doc - Chapters and Sections - TeXsis version 2.18
-%% @(#) $Id: TXSsects.doc,v 18.3 2001/04/06 21:54:45 myers Exp $
-%======================================================================*
-% (C) Copyright 1989-1998 by Eric Myers and Frank E. Paige
-% This file is a part of TeXsis. Distribution and/or modifications
-% are allowed under the terms of the LaTeX Project Public License (LPPL).
-% See the file COPYING or ftp://ftp.texsis.org/texsis/LPPL
-%======================================================================*
-\ifx\undefined\bs \texsis\input TXSdocM.doc\draft\input Manual.aux\fi
-
-\section{Typesetting Complete Papers\label{sect.papers}}
-
-The commands described so far are useful for creating the body of a
-simple physics paper, but they are not enough to typeset a complete
-paper. A physics paper generally has a title, one or more authors and
-their addresses or professional affiliations, and perhaps an abstract.
-Longer documents may be divided into sections, or even chapters, and
-there might even be a table of contents or an index. This section
-describes the commands for creating the basic structural elements of a
-complete paper: the title material and divisions into chapters,
-sections, and subsections. It also includes a discussion of more
-advanced topics, such as how to create a table of contents or an index,
-and how to control the running headlines at the top of the page. Later,
-\Sect{fmts} discusses more specialized document layouts for conference
-proceedings or for papers submitted to specific journals, while
-\Sect{letr} describes the commands for producing letters, memos, referee
-reports, and similar specialized documents.
-
-It is often convenient to be able to typeset the same document in more
-than one format. Therefore, all complete papers in \TeXsis\ use the
-same general structure, and one can select the particular document
-format to be used by changing only one or two commands at the beginning
-of the manuscript file. The commands to typeset the title page and
-to break the paper up into sections are still the same, even if they
-behave slightly differently
-according to the particular format selected. For example, if you give
-the \cs{paper} command then the title page material will appear at the
-top of the first page, and the text of the paper will also begin on that
-page. If you simply change \cs{paper} to \cs{preprint} the title page
-material will appear on a page by itself, with a banner (defined by
-\cs{banner}) across the top of the page, and the text will begin on the
-next page. Using any of the other document formats described in
-\Sect{fmts} will cause the title page material to be formatted
-slightly differently.
-
-At this point an example may be more instructive than more discussion.
-Here is how a famous paper\reference{BCS} J.~Bardeen, L.~N.~Cooper, and
-J.~R.~Schrieffer,
-\journal Phys. Rev.;108,1175(1957)
-\endreference
-would have begun had it been typeset with \TeXsis:
-\TeXexample
-|smalltt\texsis
-\preprint
-\pubdate{July 8, 1957}
-\pubcode{hep-cats/yymmnnn}
-\titlepage
-\title
-Theory of Superconductivity
-\endtitle
-\author
-J.~Bardeen
-Department of Physics
-University of Illinois
-Urbana, Illinois 61801
-\endauthor
-\and
-\author
-L.~N.~Cooper
-Department of Physics and Astronomy
-The Ohio State University
-Columbus, OH 43210
-\endauthor
-\and
-\author
-J.~R.~Schrieffer
-Department of Theoretical Physics
-University of Birmingham
-Birmingham, England B15 2TT
-\endauthor
-\abstract
-A theory of superconductivity is presented, based on
-the fact that...
-
-\endabstract
-\toappear{Physical Review}
-\endtitlepage
-
-\section{Introduction}
-The main facts which a theory of superconductivity
-must explain are...
-|endTeXexample
-\noindent
-A more complete example paper is given in the file |Example.tex|, which
-is included in the standard distribution of \TeXsis.
-In the rest of this section each of the elements in these examples and
-several others related to the overall structure of a complete paper will be
-explained.
-
-
-%==================================================*
-\subsection{Types of Documents \label{sect.types}}
-
-A complete \TeXsis\ paper should start with the \cs{texsis} macro
-described in \Sect{start}. (While this is not required if you also use
-one of the macros listed below, it does serve to indicate unambiguously
-that the document is
-to be typeset with \TeXsis.) The \cs{texsis} macro can be followed by a
-command to specify whether the document should be typeset as a simple
-paper or conference proceeding, a preprint, a book, etc. This macro
-will provide sensible defaults for the layout, although additional
-commands can be given to override them. The following basic document
-types are included in \TeXsis:
-
-\description{XManuscript\quad}\clump
-%
-\itm{\CS{paper}}
-Produces a paper with the title and abstract at the top of the first
-page, such as for submission to a conference proceeding.
-The text begins on the first page, below the title and abstract.
-%
-\itm{\CS{preprint}}
-Produces a paper in a preprint format, with the title material by
-itself on the first page. A \cs{banner} is put across the top of the
-title page, and the text begins on the page following.
-%
-\itm{\CS{eprint}}
-Produces a paper in a format suitable for submission to the Los Alamos
-preprint archives (the ``e-print bulletin boards,'' such as hep-ph,
-hep-th, hep-lat, or qc-gr).
-%
-\itm{\CS{Manuscript}}
-Similar to \CS{preprint}, but with true double spacing for manuscripts
-submitted for publication in journals such as the {\sl Physical
-Review}, which require this.
-%
-\itm{\CS{book}}
-A book or other long document with a separate title page, running
-headlines, a table of contents, etc. Page numbers are printed in
-opposite corners on left and right handed pages.
-%
-\itm{\CS{thesis}}
-Similar to \CS{book}, this format is for typesetting a doctoral
-dissertation or similar document.
-It may be customized for your own university.
-%
-\enddescription
-
-After the command defining the type of document you can add optional
-commands to modify the default layout. For example, you might want to
-use
-\example
-|\texsis| \n
-|\paper| \n
-|\hsize=|\meta{dimen} \n
-|\vsize=|\meta{dimen} \n
-|\singlespaced|
-\endexample
-to produce a single-spaced conference proceeding of a specified
-size. Macros to create more specialized documents in some of the common
-formats used by physics journals and conferences are described in
-\Sect{fmts}. Since \TeXsis\ obviously cannot include all
-the possible formats, that section also contains some hints about how
-to modify a format to fit your needs.
-
-%==================================================*
-\subsection{The Title ``Page'' \label{sect.title}}
-
-A complete paper almost always starts with a title. Most probably it
-will also include the names of the authors, and often it will include
-an abstract. Sometimes the title, author's name(s) and abstract
-appear on a separate page, while sometimes they simply appear at the
-top of the first page of the paper. In any case we will refer to all
-this material together as the ``title page'' material.
-
-\TeXsis\ has a standardized method for entering the title page
-material, whether it will actually appear on a page by itself or not.
-You begin the title page material with \CS{titlepage} and end it with
-\CS{endtitlepage}.
-Between these two control sequences you can use any of the commands
-listed below to enter the various parts of the title page material.
-(An example appears at the beginning of this section).
-
-\description{Xendauthor}\clump\tolerance=1700
-%
-\itm{\CS{title}}
-Begins the title of the paper. All lines up to a following
-\cs{endtitle} are centered and printed in \cs{Tbf} type.
-Line endings in the input file {\sl are} respected, just as with
-\cs{obeylines}.
-%
-\itm{\CS{author}}
-Begins an entry for an author's name and address, which should
-appear on the lines that follow. Line endings in the input file
-{\it are} respected. The first line to follow is the author's
-name, which is printed centered in |\bf| type. All subsequent
-lines are centered in normal type. End with |\endauthor|.
-%
-\itm{\CS{and}}
-Prints the word "and," centered and with appropriate vertical
-separation. It can be used either between sets of |\author|
-\dots\ |\endauthor| or between multiple addresses for the same
-author.
-%
-\itm{\CS{authors}}
-An alternative to |\author| for papers with many authors. Here
-line endings are not respected; instead, the list of authors is
-divided into lines as evenly as possible, and each line is
-centered and printed in Roman type. End with \cs{endauthors}.
-%
-\itm{\CS{institution}\arg{symbol}\arg{address}} Prints the symbol and
-the institution address centered on a line. A |\medskip| is placed
-before the first address to separate the names and addresses.
-|\institution| should be placed after the author list but before
-|\endauthors| to work correctly.
-%
-\itm{\CS{abstract}}
-Begins the abstract. The word "ABSTRACT" is centered above the
-abstract. The left and right margins are brought in relative to
-the text of the paper. End with |\endabstract|.
-%
-\itm{\CS{pacs}\arg{codes}}
-Prints the PACS (Physics and Astronomy Classification Scheme) codes
-on the title page.
-%
-\itm{\CS{submitted}\arg{Journal}}
-Prints the phrase ``Submitted to {\sl Journal}'' centered on the page,
-with the name of the journal printed in |\sl| type.
-%
-\itm{\CS{toappear}\arg{Journal}}
-Similar to |\submitted|, this prints the phrase
-``To appear in {\sl Journal}'' on the title page,
-with the name of the journal printed in |\sl| type.
-%
-\itm{\CS{disclaimer}\arg{contract}}
-Prints a standard DOE disclaimer for contract number
-\meta{contract}, printed in 10~pt.\ type, as a footnote.
-%
-\enddescription
-
-The advantage to entering the title page material this way is that if
-you change the overall document format, either from \cs{paper} to
-\CS{preprint} or to one of the more specialized formats described in
-\Sect{fmts}, then the title page material will automatically be changed
-to match the document format selected.
-
-\bigskip
-
-The \cs{banner} macro is called in the \CS{preprint} document format to
-put the date, a preprint code number, and the name of your institution
-or organization at the top of the title page. The name of the
-institution can be changed by saying
-\example
-|\def\ORGANIZATION{|\meta{name}|}|
-\endexample
-and this change can be made permanent by putting it into the file
-|TXSsite.tex| when \TeXsis\ is being installed.
-\def\tmp{}\ifx\ORGANIZATION\tmp
-(When this manual was printed, the \CS{ORGANIZATION} macro was
-empty.)
-\else
-When this manual was printed, the \CS{ORGANIZATION} macro was:
-\example
-\ORGANIZATION
-\endexample
-\fi
-The preprint date and document number can be specified by putting
-\example\obeylines
-\CS{pubdate}\arg{date}
-\CS{pubcode}\arg{code-number}
-\endexample
-before the \cs{titlepage}. If these are omitted, the date defaults to
-the current month and year and the document number defaults either to
-something set as the default when \TeXsis\ was installed or to the
-current \TeXsis\ version number. The default at this installation is
-\ATunlock "\@DOCcode".
-\ATlock
-If you really want to customize the look of your paper you can create
-your own \cs{banner} macro.
-
-\bigskip
-
-If you are submitting your paper to one of the \idx{preprint archives}
-at Los Alamos, such as |hep-lat|, |hep-ph|, or |hep-th|, you can have
-the archive server automatically insert the preprint number it assigns
-your document when it is submitted.
-To do this put
-% Important: putting \relax here and below inhibits any such substitutions
-% in this manual if it gets put out on such a server.
-\example
-\CS{pubcode}|{hep-lat|\relax|/yymmnnn}|
-\endexample
-near the top of the document (change ``\idx{hep-lat}'' as appropriate
-to the archive you are using).
-When you submit a paper to an archive with the ``put'' command the
-server will translate any occurrence in the input file of the sequence
-``|hep-lat|\relax|/yymmnnn|'' to ``|hep-lat/|'' followed by the 7
-digit paper number.
-You must use the exact string of characters ``|yymmnnn|'' for this to
-work.
-When someone else gets your paper from the server and prints a copy it
-will have the assigned document code in the banner at the top of the
-title page.
-
-\bigbreak
-
-The standard \cs{footnote} macro cannot be used to make footnotes to
-titles and authors's names, because these special fields
-use internal vertical mode, where footnotes are not allowed. You
-should instead use the \cs{vfootnote} macro of plain \TeX\ for such
-purposes. In this case you must put the reference mark in the title or
-author list yourself (for example, with |${}^*$|), and then say
-|\vfootnote*{The footnote}| somewhere else on the page, outside of the
-internal vertical mode material (the author or title blocks).
-
-``Footnotes'' identifying institutions in a long list of authors
-are often centered on lines immediately below the author list.
-\CS{authors} and \CS{institution} can be used for this. For example,
-the author list of one well known paper\reference{DIS} E.D. Bloom, et al.,
-Phys.\ Rev.\ Letters \vol{23}, 930 (1969) \endreference
-could be typed as follows:
-\TeXexample
-|smalltt\authors
-E.D.~Bloom,$^a$ M.~Breidenback,$^b$ D.H.~Coward,$^a$
-H.~DeStaebler,$^a$ J.~Drees,$^a$ J.I.~Friedman,$^b$
-G.C.~Hartmann,$^{b,c}$ H.W.~Kendall,$^b$ G.~Miller,$^a$
-L.W.~Mo,$^a$ R.E.~Taylor$^a$
-\institution{a}{Stanford Linear Accelerator Center,
- Stanford, CA 94305}
-\institution{b}{Department of Physics and Laboratory for Nuclear
-Science, Massachusetts Institute of Technology,
- Cambridge MA 02139}
-\institution{c}{Xerox Corporation, Rochester, NY}
-\endauthors
-|endTeXexample
-This produces
-\authors
-E.D.~Bloom,$^a$ M.~Breidenback,$^b$ D.H.~Coward,$^a$
-H.~DeStaebler,$^a$ J.~Drees,$^a$ J.I.~Friedman,$^b$
-G.C.~Hartmann,$^{b,c}$ H.W.~Kendall,$^b$ G.~Miller,$^a$
-L.W.~Mo,$^a$ R.E.~Taylor$^a$
-\institution{a}{Stanford Linear Accelerator Center,
- Stanford, CA 94305}
-\institution{b}{Department of Physics and Laboratory for Nuclear
-Science, Massachusetts Institute of Technology,
- Cambridge MA 02139}
-\institution{c}{Xerox Corporation, Rochester, NY}
-\endauthors
-\noindent Note that \cs{institution} must come {\sl before} the
-\cs{endauthors}.
-
-%==================================================*
-
-\subsection{Chapters and Sections \label{sect.sects}}
-
-The following commands can be used to create and automatically number
-the divisions of a document, including chapters, sections, and
-appendices:
-
-\singlelinetrue % make label overhang
-\description{\hskip 3cm}\clump
-
-\itm{\CS{chapter}\arg{title}\quad}
-Begins a chapter with \meta{title} printed in |\Tbf|
-type on a new page.
-
-\itm{\CS{section}\arg{title}\quad}
-Begins a section with the \meta{title} printed in |\tbf|
-type. This does {\it not} begin on a new page (although you
-certainly can start a section on a new page by saying
-|\vfill\supereject| first.)
-
-\itm{\CS{subsection}\arg{title}\quad}
-Begins a subsection with the \meta{title} printed in |\bf|
-type.
-
-\itm{\CS{subsubsection}\arg{title}\quad}
-Begins a sub-subsection entitled \meta{title}. This is a lower
-level than even a subsection and should only be used when truly appropriate.
-
-\itm{\CS{Appendix}\arg{label}\arg{title}}
-Begins a chapter-like appendix labeled by the letter \meta{label}
-(generally A, B, C, \dots or I, II, III, \dots). The \meta{title}
-is printed in |\Tbf| type at the top of a new page.
-
-\itm{\CS{appendix}\arg{label}\arg{title}}
-Begins a section-like appendix labeled by the letter \meta{label}
-(generally A, B, C, \dots or I, II, III, \dots). The \meta{title}
-is printed in |\tbf| type.
-
-\itm{\CS{nosechead}\arg{title}}
-The \meta{title} is typeset like a subsection headline, but without a
-subsection number. This is suitable for acknowledgments, lists of
-references and such.
-
-\enddescription
-The title appears at the top of the section or subsection, left
-justified in the appropriate typestyle for the document type and with
-an appropriate amount of vertical spacing below. These and other
-details of the layout vary with the document format.
-In general \CS{chapter} is appropriate mainly
-for books or theses; the manual you are reading now uses only
-\CS{section} and \CS{subsection} divisions.
-
-As you may have noticed from this manual, the first paragraph of a
-section or subsection is not indented.
-This is the usual practice for most well-designed books, though it may
-seem odd at first.
-It isn't that strange if you think of the indentation of a paragraph
-as a way to mark a {\sl separation between} paragraphs, rather than as
-a way to mark the beginning of a paragraph.
-But if you really want to indent that first paragraph, just begin it
-with \cs{par}.
-On the other hand, if you put any kind of commands or macro
-definitions between the \CS{section} or \CS{subsection} and the first
-paragraph then this will interfere with the suppression of the
-indentation.
-You can easily fix this by either moving your macro definitions
-elsewhere or putting in a \cs{noindent} by hand.
-
-
-
- By default chapter, section, and subsection numbers are printed with
-the titles, and the chapter and section numbers are also attached to
-equation, figure and table numbers in the form ``$cc.ss.nn$'', where
-$cc$ is the chapter number, $ss$ the section number, and $nn$ the
-equation number. The inclusion of the chapter and section numbers can
-be turned on or off with the commands
-\description{~showchaptIDfalse\qquad}
-\itm{\CS{showchaptIDtrue}} Display chapter numbers.
-\itm{\CS{showchaptIDfalse}} Do not display chapter numbers.
-\itm{\CS{showsectIDtrue}} Display section numbers.
-\itm{\CS{showsectIDfalse}} Do not display section numbers.
-\enddescription
-
-\bigskip
-
- \CS{Appendix} and \CS{appendix} give chapter-like and
-section-like appendices, respectively. The chapter or section number is
-replaced by a letter, which is given as the first argument, and the
-title, which is the second argument, is printed in the same format as a
-chapter or section title. For example,
-\TeXexample
-\appendix{A}{Review of Functional Integration}
-|endTeXexample
-\noindent
-The letter labeling the appendix is attached to the equation
-numbers if \CS{showchaptIDtrue} or \CS{showsectIDtrue} is used. You can
-omit the letter by using an empty first argument, as in
-\TeXexample
-\appendix{}{Leading logarithm approximation}
-|endTeXexample
-\noindent
-in which case the result is the same as setting
-\CS{showchaptIDfalse} or \CS{showsectIDfalse}.
-
-\bigskip
-
- A skip called \CS{sectionskip} is used before the title of any
-section-like division (i.e., a |\section| or an |\appendix)|; a skip
-called \CS{subsectionskip} is used for any lower-level division, that is, a
-\CS{subsection}, \CS{subsubsection}, or a \CS{nosechead}. Of course these
-are all removed by \TeX\ if the section starts on a new page.
-Furthermore, any of these divisions will start on a new page if less
-than a minimum length given by \CS{sectionminspace} remains on the
-current page.
-The defaults for these parameters are
-\TeXexample
-\sectionskip=2cm plus 8pt minus 8pt % skip before \section
-\subsectionskip=1cm plus 4pt minus 4pt % skip before \subsection
-\sectionminspace=0.25\vsize % new page if less left
-|endTeXexample
-but they can be changed to any legal \TeX\ skip or dimension either
-throughout the document or in a local group. For example, you could
-use
-\TeXexample
-\begingroup
-\subsectionskip=\sectionskip
-\fourteenpoint
-\nosechead{Acknowledgments}
-\endgroup
-|endTeXexample
-to make a \CS{nosechead} which looks like a |\section|.
-
-\bigskip
-
- Ordinarily the order of appearance of the sections of a document
-are not changed, so there is no automatic mechanism for labeling the
-sections. Any of the divisions described above can be labeled by
-inserting \cs{label}\arg{label} into the title text. The \meta{label}
-should have the form \meta{type.name}, where \meta{type} is |chap|,
-|sect|, etc., to avoid possible conflicts with other kinds of labels.
-The corresponding numbers can then be referred to with
-|\use{|\meta{type.name}|}|, as described in \Sect{labels}.
-
- If the title of a chapter or section is too long, a break in
-the line can be inserted with the \cs{n} command. This will also
-break the line in the title when it appears in the table of contents.
-If running headlines are being used (see \Sect{headline}) then only the
-first part of the title, up to the \cs{n}, will be used for the running
-headline.
-You can always reset the headline by hand with |\setHeadline|
-(see \Sect{headline}).
-
- You can customize the behavior of the section-making macros by
-adding your own definitions for the macros
-\index{customization!chapters and sections}%
-\example
-\CS{everychapter}, \CS{everysection}, \CS{everysubsection},
-\CS{everysubsubsection},
-\endexample
-which are called immediately before making the corresponding
-division of the document, or for the macros
-\example
-\CS{afterchapter}, \CS{aftersection}, \CS{aftersubsection},
-\CS{aftersubsubsection},
-\endexample
-which are called immediately afterwards. By default all of these macros
-do nothing. As an example, if you wanted every section to begin on a
-new page, and you wanted numbered footnotes created by \cs{NFootnote} to
-start over counting from one at the begining of each section, you
-could define:
-\TeXexample
-\def\everysection{\vfill\supereject \footnum=0}
-|endTeXexample
-
-The full text of the title of the current chapter, section, and
-subsection is saved in \CS{ChapterTitle}, \CS{SectionTitle}, and
-\CS{SubsectionTitle}, so that you may do whatever you want with these
-later in the chapter or section. An example of how these might be
-used with \CS{aftersubsection} to change the running headlines is
-given in \Sect{headline}.
-
-
-Another way you can control the results produced by \CS{chapter} and
-\CS{section} is to change the way the chapter or section number is
-printed, by changing the definitions of the macros \CS{ChapterStyle},
-\CS{SectionStyle}, or \CS{SubsectionStyle}. These macros take
-one argument, the chapter or section number, and by default they simply
-return that argument. By substituting your own definition you can do
-almost anything you like to the section number. For example, it is
-often desired that the section number printed as a Roman numeral
-rather than as an Arabic numeral. The following definition will convert
-the section number to an upper-case Roman numeral:
-\TeXexample
-\def\SectionStyle#1{\uppercase\expandafter{\romannumeral #1}}
-|endTeXexample
-
-Even more customized behavior of the section-making macros is possible.
-For example, \cs{Tbf} and \cs{tbf} can also be defined as macros which
-take a single argument, which is arranged to be the title of the
-section or chapter.
-To see how this works it may be best to look at the definitions of
-\CS{chapter} and \CS{section} and the like in the source file
-|TXSsects.tex|. For very specialized applications you could even copy
-the definitions in this file to the TXSmods.tex file or your own
-personal style file and then alter them however you like.
-
-
-%==================================================*
-
-\subsection{The Master File}
-
- An useful concept for typesetting a long document is that of
-the\index{master file} {\em Master File}.
-The idea is to create one small file which initializes \TeXsis\ with
-\cs{texsis}, makes any special definitions or sets parameters, and
-then reads in the actual text of the document in sections using the
-|\input| command.
-As a simple example consider a manuscript called MUONS.
-The master file is called |MUONS.tex|, and contains the following:
-\TeXexample
-|smalltt\texsis % initialize TeXsis
-\input MyMacros % special macros for this paper
-\input MUONSr % references for the paper
-\input MUONS0 % title page for the paper
-\input MUONS1 % first section of manuscript
-\input MUONS2 % second section of manuscript
-\ListReferences % print the reference list
-\end
-|endTeXexample
-The file |MyMacros.tex| contains any special macro definitions used
-in this paper. (If there are none, leave this line out.) The
-file |MUONSr.tex| contains the references used in this paper,
-beginning with |\referencelist| and ending with
-|\endreferencelist|, as described in \Sect{refs}. The
-file |MUONS0.tex| contains the commands for producing the title
-page of the paper, as described in \Sect{fmts}. The
-actual text of the manuscript is divided into two parts, which
-are kept in the files |MUONS1.tex| and |MUONS2.tex|. To process the
-entire document one simply runs \TeXsis\ on the master file with
-the command
-\TeXexample
-texsis MUONS
-|endTeXexample
-\noindent
-If you are familiar with computer programming you may think of
-the master file as the main program and the other files as
-subroutines called by the main program.
-
- One of the great advantages of using a master file, aside from
-keeping the manuscript organized, is that it lets you work on a single
-section of the paper at a time. For example, suppose you want to
-run off a draft of just the first section of the paper called MUONS
-above. You don't need to process the references, the title page,
-or the second section of the paper. Recall that the percent sign
-(|%|) is the comment character in \TeX\ --- anything appearing on
-a line after a |%| is ignored by \TeX. Thus we simply edit the
-master file and put a |%| in front of certain lines, like this:
-\TeXexample
-|smalltt\texsis % initialize TeXsis
-\draft % optional draft mode
-\input MyMacros % special macros for this paper
-% \input MUONSr % references for the paper
-% \input MUONS0 % title page for the paper
-\input MUONS1 % first section of manuscript
-% \input MUONS2 % section section of manuscript
-% \ListReferences % print the references
-\end
-|endTeXexample
-Now when you run \TeXsis\ on this file only the first section of
-the paper will be processed, but it will use the macros defined
-in |MyMacros.tex|, as well as any other definitions that you might
-add to the master file. Once the first section is error free you
-can repeat the process on the second section of the paper,
-without rerunning the first section. After both sections are
-correct you can reinstate all lines in the master file and
-process the whole document.
-
-%==================================================*
-
-\subsection{Table of Contents \label{sect.conts}}
-
-The section-making macros just described automatically make an entry in
-a \idx{table of contents} for the document being prepared. The title of
-the chapter or section and the page number are stored in a table of
-contents file (which ends with the extension ``|.toc|'') until needed,
-then the table of contents is created simply
-by saying \CS{Contents}.
-If your document is divided into chapters,
-like a book, the table of contents should appear on a page with a Roman
-numeral page number (which is obtained by setting \cs{pageno} to a
-negative value). For example:
-\TeXexample
-\book % document format for a book
-\input Chapt1 % input chapters...
-...
-\vfill\supereject % eject last page, including figures
-\pageno=-3 % print on pages iii, iv, ...
-\nosechead{Contents} % label TOC without section #
-\Contents % generate table of contents
-|endTeXexample
-
-The table of contents is usually printed at the {\sl end\/} of the
-document so that all the page numbers are correct. You then
-simply move these pages to the front of the document by hand.
-Alternately, you can say \CS{Contents} at the beginning of your document
-to read in the table of contents file produced by a previous run of
-\TeXsis, although then you must process the document twice to be sure
-that the page numbers are correct.
-
-It is important to note that nothing is written to the table of contents
-file unless \CS{Contentstrue} is set. The default for most documents
-is \CS{Contentsfalse}, since one usually does not want a table of
-contents for a short paper or a memo or a letter. The exceptions are
-\cs{book} and \cs{thesis}, which automatically set
-\CS{Contentstrue}. In any case, if you want a table of contents
-you can explicitly state \CS{Contentstrue}.
-
- While an entry in the table of contents is created by
-\cs{chapter} or \cs{section}, no entry is made for \cs{nosechead}. In
-this case, or in any case, you can insert an entry into the table of
-contents ``by hand'' by saying
-\example
-\CS{addTOC}\arg{level}\arg{title}\arg{page}
-\endexample
-where \meta{level} is the level of division for the entry being made,
-with 0 for chapters, 1 for sections and 2 for subsections. This
-controls how much vertical space is put around the table of contents
-entry and how much the entry is indented in the list.
-%
-The \meta{title} is the text of the title as it should appear in the
-table of contents. Text which is too long for one line will be split
-over several lines, but you can force a line break where you want one
-with \cs{n}. The \meta{page} is the page number for the entry you are
-making. Generally you'll use \cs{folio} here to just use the current
-page number, whatever that may be. Thus to make a section level entry
-in the table of contents having the title ``Acknowledgments'' you would
-simply say
-\TeXexample
-\addTOC{1}{Acknowledgments}{\folio}
-|endTeXexample
-
-Entries made in the table of contents by \cs{chapter}, \cs{section},
-etc. will optionally begin with the chapter or section number, depending
-upon whether \cs{showchaptIDtrue} and \cs{showsectIDtrue} are selected.
-The decision whether or not to show the chapter or section number is
-made when the table of contents is printed by \CS{Contents}, not when
-the \cs{chapter} or \cs{section} is begun. Thus it is possible to have
-the section numbers showing at the beginning of the section, but to then
-have no section numbers in the table of contents by saying
-\cs{showsectIDfalse} immediately before saying \CS{Contents}.
-
-\bigbreak
-
-It is possible to write commands or other text to the table of contents
-file while it is being created, using the command
-\CS{TOCwrite}\arg{stuff}.
-For example, the heading separating the appendices from the rest of
-the entries in the table of contents of this Manual was created by
-saying
-\TeXexample
-\TOCwrite{\bigskip\noexpand\nosechead{Appendices:}}
-|endTeXexample
-\noindent
-before the appendices were created. The \cs{noexpand} prevents the
-|\nosechead| from being expanded until later, after the table of contents
-file is read back in by \CS{Contents}
-
-
-\bigbreak
-
- What if you want the table of contents to appear in the table
-of contents itself!? Naturally it should appear first (even though it
-may be printed at the end of the document). You can use the tagging
-mechanism described in \Sect{labels} to make a ``forward reference''
-to the page number. At the beginning of the document you can create
-the table of contents entry by saying
-\TeXexample
-\addTOC{0}{Table of Contents}{\noexpand\use{page.TOC}}
-|endTeXexample
-\noindent
-The \cs{noexpand} prevents the \cs{use} from being expanded until later,
-after the table of contents file is read back in. Later, when you actually
-print the table of contents you would first tag the page number, then
-invoke \CS{Contents}, like so:
-\TeXexample
-\nosechead{Table of Contents}
-\tag{page.TOC}{\folio}
-\Contents
-|endTeXexample
-
-\Ignore % NO, WE DON'T DO IT
-\noindent
-As a demonstration of this we have done this for the table of contents
-for this manual. For more information about \cs{tag} and \cs{use} see
-\Sect{labels}.\relax
-\endIgnore
-
-%======================================================================*
-
-\subsection{Running Headlines and Footlines \label{sect.headline}}
-
- In Plain \TeX, whenever a page is output an optional headline
-and footline are added at the top and bottom of the page. In \TeXsis\
-the footline is normally blank, while the headline contains the page
-number in the upper right corner. The \cs{book} and \cs{thesis} formats
-also display a running headline, centered in 10~pt.\ italic type,
-containing the chapter or section title.
-Running headlines and page numbers are {\bf not} printed on any
-page containing a \cs{title} or a new \cs{chapter}.
-For an example of running headlines look at the top of
-any page in this Manual.
-
- \CS{nopagenumbers} turns off the running headlines and
-footlines, just as it does in Plain \TeX. In \TeXsis\ saying
-\CS{pagenumbers} restores the standard headlines and footlines.
-Saying \CS{bookpagenumbers} puts odd page numbers in the upper right
-corner and even page numbers in the upper left corner, the normal
-convention for books. This is the default for \cs{book}.
-
- \CS{RunningHeadstrue}, the default for \cs{book} (and
-\cs{thesis}), displays the running headline text \cs{HeadText}, as well
-as the page number. |\RunningHeadsfalse| turns off the running
-headlines but leaves the page numbers. \cs{HeadText} is defined by
-\cs{chapter} to be the chapter title in 10~pt.\ italic type; if no
-chapters are used, then it is defined by \cs{section} to be the section
-title. You can change the running headline yourself with the command
-\CS{setHeadline}\arg{text}. For example, the headline at the top of
-this page could have been created by saying
-\example\tt
-\CS{setHeadline}|{|\HeadText|}|
-\endexample
-The headline text appears in typestyle \CS{HeadFont}, which
-you can change to suit your tastes. The default is
-|\tenit|,
-but for this manual we used |\def\HeadFont{\tensl}|.
-
-
-Running headlines are not normally affected by \cs{subsection}, but it
-is easy to have each subsection change the runing headlines by
-defining \cs{aftersubsection} to include a \CS{setHeadline} command.
-As a useful example, suppose that each subsection is to have a running
-headline composed of both the title of the section and the title of
-the subsection. You could have this done automatically by defining
-something like:
-\TeXexample
-\def\aftersubsection{\setHeadline{\SectionTitle: \SubsectionTitle}}
-|endTeXexample
-The rest of this section will have such running headlines as an
-example.
-\def\aftersubsection{\setHeadline{\SectionTitle: \SubsectionTitle}}
-\bigskip %<-- needed to force page break before next section!
-
-
-%======================================================================*
-
-\subsection{How to Make an Index \label{sect.index}}
-
-The traditional way to make an index for a book was to write key~words
-on 3$\times$5 ``index'' cards, and to then write on these card the
-numbers of the pages on which the key words occurred.
-The cards were then sorted by hand and then their contents also sorted
-and typed in order to make the index.
-This was a tedious and time consuming task.
-Fortunately this whole process has been modernized so that an index
-can be made almost automatically.
-Still, it takes a certain amount of care to create a useful, well
-constructed index.
-An important part of designing a good index is deciding which
-key~words will be useful in the index and which key~words will not.
-A computer cannot make these decisions for you.
-
-Making an index with \TeX\ still involves collecting the index entries,
-sorting them (and removing duplicate references), and then producing the
-final index. The first and last steps are accomplished with a set of
-plain \TeX\ macros known as |index.tex|, while the sorting and collating
-of the index entries is done by a separate computer program called
-|makeindex|.\index{makeindex}\ This is how we made the index for this
-Manual, which starts on page~\use{pg.index}.
-
-To create an entry in the index you can say \CS{index}\arg{key}, where
-\meta{key} is the key~word to be entered into the index, or more simply
-you can say \CS{idx}\arg{word}, which both includes the word in the
-text and makes an index entry for it; saying ``\CS{idx}|{Frisbee}|''
-is the same as saying ``|Frisbee|\CS{index}|{Frisbee}|''.
-Either of these indexing commands writes the index entry to a file
-with the name extension ``|.idx|''.
-Once your document has been processed by \TeX\ this file will contain
-all of the ``raw'' index entries.
-
-The entries in the raw index file are not sorted, and there may be many
-duplications. The |makeindex|\index{makeindex} program will sort the
-index entries and reformat them in a form appropriate for printing the
-index. The output from the |makeindex| program is a file with the
-extension ``|.ind|''. So if your
-manuscript file is called |myfile.tex| and you have run it through
-\TeXsis\ you should find a file called |myfile.idx| containing the raw
-index entries. You would run the |makeindex| program like so,
-\example
-|makeindex myfile.idx|
-\endexample
-to produce the processed index file |myfile.ind|.
-(You can leave off the |.idx| extension for the raw file and |makeindex|
-will assume it.)
-
-To print the index you can either include it in another pass of the full
-document, by saying
-\TeXexample
-\input \jobname.ind
-|endTeXexample
-\noindent
-in the manuscript file, or you can print it separately by adding
-``|\input index|'' to the begining of the |myfile.ind| file and running
-it through \TeX\ or \TeXsis.
-
-If you set \CS{markindextrue} then indexed words selected with \CS{idx}
-will appear in the printed output inside a ruled box
-like so:
-\begingroup
-\markindextrue \idx{Frisbee}.
-\endgroup
-The box does not interfere with or change the word or line spacing.
-These ``proof marks'' are useful for draft copies when you are putting
-together the index, but obviously you do not want them to appear in the
-final copy, so the default is |\markindexfalse|.
-
-The |index.tex| macros are distributed with \TeXsis, but |makeindex|
-is not.
-If you do not have the |makeindex| program you can get the C source
-code for it from the \TeXsis\ anonymous ftp site,
-|ftp.texsis.org|.
-It is a well-known program, and is also available from CTAN in the
-directory {\tt indexing/makeindex}.
-Note that the |index.tex| macros work with plain \TeX\ as well as
-\TeXsis, and they work with |makeindex| in its default mode, even
-though that default mode was originally intended for \LaTeX\ code.
-
-For more information about how to make full use of |makeindex| see the
-file |index.tex|, the Unix man page for makeindex(1), and the original
-paper by Chen and Harrison\reference{makeindex} Pehong Chen and
-Michael A. Harrison, ``Index Preparation and Processing'', in {\sl
-Software: Practice and Experience}, \vol{19}, 897-915 (1988)
-\endreference
-describing how they designed the |makeindex| program.
-
-\def\aftersubsection{\relax}
-
-%>>> EOF TXSsects.doc <<<
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/texsis/base/TXSsite.000 b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/texsis/base/TXSsite.000
deleted file mode 100644
index a9825ef9621..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/texsis/base/TXSsite.000
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,164 +0,0 @@
-%% file: TXSsite.tex (TeXsis version 2.17)
-% $Revision: 18.0 $ : $Date: 2000/05/17 00:45:04 $ : $Author: myers $
-%======================================================================*
-% This is the site dependent info file for TeXsis. Edit the things
-% below to match your installation. Take out what you don't need or
-% want and add any local macros or other stuff you want. Anything
-% between \Ignore and \endIgnore is ignored, but will become active if
-% you remove the \Ignore. Remember, this file is only read in once when
-% texsis.fmt is made!
-
-% Change name to your own institution or site here:
-
-\message{Site dependent info.... Generic version.}
-
-\ATunlock % make @ a letter
-
-%===================================*
-% \ORGANIZATION is the name of the issuing organization, which
-% appears at the top of the title page, or on a \Memo.
-% You can also change it before you call \titlepage.
-
-\Ignore % an example using mixed caps
- \def\ORGANIZATION{{\eightrm {\tenrm B}ANSAI {\tenrm I}NSTITUTE}}
-\endIgnore
-
-\def\ORGANIZATION{}
-
-%===================================*
-% \LandscapeSpecial turns on landscape mode on the laser printer.
-% How this is done is very site dependent. Uncomment the version
-% that works for you, or insert your own if these don't work.
-
-% 1) This is how dv2ips does it, and you need to have landscape.ps
-% accesable to the filter program
-
-\Ignore
- \def\LandscapeSpecial{\special{psfile=landscape.ps}}
-\endIgnore
-
-% 2) This is how dvips (Rokicki's version 5.484 and later) does it:
-
-\def\LandscapeSpecial{\special{papersize=11in,8.5in}}
-
-
-%===================================*
-% \manualfeed tries to put the printer in Manual Feed mode, for
-% printing on letterhead stationary or envelopes.
-% How you do this is really installation specific.
-
-% If you use 'dvi2ps' then use \special to read the file manfeed.ps.
-% You can get it from ftp://feynman.physics.lsa.umich.edu/texsis/etc/manfeed.ps
-
-\Ignore
- \def\manualfeed{\emsg{\@comment MANUAL FEED MODE SELECTED!}%
- \special{psfile=manfeed.ps}}
-\endIgnore
-
-% Rokicki's dvips will do manual feed if you use 'dvips -m'
-% but this tries to do the same thing (and doesn't work! -EAM 98/03/06)
-
-\Ignore
- \def\manualfeed{\emsg{\@comment MANUAL FEED MODE SELECTED!}%
- \special{! @manualfeed}}
-\endIgnore
-
-
-%===================================*
-% \@DOCcode is the document code that appears in the upper right
-% part of the title page of a \preprint. It starts out at its default
-% value, and is changed by calling \pubcode{<code>} before you call
-% \titlepage. If you don't use anything you'll get \TeXsis.
-
-\Ignore
- \def\@DOCcode{UTREL\hbox to 1.5cm{\hss}}
-\endIgnore
-
-%===================================*
-% \banner produces a banner across the top of the title page for
-% a \preprint. Customize this however you like.
-
-\def\banner{\vskip 0pt
- \line{{\ninepoint\@PUBdate \hfil
- \hbox{\vbox{\hrule\vskip 4pt \hbox{\ORGANIZATION}\vskip 4pt\hrule}}% %
- \hfil \@DOCcode}}%
- \vskip 1.0cm
-}
-
-\def\@PUBdate{\uppercase{\today}} % default is today
-
-
-%===================================*
-% \letterhead{phone} is for copying onto letterhead stationary.
-% It just puts on the date and a phone number (if given).
-
-% THIS IS JUST AN EXAMPLE - MODIFY FOR YOUR OWN INSTITUTION.
-
-\Ignore
-\def\letterhead#1{% letterhead for copying onto Univ. Michigan stationary
- \def\PhoneNumber{#1}%
- \emsg{Positioning date/phone for University of Michigan letterhead.}%
- \begingroup % this header stuff is local
- \parskip=0pt \parindent=0pt %
- \null\vskip 0.6in % skip down to date line
- \line{\hfill \hbox to 5in{\tensl \today\hfill}}% Today's Date
- \line{\tenss \hfill (734)
- \ifx\PhoneNumber\empty 764-4437\else \PhoneNumber\fi}%
- \ifx\Email\undefined\else\line{\hfill \tt \Email}\fi
- \vskip 10pt plus 1fil
- \endgroup}
-\endIgnore
-
-%===================================*
-% \UMletterhead{phone} is a facsimile of the University of Michigan
-% stationary. If \Email is defined it is included under the phone number.
-
-% THIS IS JUST AN EXAMPLE - MODIFY FOR YOUR OWN INSTITUTION.
-% It uses a PostScript image of the Univ. Michigan seal, umseal.ps
-
-\Ignore
-\def\UMletterhead#1{% Facsimile of UM letterhead
- \def\PhoneNumber{#1}%
- \begingroup % make these these things local
- \null\vskip -27pt % masthead up a bit to match real thing
- \UMmasthead % UM seal and name
- \line{\hfill \hbox to 5in{\tensl \today\hfill}}% Today's Date
- \line{\tenss \hfill (734)
- \ifx\PhoneNumber\empty 764-4437\else \PhoneNumber\fi}%
- \ifx\Email\undefined\else\line{\hfill \tt \Email}\fi
- \vskip 10pt plus 1fil
- \endgroup}
-
-\def\UMseal{{\hbox{\epsfbox{umseal.eps}}}}%
-
-\def\UMmasthead{\line{\llap{\UMseal\hskip -35pt}\hfill
- \hbox{\vbox{\hsize=13.99cm \def\LC##1{{\twentyfourpoint\bf ##1}}%
- \line{\hfill \twentypoint\bf \LC{T}HE \LC{U}NIVERSITY OF \LC{M}ICHIGAN}%
- \vskip 0.85cm
- \line{\tenss DEPARTMENT OF PHYSICS \hfill 2071 Randall Laboratory}%
- \line{\tenss \hfill Ann Arbor, MI 48109-1120}%
- }}}}%
-\endIgnore
-
-%===================================*
-% Mailing Labels: you may have to change these depending on your
-% printer and the kind of labels you use.
-
-\Ignore
-
-% This is for the "standard" inch high, 3 across the page labels
-
-\lblHsize=7.32cm % width of standard label
-\lblVsize=2.54cm % height of standard label
-\fullHsize=8.5in % hsize for page
-\fullVsize=11.0in % vsize for page
-
-\lblVoffset=0pt % shift down this much
-\lblHoffset=-1.8cm % shift over this much
-
-\endIgnore
-
-%>>> EOF TXSsite.tex <<<
-
-
-
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/texsis/base/TXSsymb.doc b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/texsis/base/TXSsymb.doc
deleted file mode 100644
index eef1dc39730..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/texsis/base/TXSsymb.doc
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,199 +0,0 @@
-%% file: TXSsymb.doc - Special Symbols - TeXsis version 2.18
-%% @(#) $Id: TXSsymb.doc,v 18.2 2000/05/17 00:19:46 myers Exp $
-%======================================================================*
-% (C) Copyright 1989, 1992, 1995, 1997 by Eric Myers and Frank E. Paige
-% This file is a part of TeXsis. Distribution and/or modifications
-% are allowed under the terms of the LaTeX Project Public License (LPPL).
-% See the file COPYING or ftp://ftp.texsis.org/texsis/LPPL
-%======================================================================*
-\ifx\undefined\meta \texsis\input TXSdocM.doc\input Manual.aux\draft\fi
-
-\subsection{Special Symbols \label{sect.symb}}
-
-\TeXsis\ defines some special symbols and other constructions which
-are not included in plain \TeX\ and which either are commonly used
-by physicists or are not trivial to construct. The following
-macros, which are listed here by related groups, provide these
-additional special symbols for use in equations:
-\index{symbols!physics}
-\bigskip
-\itemize
- \itm \CS{bra}\arg{text} and \CS{ket}\arg{text} produce the
-notations $\bra{\hbox{\it text}}$ and $\ket{\hbox{\it text}}$
-respectively for quantum mechanical states. \CS{vev}\arg{text}
-produces $\vev{\hbox{\it text}}$ for a VEV (\idx{Vacuum Expectation Value}).
-
- \itm \CS{del}, \CS{grad}, and \CS{square} produce the notations
-$\del$, $\grad$, and $\square$ for various derivatives. (The first two
-are just synonyms for \cs{partial} and \cs{nabla}.)
-
- \itm \CS{degrees} is the degrees symbol. For example, |90\degrees|
-produces ``90\degrees''. You can use \CS{degree} as a synonym. These
-work equally well in math or text mode.
-
- \itm \CS{frac}\arg{numerator}\arg{denominator} produces the fraction
-|{|\<numerator> |\over| \<de\-nomi\-nator>|}|, while
-\hskip 0pt plus 6pt\CS{smallfrac}\arg{numerator}\arg{denominator}
-\hskip 0pt plus 6pt
-produces the same fraction in the smaller
-subscript style type. \CS{half} produces a $\half$ in a size appropriate
-to its usage.
-
- \itm \CS{simle} and \CS{simge} make the symbols $\simle$ and
-$\simge$ to indicate "less than about" and "greater than about,"
-respectively. Synonyms for these are \CS{ltsim} and \CS{gtsim}.
-
- \itm \CS{parenbar} puts a bar in parentheses above a character;
-this is often used to indicate either a particle or its antiparticle.
-\CS{nunubar} and \CS{ppbar} are special cases. Thus
-\TeXexample
-$$ n \parenbar{n} \qquad \nu \nunubar \qquad p \ppbar $$
-|endTeXexample
-gives
-$$
-n \parenbar{n} \qquad \nu \nunubar \qquad p \ppbar
-$$
-
-\goodbreak
-
- \itm \CS{subrightarrow}\arg{text} puts the text under a right
-arrow of the appropriate length. Thus
-\TeXexample
-$$ f(x) \subrightarrow{x \to 0} f(0) $$
-|endTeXexample
-gives
-$$
-f(x) \subrightarrow{x \to 0} f(0)
-$$
-
- \itm \CS{buildchar}\arg{\#1}\arg{\#2}\arg{\#3} gives character |#1| with
-|#2| above it and |#3| below it, allowing the construction of a variety
-of special symbols. \CS{overcirc} is a special case of this which puts
-a small circle above a character, as in $\overcirc R$. This is often
-used in general relativity and related fields.
-
- \itm \CS{vbigl}\arg{delim}\arg{size} and
-\CS{vbigr}\arg{delim}\arg{size} produce very (or variably) big
-delimiters, generalizing the Plain \TeX\ macros \cs{bigl}, \cs{Bigr},
-etc. They produce, respectively, the left and right delimiters
-\meta{delim} with height \meta{size}, which can be given in pt., cm.,
-in., or any other valid units. Any valid delimiter may be used, but you
-must be careful if you use parentheses and automatic parenthesis sizing
-is also in effect (\Sect{paren}), because these conflict. You must
-either turn off automatic parenthesis sizing (with \cs{offparens}) or
-use \cs{lparen} or \cs{rparen} in place of `|(|' and `|)|'.
-
-\itm \CS{Leftcases}\arg{size} and \CS{Rightcases}\arg{size} give left
-and right braces of size \meta{size} smashed to zero height; these can
-be used in place of the \cs{cases} of Plain \TeX\ when it is desired to
-put an equation number on each line. For example,
-\TeXexample
-|smalltt$$\EQNalign{
-m_e &= ~.511~\MeV \EQN lep;a \cr
-m_\mu &= ~105~\MeV
- \quad \Rightcases{50pt} \quad {\rm Leptons}
- \EQN lep;b \cr
-m_\tau &= 1784~\MeV \EQN lep;c \cr}
-$$
-|endTeXexample
-gives\index{equations!alignment}
-$$\EQNalign{
-m_e &= ~.511~\MeV \EQN lep;a \cr
-m_\mu &= ~105~\MeV
- \quad \Rightcases{50pt} \quad {\rm Leptons}
- \EQN lep;b \cr
-m_\tau &= 1784~\MeV \EQN lep;c \cr}
-$$
-Note that |\Leftcases| and |\Rightcases| do not provide automatic
-spacing, which must be adjusted by the user as in the previous example.
-There seems to be no simple way to obtain automatic spacing and to
-allow an equation number on each line.
-
-
- \itm \CS{sterling} produces the British currency mark \sterling.
-
- \itm The astronomical symbols for the sun and the earth are
-\CS{sun} and \CS{earth}. For example, |$M_\sun$| and |$M_\earth$| give
-$M_\sun$ and $M_\earth$. You can also use them outside of math mode.
-
-
- \itm \CS{dimensions}\arg{units}\arg{power} is used for dimensional
-analysis. The units appear in square brackets, raised to the given
-power. For example to produce \dimensions{mass}{-3} you would type
-|\dimensions{mass}{-3}|.
-
- \itm \CS{slashchar}\arg{letter} puts a slash through a character, the
-notation for the contraction of a vector with Dirac $\gamma$ matrices
-in Feynman graphs. For example
-\TeXexample
-$$ {\cal L} =
- \bar\psi[i\slashchar{\partial} - e\slashchar{A}-m]\psi $$
-|endTeXexample
-gives
-$$
-{\cal L} =
- \bar\psi[i\slashchar{\partial} - e\slashchar{A}-m]\psi
-\,.
-$$
-The results produced by |\slashchar| are not as good as one would
-like. You can do somewhat better by adjusting the kerning of the |/|
-by hand for each character. For example,
-\TeXexample
-\def\Aslash{A\kern -0.47em/}
-|endTeXexample
-\def\Aslash{A\kern -0.47em/}%
-produces ``$\Aslash$''. But note that the angle of the slash is still
-not quite what one would like for a slashed ``$A$.'' To really get good
-looking slashed characters someone will have to create a new slashed
-character math font using MetaFont. Meanwhile you can get by with
-|\slashchar| or define your own using kerning.
-
-\enditemize
-\bigskip\pagecheck{0.2\vsize}
-
- Abbreviations for units are normally set in Roman type even when used
-in formulas. Special function (e.g., sine, cosine and logarithm) or
-operator names are also set in Roman type, and \TeXsis\ adds some new
-names to go with the old standards.
-
-\itemize
- \itm \CS{Tr} and \CS{tr} give ``$\Tr$'' and ``$\tr$'' respectively for the
-trace of an operator or of a matrix. \CS{diag} is used to denote a
-diagonal matrix, as in $\eta_{\mu\nu}=\diag(-1,1,1,1)$.
-
- \itm \CS{real} and \CS{imag} give the symbols $\real$ and $\imag$
-for the real and imaginary parts of an expression; the spacing is like
-that for any other function or operator.
-
- \itm \CS{eV}, \CS{keV}, \CS{MeV}, \CS{GeV}, and \CS{TeV} give the
-abbreviations for energy units $\eV$, $\keV$, $\MeV$, $\GeV$, and
-$\TeV$ respectively.
-
- \itm \CS{mb}, \CS{mub}, \CS{nb}, \CS{pb}, and \CS{fb} give the
-abbreviations for cross section units $\mb$, $\mub$, $\nb$, $\pb$, and
-$\fb$ respectively, while \CS{cmsec} gives $\cmsec$, the standard units
-for luminosity in colliding beam accelerators.
-
- \itm \CS{units}\arg{name} is a generic macro to print in Roman type
-the name of any units not covered by the macros above. For example,
-you can say \CS{units}|{furlongs}| and \CS{units}|{fortnights}|
-if you are using that particular system of units.
-\enditemize
-
-
-
- Note that all of the abbreviations for units above are defined
-without any spacing; to produce
-$$
-{\cal L} = 10^{33}\,\cmsec, \qquad p_\perp = 8.3\,\GeV
-$$
-you should type
-\TeXexample
-$$
-{\cal L} = 10^{33}\,\cmsec, \qquad p_\perp = 8.3\,\GeV
-$$
-|endTeXexample
-with a |\,| to make a thin space between the number and the units.
-
-
-%>>> EOF TXSsymb.doc <<<
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/texsis/base/TXStags.doc b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/texsis/base/TXStags.doc
deleted file mode 100644
index 768e4f1692f..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/texsis/base/TXStags.doc
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,212 +0,0 @@
-%% file: TXStags.doc - Tags and Labels - TeXsis version 2.18
-%% @(#) $Id: TXStags.doc,v 18.1 1999/07/30 18:34:24 myers Exp $
-%======================================================================*
-% (C) Copyright 1989, 1992, 1997 by Eric Myers and Frank E. Paige
-% This file is a part of TeXsis. Distribution and/or modifications
-% are allowed under the terms of the LaTeX Project Public License (LPPL).
-% See the file COPYING or ftp://ftp.texsis.org/texsis/LPPL
-%======================================================================*
-\ifx\undefined\meta \texsis\input TXSdocM.doc\draft\input Manual.aux\fi
-
-
-\section{Labels and Tags \label{sect.labels}}
-
-One of the most useful features of \TeXsis\ is that it automatically
-numbers things like equations and references and lets you refer to
-these things by means of symbolic names or ``labels.''
-This section explains how to get the most use out of this labeling
-mechanism.
-
-\subsection{Tagging}
-
- Here is a rough outline of how labeling or ``tagging'' works.
-\TeXsis\ keeps track of numbers for equations, figures, tables, and
-other useful things in counters. Whenever you create a new equation,
-figure, table or reference the appropriate counter is incremented. At
-the same time, a new macro instruction is defined, with the label
-incorporated into the name, and the definition of this macro is
-simply the (new) value of the counter. Thus if you create a displayed
-equation and label it ``Newton'' then a macro called ``|\Eq.Newton|'' is
-created and it is automatically defined to be whatever the next number
-is for the equation.
-
- The actual mechanism is somewhat more subtle. Normally you can
-only use letters in macro names, but \TeXsis\ uses \cs{csname} |...|
-\cs{endcsname} to allow numbers and punctuation to be used in
-labels.
-Also, an extra |@| is added at the beginning and end of each macro
-name.
-If this were not done then, for example, using ``|end|'' as a label
-(using \CS{tag}) could redefine \cs{end}, and you would not be able to
-get out of \TeX!
-So the macro containing the equation number for the equation named
-``Newton'' actually ends up being named ``|\@Eq.Newton@|''.
-
- Once a label macro is defined you can use it to refer to the
-thing it labels, and it will yield the proper number.
-In the case of the equation called ``Newton,'' saying |\Eq{Newton}| is
-really saying |Eq.~(\@Eq.Newton@)|.
-(Again, since punctuation is not allowed in names, \TeXsis\ actually
-uses \cs{csname} |...| \cs{endcsname} in the definition.)
-References, equations, figures, tables, etc., all produce their
-numbers in this way.
-
- Each of the \TeXsis\ macros which uses labels attaches to
-the label a unique prefix identifying the kind of object labeled.
-These objects and the corresponding prefixes are shown in
-\Tbl{labels}.
-Because of these prefixes the same label can be used for different
-kinds of objects.
-For example, the name ``Witten'' can be used as a label for an
-equation and as a reference, since their internal labels are
-|Eq.Witten| and |Ref.Witten|, respectively (and in reality the names
-are bracketed by |@| characters).
-The prefixes are automatically inserted by \TeXsis\ macros like
-\cs{Eq} and \cs{cite}.
-
- At the most primitive level you can always associate a label with
-some value by saying \CS{tag}\arg{label\/}\arg{value}. You can then
-reference the value, whatever it is, by its name using the command
-\CS{use}\arg{label\/}. In this case if there is to be a prefix in the
-label you must put it in explicitly. Thus to say just the number of the
-equation labeled ``Newton'' without any parentheses or anything you
-would say |\use{Eq.Newton}|. To get the number of the reference labeled
-``Knuth'' you would say |\use{Ref.Knuth}|, which produces
-``\use{Ref.Knuth}'' because ``Knuth'' is the label of the first document
-we referenced in this manual and ``Ref'' is the prefix used for
-references.
-
-\table{labels}
-\caption{Prefixes for labels and the corresponding counters for
-various objects.}
-\def\CS#1{{\tt\char92{#1}}}
-\def\\{\hfill}
-\ruledtable
-Entity \\| Tag Prefix | Counter \CR
-Corollary \\| {\tt Cor.} | \CS{corollarynum} \\\cr
-Definition \\| {\tt Df.} | \CS{definitionnum} \\\cr
-Equation \\| {\tt Eq.} | \CS{eqnum} \\\cr
-Figure \\| {\tt Fg.} | \CS{fignum} \\\cr
-Lemma \\| {\tt Lem.} | \CS{lemmanum} \\\cr
-Reference \\| {\tt Ref.} | \CS{refnum} \\\cr
-Table \\| {\tt Tb.} | \CS{tabnum} \\\cr
-Theorem \\| {\tt Thm.} | \CS{theoremnum} \\
-\endruledtable
-\endtable
-
- One particularly useful way to use \CS{tag} and \CS{use} is to
-refer to a topic which is discussed on some other page in the
-document.
-On the page you want to reference you could define the tag
-``page.cool'' to be the page number by saying
-\CS{tag}|{page.cool}{|\cs{folio}|}|.
-Then somewhere else in the document if you want to refer to the
-information on that page you could do so with
-\CS{use}|{page.cool}|, as in ``This difficulty is discussed in
-more detail on page |\use{page.cool}|.''
-Then even if the document is rearranged so that the page numbers
-change, the page number you referred to will come out correct.
-
-Here is another useful example.
-Suppose you want to state the number of questions at the begining of
-an examination (or similarly, the number of chapters in a book).
-A count of the questions could be kept in |\Qcount|, but it won't be
-set correctly until the end of the job.
-Even so, when the count is known we can tag it with a name like ``NQ''
-and use it in the text with |\use{NQ}|.
-The first time this is encountered it will display as an undefined tag
-and an error message will appear in the log.
-But at the end of the document we say
-\TeXexample
-\tag{NQ}{\Qcount}
-|endTeXexample to assign the final value of |\Qcount| to the
-tag~``NQ''.
-The next time the job is run saying |\use{NQ}| will be defined as the
-value from the previous run.
-Unless you've recently changed things (by adding or removing a
-question) then this will be the correct count.
-
-
- Knowing about \CS{use} and the prefixes in \Tbl{labels} also lets you
-change how the macros that refer to these objects work. For example, to
-refer to figure~\use{Fg.Penguin} in section~\use{sect.figs} you would
-normally say \cs{Fig}|{Penguin}|. This produces
-``Fig.~\use{Fg.Penguin},'' but suppose you want it to say the full word
-``figure'' instead of just ``Fig.'' You can make this change throughout
-the document simply by changing the definition of \cs{Fig} to:
-\TeXexample
-\def\Fig#1{figure~\use{Fg.#1}}
-|endTeXexample
-\noindent
-Then ``\cs{Fig}|{Penguin}|'' would produce ``figure~\use{Fg.Penguin}.''
-
-
-\bigskip
-
- Whenever you create any of the objects listed in \Tbl{labels} a
-label is automatically created. However, chapters, sections, and
-subsections are not automatically labeled because their values are not
-ordinarily changed. If you want to remember the number of a chapter or
-section of your document to be able to refer to it somewhere else, put
-\CS{label}\arg{label\/} in the text of the title of the chapter or
-section. \CS{label}\arg{label\/} is the same as
-\CS{tag}\arg{label\/}\arg{counter}, where \meta{counter} is the current
-section or chapter number, as appropriate. For example you might have:
-\TeXexample
-\section{Supersymmetry and Supergravity \label{sect.SUSY}}
-|endTeXexample
-\noindent
-To refer to that section later on you would say |\use{sect.SUSY}|.
-Note that \CS{label} does not insert any prefix in front of the label,
-so you must include it explicitly if you want one.
-We suggest ``sect'' for sections, ``chapt'' for chapters, and so
-forth, but you are free to use whatever you want.
-
-
-%==================================================*
-\pagecheck{0.33\vsize}
-
-\subsection{Forward References}
-
-If you label an equation or a figure or a section you can refer to
-the number of that object later in the text, but what if you want to
-refer to the thing before it has been tagged? Then the label won't
-exist yet. This is called making a forward reference. To allow for
-this \TeXsis\ also writes the definition of every label to an auxiliary
-file, which has a name ending in |.aux|. The label will still be
-undefined the first time you make the forward reference, but the next
-time you run the document through \TeXsis\ it will automatically read in
-the auxiliary file at the beginning of the job and define the label.
-Thus on the second pass the label will already be defined when it is
-called for. Having to make a second pass may sound like extra work,
-but when you are editing a document and putting the finishing
-touches on it you will find you end up making the extra pass without
-thinking about it. Just don't delete the |.aux| file between runs.
-\index{forward references}
-
- If you try to reference a label that does not exist you'll be
-told so at the end of the run (when you say \cs{bye}) and another pass
-will be suggested. Undefined references are also noted in the log file
-when they occur, and the label itself is inserted into the output text
-in boldface to make it easier for you to track down the problem. In
-\cs{draft} mode the mark ``{\tt UNDEF}'' is also put in the right
-margin to help you find the problem.
-
-% Describe \twopass here, if we ever decide to publicize it
-
-
-
-%==================================================*
-\pagecheck{0.33\vsize}
-
-\subsection{Hypertext \label{sect.hypertext}}
-
-(Documentation for Hypertext linking will go here)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-%>>> EOF TXStags.doc <<<
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/texsis/base/index.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/texsis/base/index.tex
deleted file mode 100644
index dbb9a09bf13..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/texsis/base/index.tex
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,296 +0,0 @@
-%% file: index.tex - creating an index - TeXsis 2.18
-% @(#) $Id: index.tex,v 18.0 2000/05/16 22:37:11 myers Exp $
-%======================================================================*
-% index.tex -- Macros for creating an index using MakeIndex
-%
-% Use \index{key} or \idx{word} to make an entry in the index file
-% [\idx{word} is more or less the same as ``word\index{word}''].
-% At the end of the job the file \jobname.idx is the raw index file,
-% ready to be fed into the MakeIndex program to create the index.
-% The MakeIndex output file \jobname.ind is then fed back through TeX with
-% the output formatting macros below to print the final formatted index.
-%
-% To process the index file with MakeIndex the command is simply
-%
-% makeindex jobname.idx
-%
-% You can leave off the .idx extension for the raw file and makeindex
-% will assume it. This will produce the processed index file, called
-% \jobname.ind. To print the index you can either include it in
-% another pass of the full document with ``\input \jobname.ind'' or
-% print it separately by adding ``\input index'' to the begining of the
-% \jobname.ind file and running it through TeX.
-%
-% If you set \markindextrue then indexed words selected with \idx
-% will appear in the printed output inside a ruled box. This is
-% useful for draft copies when you are putting together the index,
-% but obviously you do not want to use it in a final copy.
-% The box does not interfere with or change the line spacing.
-%
-% These macros are completely compatible with Plain TeX, although
-% they can also be used with TeXsis (some of the macros used below
-% are a part of TeXsis). Note however that these macros support output
-% from MakeIndex in it's default LaTeX mode. You don't need a separate
-% style file for MakeIndex!
-%
-% For more information about how to make full use of MakeIndex read
-% the man page for makeindex(1) and/or the paper ``Index Preparation
-% and Processing'' by Pehong Chen and Michale A. Harrison,
-% Software: Practice and Experience, Vol 19, No. 9, Sep. 1988, pp. 897-915
-% (a copy is available at ftp://ftp.texsis.org/texsis/index/index.tex )
-%
-% It is possible to make more than one index by creating a few extra
-% macros based on the ones below. See the documentation at the end
-% of this file for details.
-%
-%======================================================================*
-% (C) Copyright 1992, 1999, 2000 by Eric Myers and Frank Paige.
-% This file is a part of TeXsis. Distribution and/or modifications
-% are allowed under the terms of the LaTeX Project Public License (LPPL).
-% See the file COPYING or ftp://ftp.texsis.org/texsis/LPPL
-%======================================================================*
-\message{- indexing macros}
-\catcode`@=11 % @ is a letter here to hide workings
-
-\newif\ifmarkindex \markindexfalse % put proof marks in text?
-\newif\ifmakeindex \makeindextrue % set false to suppress .idx output
-
-%---------------------------*
-% Index Entries:
-%
-% \idx{word} is the quickest way to make an index entry.
-% The word is put in the text and an index entry is made at the
-% same time. It is the same as typing ``word\index{word}''.
-% If \markintdextrue is selected the word appears in the text with a
-% box around it so you know it has been included in the index.
-
-
-\def\idx#1{% include a word in the index output file
- #1\index{#1}% % put word in text and \index it
- \ifmarkindex % proof marks?
- \llap{\lower\jot\vbox to 0pt{\vss % box it
- \tightboxit{\loosebox{\phantom{#1}}}}\hskip-\jot}%
- \fi} % put a ruled box around word
-
-
-% \index{key} makes an index entry for the given key.
-% Since MakeIndex can use special characters like @ | ! and " in the key
-% we must make sure that they are printed correctly to the raw index file.
-
-\def\index{% make an index entry for a given key
- \begingroup % turn MakeIndex special characters to letters
- \catcode`@=11 \catcode`"=11 \catcode`!=11 \catcode`|=11 \catcode`-=11
- \@index}
-
-\def\@index#1{% get the index entry and write it to the file
- \endgroup % special characters back to before
- \ifmakeindex % .idx file output enabled?
- \indexwrite\indexout{\indexentry{#1}}% write entry to file
- \fi}
-
-
-% \loosebox put a loose box around a box.
-% \tightboxit draws a rule box around the box #1 without any added space
-
-\def\loosebox#1{%
- \vbox{\vskip\jot
- \hbox{\hskip\jot #1\hskip\jot}%
- \vskip\jot}}
-
-\def\tightboxit#1{\vbox{\hrule\hbox{\vrule\vbox{#1}\vrule}\hrule}}
-
-%---------------------------*
-% Index Formatting (printing the processed index file)
-
-
-% The index is begun by \theindex or \begin{theindex} and ended
-% with \endtheindex or \end{theindex}
-
-
-\def\theindex{% begin a formatted index
- \begingroup
- \parskip = 0pt % no extra space between items
- \def\item{\indexitem{0pt}}% % level 0 item separator
- \def\subitem{\indexitem{20pt}}% % level 1 item separator
- \def\subsubitem{\indexitem{30pt}}% % level 2 item separator
- \def\indexspace{\medskip}% % intergroup vertical space
- \def\setcounter##1##2{\global\csname ##1no\endcsname=##2}% to set page counter
- \def\bold##1{{\bf ##1}}% % boldface for |bold
- \def\italic##1{{\it ##1}}% % italics for |italic
- \def\slanted##1{{\sl ##1}}% % slanted for |slanted
- \def\see##1##2{{\it see} ##1}% % italics for |see
- \def\seealso##1{{\it see also}##1}%% italics for |seealso
- \def\also##1{{\it see also}##1}% % italics for |also
- }
-
-\def\indexitem#1{% how to make an entry for an item in the index
- \vskip 0pt % force vertical mode
- \hangindent=30pt\hangafter=1 % hanging indent for extra lines
- \noindent\hskip #1} % level N item separator
-
-\def\endtheindex{% end a formatted index
- \endgroup}
-
-
-% If you don't have MakeIndex you can still make a sorted index.
-% (Even though it may not look as good. If you are really going to
-% do it right, do get MakeIndex). The Unix sort(1) command or a similar
-% program can be used to sort the \jobname.idx file. You can then
-% edit the file to collect all the page numbers for a key into
-% one \indexentry, like ``\indexentry{foo}{29,47-48}'' , and \indexentry
-% will format the items as best it can.
-
-
-\def\indexentry#1#2{% prints an index entry (from the raw file)
- \indexitem{0pt}#1, #2} % keyword, page number
-
-
-%-------------------------*
-% Simple \begin .. \end support (like in LaTeX): There is a conspiracy
-% to preserve job security for typists by making sure one has to
-% type \begin{thing} and \end{thing} everywhere. In TeXsis it's just
-% \thing and \endthing, so here we just make \begin{thing} become \thing
-% and \end{thing} become \endthing. Then we can use MakeIndex in it's
-% default mode, even though that is for LaTeX.
-% Note: we don't check that you begin and end the same thing. After all,
-% you might want to say \begin{midfigure} followed by \end{figure}.
-
-
-\def\begin#1{% \begin{foo} just becomes \foo
- \begingroup % changes to \end are temporary
- \let\end=\endbegin % now \end will end the \begin
- \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\relax\relax % is \thing defined?
- \def\next{\beginerror{#1}}% NO: flag an error
- \else %
- \def\next{\csname #1\endcsname}% YES: just invoke it
- \fi\next}
-
-\def\endbegin#1{% \end{foo} just becomes \endfoo
- \endgroup % now \end goes back to normal
- \expandafter\ifx\csname end#1\endcsname\relax\relax % is \endthing defined?
- \def\next{\begingroup\beginerror{end#1}}% % NO: flag an error
- \else %
- \def\next{\csname end#1\endcsname}% YES: just invoke it
- \fi\next}
-
-
-\newhelp\beginhelp{begin:
- The \string\begin\space or \string\end\space marked above is for a^^M%
- non-existant environment. Check for spelling errors and such.}
-
-
-\def\beginerror#1{% \begin{foo} or \end{foo} fail if no \foo or \endfoo
- \endgroup % make sure \end is back to normal
- \errhelp=\beginhelp % longer help message
- \newlinechar=`\^^M % ^^M is line break
- \errmessage{Undefined environment for \string\begin\space or \string\end}}
-
-
-%---------------------------*
-% Index file output:
-%
-
-\newwrite\indexout % raw index output file
-
-
-% \indexinit will only get called once. It opens the output file,
-% write an identifying comment to it, and then undefines itself.
-
-\def\indexinit{% open and initialize raw index file
- \immediate\openout\indexout=\jobname.idx % open file as \jobname.idx
- \immediate\write\indexout{\@comment Raw index file ``\jobname.idx''}%
- \immediate\write\indexout{\@comment ====================================}%
- \gdef\indexinit{\relax}} % so we initialize only once
-
-% \@comment is for writing % to a file. It expands to '% '.
-
-{\catcode`\%=11 \gdef\@comment{% }}
-
-
-% \indexwrite writes an entry to the raw index file named by #1. Argument
-% #2 is the \indexentry{foo}, so it is not expanded (which is why this is so
-% complicated), while \@indexpage is the page number, which *is* expanded.
-
-\def\indexwrite#1#2{% % write entry to raw index file
- \indexinit % open output file if not already
- \def\@finwrite{\write#1}% % to write to index output file (#1)
- \begingroup % begin collecting tokens on stack
- \aftergroup\@finwrite % put \write\indexout on stack
- \aftergroup{\relax % put { on stack
- \@stackNX#2\@endstack % puts \noexpand\token... on stack
- \aftergroup\@indexpage % expanded {enclosed} page number
- \aftergroup}\relax % put } on stack
- \endgroup} % now dump from stack to \write
-
-\def\@indexpage{{\folio}} % to get the {enclosed} page number
-
-% Saying \@stackNX <stuff>\@endstack will take all the tokens
-% in <stuff> and put them on the stack, with every control sequence
-% prefaced by \noexpand. \indexwrite uses this for unexpanded write.
-
-\def\@stackNX{\futurelet\next\@stackswitch}
-
-\def\@stackswitch{% decides what to do with various types of tokens
- \ifx\next\@endstack\relax % if \@endstack then we'll quit
- \else\ifcat\noexpand\next\@stoken % if token is a space,
- \aftergroup\space\let\next=\@eatnext% write \space and eat token
- \else\ifcat\noexpand\next\bgroup % if token is \bgroup
- \aftergroup{\let\next=\@eatnext % write { and eat it
- \else\ifcat\noexpand\next\egroup % if token is \egroup
- \aftergroup}\let\next=\@eatnext % write a } and eat it
- \else % otherwize
- \let\next=\@stacktoken % just copy to the stack with \NX
- \fi\fi\fi\fi % end all \if's
- \next} % do it to the token
-
-\def\\{\global\let\@stoken= }\\
-
-% \@eatnext ignores the \next token and goes on to the
-% one following in the argument list
-
-\def\@eatnext{\afterassignment\@stackNX\let\next= }
-
-% \@stacktoken copies one token to the stack with \aftergroup,
-% then calls \@stackNX to get the one following.
-
-\long\def\@stacktoken#1{% write token to stack, unexpanded
- \ifcat\noexpand#1\relax % if token is a control sequence
- \aftergroup\noexpand % preface with \noexpand
- \else\ifcat\noexpand#1\noexpand~\relax % if token is an active character
- \aftergroup\noexpand % preface with \noexpand
- \fi\fi %
- \aftergroup#1\relax % put the next token on the list
- \@stackNX} % do next token from argument...
-
-\def\@endstack\@endstack{} % just marks the end of token list
-
-\catcode`@=12 % @ goes back to \other, not a letter
-
-%---------------------------*
-% MULTIPLE INDICES:
-%
-% If you want more than one index I can't guess how you will want to
-% use them, so all I can do is tell you how to use the macros above to
-% create another (or several other) additional indices:
-%
-% 1) Create another output file and open it, with something like:
-%
-% \newwrite\otherindexout
-% \immediate\openout\otherindexout=other.idx
-%
-% 2) Define a macro to make the entry to the second index, following
-% the pattern of \index and \@index above, but using the other index
-% file (but don't use @ in a macro name). For example:
-%
-% \def\OtherIndex{\begingroup % special characters letters
-% \catcode`@=11 \catcode`"=11 \catcode`!=11 \catcode`|=11
-% \catcode`-=11
-% \Oindex}
-%
-% \def\Oindex#1{\endgroup % special characters return
-% \indexwrite\otherindexout{\indexentry{#1}}}
-%
-% Then saying \OtherIndex{word} will make an entry into the alternate
-% index for ``word''.
-%
-%>>> EOF index.tex <<<
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/texsis/base/letr b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/texsis/base/letr
deleted file mode 100644
index ad4697fc80e..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/texsis/base/letr
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,230 +0,0 @@
-#!/bin/sh
-#
-# letr - a Unix shell script for printing a letter with an addressed
-# envelope, using TeXsis (the TeX macros for physicists). The syntax is:
-#
-# letr [ -q ][ -Pprinter ] [ dvips flags ] [ filename ]
-#
-# where "filename" is the name for your TeX job. The TeX instructions
-# for creating your letter will be put in the file filename.tex, while
-# the instructions for creating the printed envelope will be in the
-# file filename.env. If no name is given the default is "TeXletter".
-#
-# You first edit your letter with your default EDITOR, then it is run
-# through TeXsis. You can preview the letter, and then choose whether
-# or not to print it, and whether or not to print the addressed envelope.
-#
-# Use the -q flag to bypass the editor, and -P to specify an alternate
-# printer. All other flags are passed to dvips. So, for example, if
-# you give the -m flag it will go to dvips and the letter (not just the
-# envelope) will be printed in manual feed mode, so you can put your own
-# paper in the printer for it.
-#
-# To get the envelope to print in landscape mode and with manual feed
-# we call dvips explicitly. If you need to, change the DVIPS command
-# and ENVFLAGS below to match your local site configuration.
-#
-# Eric Myers <myers@umich.edu> - 27 January 1996
-# Department of Physics, University of Michigan, Ann Arbor
-# @(#) $Id: letr,v 1.7 2000/06/01 20:02:30 myers Exp $
-######################################################################
-# Local Customization:
-
-EDITOR=${EDITOR-"emacs"} # editor (default to emacs)
-DVIVIEW=${DVIVIEW-"xdvi"} # dvi file viewer (dviview is more general)
-DVIPS=${DVIPS-"dvips -q"} # general dvips command
-ENVLFLAGS="-m -t landscape" # dvips flags for the envelope
-
-#====================(end of customization)====================*
-
-## Parse command line arguments. Unrecognized ones are saved for dvips
-
-FNAME=${FNAME-"TeXletter"} # name of file to process
-FLAGS=" " # flags to pass on to dvips
-NOEDIT=""
-
-while [ $# != 0 ]
-do case "$1" in
- -P*) PRINTER=`echo $1 | tail +3c` # strip off the -P
- LPDEST=$PRINTER ;;
- -q) NOEDIT="NOEDIT" ;;
- -*) FLAGS="$FLAGS $1" ;;
- *) FNAME="$1" ;;
- esac
- shift
-done
-
-PROG=`basename $0`
-
-###############
-# Determine which printer we shall use, and how. In NeXTStep the lpr
-# command ignores the $PRINTER variable, so we will correct for that
-# here by always using `lpr -P$PRINTER`, with "Local_Printer" as the
-# default. For other Unix change default printer to 'lp'. For SYSV
-# we need to use "lp -d$LPDEST" instead.
-
-if [ -x /usr/ucb/lpr ]; then
- if [ -x /sdmach ]; then # NeXTStep
- PRINTER=${PRINTER-"Local_Printer"}
- else # other BSD
- PRINTER=${PRINTER-"lp"}
- fi
- # The -h option suppresses the banner page
- LPR="/usr/ucb/lpr -h -P$PRINTER"
-fi
-
-if [ -x /usr/bin/lpr ]; then # BSD (Linux, Solaris)
- PRINTER=${PRINTER-"lp"}
- # The -h option suppresses the banner page
- LPR="/usr/bin/lpr -h -P$PRINTER"
-fi
-
-if [ -x /usr/bin/lp ]; then # SYSV (eg. HP-UX)
- LPDEST=${LPDEST-"lp"}
- # The -onb option suppresses the banner page on HP LaserJet3/4 (and 5?)
- LPR="/usr/bin/lp -onb -d${LPDEST} "
-fi
-
-if [ ! $?LPR ]; then
- echo "Cannot determine lpr/lp command."
- exit 2
-fi
-
-## Figure out line end suppression for BSD or SYSV
-
-if [ "`echo 'EC\c'; echo HO`" = "ECHO" ]; then
- SYSVNL="\c"; BSDNL="" # System V line control
-else
- BSDNL="-n"; SYSVNL="" # BSD line control
-fi
-
-## the function `ask_def default text` asks a question and returns
-## the user's answer, using the default if just <cr> is pressed.
-
-ask_def () {
- DEFAULT=$1 ; shift
- echo ${BSDNL} "$* [${DEFAULT}] ${SYSVNL}"
- read ANS
- if [ -z "$ANS" ]; then ANS=$DEFAULT ; fi
- export ANS; }
-
-
-## Strip off .tex from the filename, if it is included.
-## Any trailing . is also removed (helps for tcsh filename completion).
-
-FNAME=`basename $FNAME .tex` # get just the file name, strip .tex
-FNAME=`basename $FNAME .` # get just the file name, strip "."
-
-## If the named TeX file does not exist, create it with a simple
-## TeXsis \letter template
-
-if [ ! -f ${FNAME}.tex ]; then
-cat >${FNAME}.tex <<End-of-Text
-\\texsis
-\\letter
-\\withEnvelope % if you also want to print an envelope
-\\def\\Email{}% <-- set e-mail address if you want it in the letterhead
-\\letterhead{}% <-- phone number or extension goes here
-\\address
-NAME OF ADDRESSEE HERE
-ADDRESS GOES HERE
-AS MANY LINES AS YOU NEED
-
-\\body
-Dear WHOEVER,
-
-BODY OF LETTER GOES HERE.
-
-AS MANY PARAGRAPHS AS YOU WANT.
-
-\\closing
-Sincerely,
-YOUR NAME HERE
-
-\bye
-End-of-Text
-fi
-
-
-## Edit the file with EDITOR, unless -q flag was given
-
-if [ -z "$NOEDIT" ]; then
- if $EDITOR ${FNAME}.tex
- then echo " "
- else
- echo "${PROG}: ${EDITOR} editing error ($?). Bailing out..."
- exit 1
- fi
-fi
-
-if [ ! -f ${FNAME}.tex ]; then exit 0 ; fi
-
-## Process through TeXsis
-
-if [ -z "$NOEDIT" ]; then
- ask_def yes "Process file ${FNAME}.tex through TeXsis? "
-else
- ANS="yes"
-fi
-
-case $ANS in
- yes|Y|y|YES|Yes)
- if texsis ${FNAME}.tex
- then
- echo " "
- else
- echo "${PROG}: TeXsis error ($?). Bailing out..."
- exit 1
- fi ;;
- *) exit 0
-esac
-
-
-## Preview the .dvi file, if desired
-
-if [ -f ${FNAME}.dvi ]; then
-
- ask_def yes "Do you want to preview the letter? "
- case $ANS in
- yes|Y|y|YES|Yes) echo " "
- $DVIVIEW ${FNAME} #>/dev/null 2>&1
- sleep 1 ;;
- esac
-
- echo " "
- echo "Default printer is '${PRINTER}'."
- ask_def yes "Do you want to print this now? "
- case $ANS in
- yes|Y|y|YES|Yes)
- ${DVIPS} ${FLAGS} ${FNAME}.dvi # >/dev/null 2>&1
- echo "Printing the letter..."
- ${LPR} ${FNAME}.ps ;;
- *);;
- esac
-
-fi
-
-
-## Process envelope, if desired and it exists
-
-if [ -f ${FNAME}.env ]; then
-
- ask_def yes "Do you want to print the envelope? "
- case $ANS in
- yes|Y|y|YES|Yes)
- /bin/rm -rf ${FNAME}.dvi ${FNAME}.ps
- texsis ${FNAME}.env
- $DVIPS ${FLAGS} ${ENVLFLAGS} ${FNAME}.dvi ## >/dev/null 2>&1
- echo "Printing the envelope... Please feed the printer. "
- ${LPR} ${FNAME}.ps
- esac
-
-else
- echo "No envelope file ${FNAME}.env was found."
-fi
-
-# Clean up: remove .dvi file, .ps file, and .log file (but keep .env file).
-
-/bin/rm -f ${FNAME}.dvi ${FNAME}.log ${FNAME}.ps
-
-exit 0
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/texsis/base/penguin.eps b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/texsis/base/penguin.eps
deleted file mode 100644
index af54d9dfec9..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/texsis/base/penguin.eps
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,507 +0,0 @@
-%!PS-Adobe-2.0 EPSF-1.2
-%%Title: penguin.ps
-%%Creator: FeynDiagram 2.4 by Bill Dimm
-%%CreationDate: Dec 15 10:44
-%%For:paige paige
-%%Pages: 1
-%%DocumentFonts:
-%%BoundingBox: 100 299 513 650
-save
-countdictstack
-mark
-newpath
-/showpage {} def
-%%EndProlog
-%%Page 1 1
-%!
-% @(#) abbrev.ps 1.10@(#)
-
-/CP /charpath load def
-/CF /currentflat load def
-/CPT /currentpoint load def
-/C2 /curveto load def
-/RC2 /rcurveto load def
-/FP /flattenpath load def
-/L2 /lineto load def
-/M2 /moveto load def
-/NP /newpath load def
-/PBX /pathbbox load def
-/RM2 /rmoveto load def
-/SD /setdash load def
-/SLC /setlinecap load def
-/SLW /setlinewidth load def
-/S /show load def
-/ST /stroke load def
-
-% @(#) max.ps 1.9@(#)
-
-/max { 2 copy lt {exch} if pop } bind def
-
-% @(#) arrow.ps 1.9@(#)
-
-/tan
- {
- dup
- sin exch cos div
- } bind def
-
-/arrow_dict 12 dict def
-arrow_dict /arrow_mtrxstor matrix put
-
-/arrow
- {
- arrow_dict
- begin
-
- /alpha exch def
- /y2 exch def
- /x2 exch def
- /y1 exch def
- /x1 exch def
-
- /arrow_oldmtrx arrow_mtrxstor currentmatrix def
-
- /dx x2 x1 sub def
- /dy y2 y1 sub def
-
- /len dx dx mul dy dy mul add sqrt def
-
- /theta 1 alpha tan atan def
- /rad len alpha tan mul
- theta sin alpha tan theta cos -1 add mul add div def
-
- x1 y1 translate
- dy dx atan rotate
-
- len 0 M2
- rad neg 0 rad theta 360 theta sub arcn
- closepath
-
- arrow_oldmtrx setmatrix
- end
- } bind def
-
-% @(#) text.ps 1.9@(#)
-
-/text_dict 20 dict def
-text_dict /text_mtrxstor matrix put
-
-/SF* { exch findfont exch scalefont setfont } bind def
-
-systemdict /selectfont known
- { /SF /selectfont load def }
- { /SF /SF* load def }
- ifelse
-
-/txtsta
- {
- text_dict begin
-
- /angle exch def
- /y exch def
- /x exch def
-
- /text_oldmtrx text_mtrxstor currentmatrix def
-
- x y translate
- angle rotate
- } bind def
-
-
-/txtend
- {
- text_oldmtrx setmatrix
- end
- } bind def
-
-save
-
-NP
-1.638 SLW
-1 SLC
-306 314.1 M2
-118.8 314.1 L2
-ST
-1 SLW
-0 SLC
-217.805 314.1 206.995 314.1 22 arrow
-fill
-NP
-1.638 SLW
-1 SLC
-493.2 314.1 M2
-306 314.1 L2
-ST
-1 SLW
-0 SLC
-405.005 314.1 394.195 314.1 22 arrow
-fill
-NP
-1.638 SLW
-1 SLC
-120.028 590.132 112.239 269.373 338.007 arc
-ST
-1 SLW
-0 SLC
-177.719 493.855 186.711 499.849 22 arrow
-fill
-NP
-1.638 SLW
-1 SLC
-306 560.775 82.875 188.797 351.203 arc
-ST
-NP
-1.638 SLW
-1 SLC
-491.971 590.132 112.239 201.993 270.627 arc
-ST
-1 SLW
-0 SLC
-425.289 499.849 434.281 493.855 22 arrow
-fill
-NP
-1.638 SLW
-1 SLC
-488.676 396 65.676 86.0501 273.95 arc
-ST
-1 SLW
-0 SLC
-423.222 401.399 423.222 390.601 22 arrow
-fill
-NP
-1.638 SLW
-1 SLC
-306 314.1 M2
-299.762 314.724 294.862 319.696 294.862 326.817 C2
-294.862 333.939 299.762 338.911 306 339.535 C2
-314.131 340.348 317.138 338.436 317.138 335.465 C2
-317.138 332.494 314.131 330.583 306 331.396 C2
-ST
-1 setgray
-4.914 SLW
-0 SLC
-[] 0 SD
-306 331.396 M2
-299.762 332.019 294.862 336.991 294.862 344.113 C2
-ST
-0 setgray
-1.638 SLW
-1 SLC
-306 331.396 M2
-299.762 332.019 294.862 336.991 294.862 344.113 C2
-294.862 351.235 299.762 356.207 306 356.83 C2
-314.131 357.644 317.138 355.732 317.138 352.761 C2
-317.138 349.79 314.131 347.878 306 348.691 C2
-ST
-1 setgray
-4.914 SLW
-0 SLC
-[] 0 SD
-306 348.691 M2
-299.762 349.315 294.862 354.287 294.862 361.409 C2
-ST
-0 setgray
-1.638 SLW
-1 SLC
-306 348.691 M2
-299.762 349.315 294.862 354.287 294.862 361.409 C2
-294.862 368.53 299.762 373.502 306 374.126 C2
-314.131 374.939 317.138 373.027 317.138 370.057 C2
-317.138 367.086 314.131 365.174 306 365.987 C2
-ST
-1 setgray
-4.914 SLW
-0 SLC
-[] 0 SD
-306 365.987 M2
-299.762 366.611 294.862 371.583 294.862 378.704 C2
-ST
-0 setgray
-1.638 SLW
-1 SLC
-306 365.987 M2
-299.762 366.611 294.862 371.583 294.862 378.704 C2
-294.862 385.826 299.762 390.798 306 391.422 C2
-314.131 392.235 317.138 390.323 317.138 387.352 C2
-317.138 384.381 314.131 382.47 306 383.283 C2
-ST
-1 setgray
-4.914 SLW
-0 SLC
-[] 0 SD
-306 383.283 M2
-299.762 383.906 294.862 388.878 294.862 396 C2
-ST
-0 setgray
-1.638 SLW
-1 SLC
-306 383.283 M2
-299.762 383.906 294.862 388.878 294.862 396 C2
-294.862 403.122 299.762 408.094 306 408.717 C2
-314.131 409.53 317.138 407.619 317.138 404.648 C2
-317.138 401.677 314.131 399.765 306 400.578 C2
-ST
-1 setgray
-4.914 SLW
-0 SLC
-[] 0 SD
-306 400.578 M2
-299.762 401.202 294.862 406.174 294.862 413.296 C2
-ST
-0 setgray
-1.638 SLW
-1 SLC
-306 400.578 M2
-299.762 401.202 294.862 406.174 294.862 413.296 C2
-294.862 420.417 299.762 425.389 306 426.013 C2
-314.131 426.826 317.138 424.914 317.138 421.943 C2
-317.138 418.973 314.131 417.061 306 417.874 C2
-ST
-1 setgray
-4.914 SLW
-0 SLC
-[] 0 SD
-306 417.874 M2
-299.762 418.498 294.862 423.47 294.862 430.591 C2
-ST
-0 setgray
-1.638 SLW
-1 SLC
-306 417.874 M2
-299.762 418.498 294.862 423.47 294.862 430.591 C2
-294.862 437.713 299.762 442.685 306 443.309 C2
-314.131 444.122 317.138 442.21 317.138 439.239 C2
-317.138 436.268 314.131 434.356 306 435.17 C2
-ST
-1 setgray
-4.914 SLW
-0 SLC
-[] 0 SD
-306 435.17 M2
-299.762 435.793 294.862 440.765 294.862 447.887 C2
-ST
-0 setgray
-1.638 SLW
-1 SLC
-306 435.17 M2
-299.762 435.793 294.862 440.765 294.862 447.887 C2
-294.862 455.009 299.762 459.981 306 460.604 C2
-314.131 461.417 317.138 459.506 317.138 456.535 C2
-317.138 453.564 314.131 451.652 306 452.465 C2
-ST
-1 setgray
-4.914 SLW
-0 SLC
-[] 0 SD
-306 452.465 M2
-299.762 453.089 294.862 458.061 294.862 465.183 C2
-ST
-0 setgray
-1.638 SLW
-1 SLC
-306 452.465 M2
-299.762 453.089 294.862 458.061 294.862 465.183 C2
-294.862 472.304 299.762 477.276 306 477.9 C2
-ST
-NP
-1.638 SLW
-1 SLC
-224.1 548.1 M2
-235.781 550.101 236.647 553.765 227.389 561.308 C2
-218.13 568.852 220.005 573.416 231.893 572.273 C2
-243.781 571.13 245.74 574.346 239.273 584.386 C2
-232.806 594.427 236.003 598.186 246.952 593.417 C2
-257.901 588.648 260.76 591.098 257.721 602.648 C2
-254.683 614.197 258.887 616.781 267.82 608.855 C2
-276.753 600.929 280.231 602.373 280.919 614.296 C2
-281.608 626.219 286.405 627.374 292.444 617.07 C2
-298.483 606.767 302.236 607.063 306.584 618.186 C2
-310.933 629.309 315.852 628.921 318.402 617.253 C2
-320.952 605.586 324.612 604.705 332.192 613.934 C2
-339.772 623.163 344.329 621.27 343.139 609.387 C2
-341.95 597.504 345.157 595.532 355.223 601.959 C2
-365.289 608.386 369.035 605.175 364.223 594.245 C2
-359.411 583.314 361.85 580.446 373.412 583.439 C2
-384.973 586.432 387.541 582.218 379.58 573.316 C2
-371.618 564.414 373.049 560.931 384.969 560.196 C2
-396.889 559.46 398.025 554.658 387.9 548.1 C2
-ST
-114.12 477.9 0 txtsta
-0 0 M2
-CF dup 5 mul setflat
-CPT
-/Times-Roman 28.08 SF
-(s) true CP
-FP PBX
-3 -1 roll sub
-3 1 roll sub neg
--1 mul 2 1 roll -0.5 mul
-NP
-4 2 roll M2 RM2
-setflat
-/Times-Roman 28.08 SF
-(s) S
-txtend
-114.12 314.1 0 txtsta
-0 0 M2
-CF dup 5 mul setflat
-CPT
-/Times-Roman 28.08 SF
-(d) true CP
-FP PBX
-3 -1 roll sub
-3 1 roll sub neg
--1 mul 2 1 roll -0.5 mul
-NP
-4 2 roll M2 RM2
-setflat
-/Times-Roman 28.08 SF
-() S
-CF dup 5 mul setflat
-CPT
-/Times-Roman 28.08 SF
-(d) true CP
-FP PBX
-7 -1 roll setflat
-4.212 add
-3 -1 roll pop dup 3 1 roll
-NP M2 1.9656 SLW
-L2 ST
-M2
-/Times-Roman 28.08 SF
-(d) S
-txtend
-324.72 396 0 txtsta
-0 0 M2
-/Times-Roman 28.08 SF
-(g) S
-txtend
-306 489.6 0 txtsta
-0 0 M2
-CF dup 5 mul setflat
-CPT
-/Times-Roman 28.08 SF
-(u, c, t) true CP
-FP PBX
-3 -1 roll sub
-3 1 roll sub neg
--0.5 mul 2 1 roll 0 mul
-NP
-4 2 roll M2 RM2
-setflat
-/Times-Roman 28.08 SF
-(u, c, t) S
-txtend
-306 630 0 txtsta
-0 0 M2
-CF dup 5 mul setflat
-CPT
-/Times-Roman 28.08 SF
-(W) true CP
-FP PBX
-3 -1 roll sub
-3 1 roll sub neg
--0.5 mul 2 1 roll 0 mul
-NP
-4 2 roll M2 RM2
-setflat
-/Times-Roman 28.08 SF
-(W) S
-txtend
-497.88 477.9 0 txtsta
-0 0 M2
-CF dup 5 mul setflat
-CPT
-/Times-Roman 28.08 SF
-(d) true CP
-FP PBX
-3 -1 roll sub
-3 1 roll sub neg
-0 mul 2 1 roll -0.2 mul
-NP
-4 2 roll M2 RM2
-setflat
-/Times-Roman 28.08 SF
-(d) S
-txtend
-497.88 461.52 0 txtsta
-0 0 M2
-CF dup 5 mul setflat
-CPT
-/Times-Roman 28.08 SF
-(u) true CP
-FP PBX
-3 -1 roll sub
-3 1 roll sub neg
-0 mul 2 1 roll -0.8 mul
-NP
-4 2 roll M2 RM2
-setflat
-/Times-Roman 28.08 SF
-() S
-CF dup 5 mul setflat
-CPT
-/Times-Roman 28.08 SF
-(u) true CP
-FP PBX
-7 -1 roll setflat
-4.212 add
-3 -1 roll pop dup 3 1 roll
-NP M2 1.9656 SLW
-L2 ST
-M2
-/Times-Roman 28.08 SF
-(u) S
-txtend
-497.88 330.48 0 txtsta
-0 0 M2
-CF dup 5 mul setflat
-CPT
-/Times-Roman 28.08 SF
-(u) true CP
-FP PBX
-3 -1 roll sub
-3 1 roll sub neg
-0 mul 2 1 roll -0.2 mul
-NP
-4 2 roll M2 RM2
-setflat
-/Times-Roman 28.08 SF
-(u) S
-txtend
-497.88 314.1 0 txtsta
-0 0 M2
-CF dup 5 mul setflat
-CPT
-/Times-Roman 28.08 SF
-(d) true CP
-FP PBX
-3 -1 roll sub
-3 1 roll sub neg
-0 mul 2 1 roll -0.8 mul
-NP
-4 2 roll M2 RM2
-setflat
-/Times-Roman 28.08 SF
-() S
-CF dup 5 mul setflat
-CPT
-/Times-Roman 28.08 SF
-(d) true CP
-FP PBX
-7 -1 roll setflat
-4.212 add
-3 -1 roll pop dup 3 1 roll
-NP M2 1.9656 SLW
-L2 ST
-M2
-/Times-Roman 28.08 SF
-(d) S
-txtend
-restore
-showpage
-%%Trailer
-cleartomark
-countdictstack exch sub { end } repeat
-restore
-%%EOF
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/texsis/base/penguin2.eps b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/texsis/base/penguin2.eps
deleted file mode 100644
index 46819fc95ef..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/texsis/base/penguin2.eps
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,1041 +0,0 @@
-%!PS-Adobe-3.0 EPSF-3.0
-%%Creator: Adobe Illustrator(TM) 3.2
-%%For: (Neal Tucker) (ntucker@adobe.com)
-%%Title: (penguin.eps)
-%%CreationDate: (4/29/96) (8:20 AM)
-%%BoundingBox: 4 2 221 258
-%%DocumentProcessColors: Black
-%%DocumentSuppliedResources: procset Adobe_packedarray 2.0 0
-%%+ procset Adobe_cshow 1.1 0
-%%+ procset Adobe_customcolor 1.0 0
-%%+ procset Adobe_IllustratorA_AI3 1.0 1
-%AI3_ColorUsage: Black&White
-%AI3_TemplateBox: 306 396 306 396
-%AI3_TileBox: 31 31 583 761
-%AI3_DocumentPreview: Header
-%%EndComments
-%%BeginProlog
-%%BeginResource: procset Adobe_packedarray 2.0 0
-%%Title: (Packed Array Operators)
-%%Version: 2.0
-%%CreationDate: (8/2/90) ()
-%%Copyright: ((C) 1987-1990 Adobe Systems Incorporated All Rights Reserved)
-userdict /Adobe_packedarray 5 dict dup begin put
-/initialize
-{
-/packedarray where
- {
- pop
- }
- {
- Adobe_packedarray begin
- Adobe_packedarray
- {
- dup xcheck
- {
- bind
- } if
- userdict 3 1 roll put
- } forall
- end
- } ifelse
-} def
-/terminate
-{
-} def
-/packedarray
-{
-array astore readonly
-} def
-/setpacking
-{
-pop
-} def
-/currentpacking
-{
-false
-} def
-currentdict readonly pop end
-%%EndResource
-Adobe_packedarray /initialize get exec
-%%BeginResource: procset Adobe_cshow 1.1 0
-%%Title: (cshow Operator)
-%%Version: 1.1
-%%CreationDate: (1/23/89) ()
-%%Copyright: ((C) 1987-1990 Adobe Systems Incorporated All Rights Reserved)
-currentpacking true setpacking
-userdict /Adobe_cshow 3 dict dup begin put
-/initialize
-{
-/cshow where
- {
- pop
- }
- {
- userdict /Adobe_cshow_vars 1 dict dup begin put
- /_cshow
- {} def
- Adobe_cshow begin
- Adobe_cshow
- {
- dup xcheck
- {
- bind
- } if
- userdict 3 1 roll put
- } forall
- end
- end
- } ifelse
-} def
-/terminate
-{
-} def
-/cshow
-{
-exch
-Adobe_cshow_vars
- exch /_cshow
- exch put
- {
- 0 0 Adobe_cshow_vars /_cshow get exec
- } forall
-} def
-currentdict readonly pop end
-setpacking
-%%EndResource
-%%BeginResource: procset Adobe_customcolor 1.0 0
-%%Title: (Custom Color Operators)
-%%Version: 1.0
-%%CreationDate: (5/9/88) ()
-%%Copyright: ((C) 1987-1990 Adobe Systems Incorporated All Rights Reserved)
-currentpacking true setpacking
-userdict /Adobe_customcolor 5 dict dup begin put
-/initialize
-{
-/setcustomcolor where
- {
- pop
- }
- {
- Adobe_customcolor begin
- Adobe_customcolor
- {
- dup xcheck
- {
- bind
- } if
- pop pop
- } forall
- end
- Adobe_customcolor begin
- } ifelse
-} def
-/terminate
-{
-currentdict Adobe_customcolor eq
- {
- end
- } if
-} def
-/findcmykcustomcolor
-{
-5 packedarray
-} def
-/setcustomcolor
-{
-exch
-aload pop pop
-4
- {
- 4 index mul 4 1 roll
- } repeat
-5 -1 roll pop
-setcmykcolor
-} def
-/setoverprint
-{
-pop
-} def
-currentdict readonly pop end
-setpacking
-%%EndResource
-%%BeginResource: procset Adobe_IllustratorA_AI3 1.1 3
-%%Title: (Adobe Illustrator (R) Version 3.0 Abbreviated Prolog)
-%%Version: 1.1
-%%CreationDate: (3/7/1994) ()
-%%Copyright: ((C) 1987-1994 Adobe Systems Incorporated All Rights Reserved)
-currentpacking true setpacking
-userdict /Adobe_IllustratorA_AI3 61 dict dup begin put
-/initialize
-{
-userdict /Adobe_IllustratorA_AI3_vars 58 dict dup begin put
-/_lp /none def
-/_pf {} def
-/_ps {} def
-/_psf {} def
-/_pss {} def
-/_pjsf {} def
-/_pjss {} def
-/_pola 0 def
-/_doClip 0 def
-/cf currentflat def
-/_tm matrix def
-/_renderStart [/e0 /r0 /a0 /o0 /e1 /r1 /a1 /i0] def
-/_renderEnd [null null null null /i1 /i1 /i1 /i1] def
-/_render -1 def
-/_rise 0 def
-/_ax 0 def
-/_ay 0 def
-/_cx 0 def
-/_cy 0 def
-/_leading [0 0] def
-/_ctm matrix def
-/_mtx matrix def
-/_sp 16#020 def
-/_hyphen (-) def
-/_fScl 0 def
-/_cnt 0 def
-/_hs 1 def
-/_nativeEncoding 0 def
-/_useNativeEncoding 0 def
-/_tempEncode 0 def
-/_pntr 0 def
-/_tDict 2 dict def
-/_wv 0 def
-/Tx {} def
-/Tj {} def
-/CRender {} def
-/_AI3_savepage {} def
-/_gf null def
-/_cf 4 array def
-/_if null def
-/_of false def
-/_fc {} def
-/_gs null def
-/_cs 4 array def
-/_is null def
-/_os false def
-/_sc {} def
-/_i null def
-Adobe_IllustratorA_AI3 begin
-Adobe_IllustratorA_AI3
- {
- dup xcheck
- {
- bind
- } if
- pop pop
- } forall
-end
-end
-Adobe_IllustratorA_AI3 begin
-Adobe_IllustratorA_AI3_vars begin
-newpath
-} def
-/terminate
-{
-end
-end
-} def
-/_
-null def
-/ddef
-{
-Adobe_IllustratorA_AI3_vars 3 1 roll put
-} def
-/xput
-{
-dup load dup length exch maxlength eq
- {
- dup dup load dup
- length 2 mul dict copy def
- } if
-load begin def end
-} def
-/npop
-{
- {
- pop
- } repeat
-} def
-/sw
-{
-dup length exch stringwidth
-exch 5 -1 roll 3 index mul add
-4 1 roll 3 1 roll mul add
-} def
-/swj
-{
-dup 4 1 roll
-dup length exch stringwidth
-exch 5 -1 roll 3 index mul add
-4 1 roll 3 1 roll mul add
-6 2 roll /_cnt 0 ddef
-{1 index eq {/_cnt _cnt 1 add ddef} if} forall pop
-exch _cnt mul exch _cnt mul 2 index add 4 1 roll 2 index add 4 1 roll pop pop
-} def
-/ss
-{
-4 1 roll
- {
- 2 npop
- (0) exch 2 copy 0 exch put pop
- gsave
- false charpath currentpoint
- 4 index setmatrix
- stroke
- grestore
- moveto
- 2 copy rmoveto
- } exch cshow
-3 npop
-} def
-/jss
-{
-4 1 roll
- {
- 2 npop
- (0) exch 2 copy 0 exch put
- gsave
- _sp eq
- {
- exch 6 index 6 index 6 index 5 -1 roll widthshow
- currentpoint
- }
- {
- false charpath currentpoint
- 4 index setmatrix stroke
- }ifelse
- grestore
- moveto
- 2 copy rmoveto
- } exch cshow
-6 npop
-} def
-/sp
-{
- {
- 2 npop (0) exch
- 2 copy 0 exch put pop
- false charpath
- 2 copy rmoveto
- } exch cshow
-2 npop
-} def
-/jsp
-{
- {
- 2 npop
- (0) exch 2 copy 0 exch put
- _sp eq
- {
- exch 5 index 5 index 5 index 5 -1 roll widthshow
- }
- {
- false charpath
- }ifelse
- 2 copy rmoveto
- } exch cshow
-5 npop
-} def
-/pl
-{
-transform
-0.25 sub round 0.25 add exch
-0.25 sub round 0.25 add exch
-itransform
-} def
-/setstrokeadjust where
- {
- pop true setstrokeadjust
- /c
- {
- curveto
- } def
- /C
- /c load def
- /v
- {
- currentpoint 6 2 roll curveto
- } def
- /V
- /v load def
- /y
- {
- 2 copy curveto
- } def
- /Y
- /y load def
- /l
- {
- lineto
- } def
- /L
- /l load def
- /m
- {
- moveto
- } def
- }
- {
- /c
- {
- pl curveto
- } def
- /C
- /c load def
- /v
- {
- currentpoint 6 2 roll pl curveto
- } def
- /V
- /v load def
- /y
- {
- pl 2 copy curveto
- } def
- /Y
- /y load def
- /l
- {
- pl lineto
- } def
- /L
- /l load def
- /m
- {
- pl moveto
- } def
- }ifelse
-/d
-{
-setdash
-} def
-/cf {} def
-/i
-{
-dup 0 eq
- {
- pop cf
- } if
-setflat
-} def
-/j
-{
-setlinejoin
-} def
-/J
-{
-setlinecap
-} def
-/M
-{
-setmiterlimit
-} def
-/w
-{
-setlinewidth
-} def
-/H
-{} def
-/h
-{
-closepath
-} def
-/N
-{
-_pola 0 eq
- {
- _doClip 1 eq {clip /_doClip 0 ddef} if
- newpath
- }
- {
- /CRender {N} ddef
- }ifelse
-} def
-/n
-{N} def
-/F
-{
-_pola 0 eq
- {
- _doClip 1 eq
- {
- gsave _pf grestore clip newpath /_lp /none ddef _fc
- /_doClip 0 ddef
- }
- {
- _pf
- }ifelse
- }
- {
- /CRender {F} ddef
- }ifelse
-} def
-/f
-{
-closepath
-F
-} def
-/S
-{
-_pola 0 eq
- {
- _doClip 1 eq
- {
- gsave _ps grestore clip newpath /_lp /none ddef _sc
- /_doClip 0 ddef
- }
- {
- _ps
- }ifelse
- }
- {
- /CRender {S} ddef
- }ifelse
-} def
-/s
-{
-closepath
-S
-} def
-/B
-{
-_pola 0 eq
- {
- _doClip 1 eq
- gsave F grestore
- {
- gsave S grestore clip newpath /_lp /none ddef _sc
- /_doClip 0 ddef
- }
- {
- S
- }ifelse
- }
- {
- /CRender {B} ddef
- }ifelse
-} def
-/b
-{
-closepath
-B
-} def
-/W
-{
-/_doClip 1 ddef
-} def
-/*
-{
-count 0 ne
- {
- dup type (stringtype) eq {pop} if
- } if
-_pola 0 eq {newpath} if
-} def
-/u
-{} def
-/U
-{} def
-/q
-{
-_pola 0 eq {gsave} if
-} def
-/Q
-{
-_pola 0 eq {grestore} if
-} def
-/*u
-{
-_pola 1 add /_pola exch ddef
-} def
-/*U
-{
-_pola 1 sub /_pola exch ddef
-_pola 0 eq {CRender} if
-} def
-/D
-{pop} def
-/*w
-{} def
-/*W
-{} def
-/`
-{
-/_i save ddef
-6 1 roll 4 npop
-concat pop
-userdict begin
-/showpage {} def
-0 setgray
-0 setlinecap
-1 setlinewidth
-0 setlinejoin
-10 setmiterlimit
-[] 0 setdash
-/setstrokeadjust where {pop false setstrokeadjust} if
-newpath
-0 setgray
-false setoverprint
-} def
-/~
-{
-end
-_i restore
-} def
-/O
-{
-0 ne
-/_of exch ddef
-/_lp /none ddef
-} def
-/R
-{
-0 ne
-/_os exch ddef
-/_lp /none ddef
-} def
-/g
-{
-/_gf exch ddef
-/_fc
-{
-_lp /fill ne
- {
- _of setoverprint
- _gf setgray
- /_lp /fill ddef
- } if
-} ddef
-/_pf
-{
-_fc
-fill
-} ddef
-/_psf
-{
-_fc
-ashow
-} ddef
-/_pjsf
-{
-_fc
-awidthshow
-} ddef
-/_lp /none ddef
-} def
-/G
-{
-/_gs exch ddef
-/_sc
-{
-_lp /stroke ne
- {
- _os setoverprint
- _gs setgray
- /_lp /stroke ddef
- } if
-} ddef
-/_ps
-{
-_sc
-stroke
-} ddef
-/_pss
-{
-_sc
-ss
-} ddef
-/_pjss
-{
-_sc
-jss
-} ddef
-/_lp /none ddef
-} def
-/k
-{
-_cf astore pop
-/_fc
-{
-_lp /fill ne
- {
- _of setoverprint
- _cf aload pop setcmykcolor
- /_lp /fill ddef
- } if
-} ddef
-/_pf
-{
-_fc
-fill
-} ddef
-/_psf
-{
-_fc
-ashow
-} ddef
-/_pjsf
-{
-_fc
-awidthshow
-} ddef
-/_lp /none ddef
-} def
-/K
-{
-_cs astore pop
-/_sc
-{
-_lp /stroke ne
- {
- _os setoverprint
- _cs aload pop setcmykcolor
- /_lp /stroke ddef
- } if
-} ddef
-/_ps
-{
-_sc
-stroke
-} ddef
-/_pss
-{
-_sc
-ss
-} ddef
-/_pjss
-{
-_sc
-jss
-} ddef
-/_lp /none ddef
-} def
-/x
-{
-/_gf exch ddef
-findcmykcustomcolor
-/_if exch ddef
-/_fc
-{
-_lp /fill ne
- {
- _of setoverprint
- _if _gf 1 exch sub setcustomcolor
- /_lp /fill ddef
- } if
-} ddef
-/_pf
-{
-_fc
-fill
-} ddef
-/_psf
-{
-_fc
-ashow
-} ddef
-/_pjsf
-{
-_fc
-awidthshow
-} ddef
-/_lp /none ddef
-} def
-/X
-{
-/_gs exch ddef
-findcmykcustomcolor
-/_is exch ddef
-/_sc
-{
-_lp /stroke ne
- {
- _os setoverprint
- _is _gs 1 exch sub setcustomcolor
- /_lp /stroke ddef
- } if
-} ddef
-/_ps
-{
-_sc
-stroke
-} ddef
-/_pss
-{
-_sc
-ss
-} ddef
-/_pjss
-{
-_sc
-jss
-} ddef
-/_lp /none ddef
-} def
-/A
-{
-pop
-} def
-currentdict readonly pop end
-setpacking
-/annotatepage
-{
-} def
-%%EndResource
-%%EndProlog
-%%BeginSetup
-Adobe_cshow /initialize get exec
-Adobe_customcolor /initialize get exec
-Adobe_IllustratorA_AI3 /initialize get exec
-%%EndSetup
-0 A
-u
-*u
-0 O
-0 g
-0 i
-0 J 0 j 1 w 4 M []0 d
-%AI3_Note:
-0 D
-74.8907 215.0693 m
-74.041 243.9622 85.304 256.7226 108.6809 257.1476 c
-132.0577 257.5727 146.7214 245.2467 149.6966 229.0954 c
-152.6719 212.9441 150.9717 191.6925 156.9222 180.6416 c
-162.8727 169.5907 166.698 161.09 176.8988 148.339 c
-187.0996 135.588 193.4751 122.6245 196.4503 106.8983 c
-199.4255 91.172 201.1257 83.7339 193.4751 75.6583 c
-185.8245 67.5827 172.2234 54.4066 162.0226 69.2828 c
-156.9158 76.7302 156.362 85.9914 164.9978 87.9843 c
-170.5233 89.2594 174.4902 88.8343 178.5989 86.7092 c
-182.7076 84.584 183.6993 85.5757 178.7406 89.2594 c
-173.7819 92.943 172.7901 89.5427 174.4902 95.4932 c
-176.1904 101.4437 178.4436 112.1015 173.7682 123.8608 c
-171.6149 129.2767 164.3121 144.122 157.4349 147.7774 C
-156.799 148.1155 154.9871 148.8579 156.2138 147.3473 c
-158.0807 145.0483 167.9587 130.4785 170.7682 121.7774 c
-173.7716 112.4762 174.2069 103.5688 172.6484 97.9017 c
-171.09 92.2346 168.3981 89.9678 165.1395 89.9678 c
-161.8809 89.9678 158.9057 88.4093 158.9057 95.9182 c
-158.9057 103.4272 159.6849 114.7614 155.6471 124.3246 c
-151.6093 133.8879 146.7214 140.4759 145.6588 144.5137 c
-144.5962 148.5515 142.2585 159.3899 137.3706 165.5529 c
-132.4828 171.7159 130.3576 175.7537 132.9078 182.7667 c
-135.458 189.7798 133.5453 191.6925 128.4449 193.1801 c
-123.3445 194.6677 116.544 196.7929 114.8439 200.1931 c
-113.1437 203.5934 114.2063 210.3939 118.0316 212.0941 c
-121.8569 213.7942 128.2324 211.4565 128.4449 206.5686 c
-128.6575 201.6807 126.3198 199.1305 126.9573 198.068 c
-127.5949 197.0054 130.9951 195.3052 132.6953 197.2179 c
-134.3954 199.1305 134.8204 205.081 133.1203 210.6064 c
-131.4202 216.1319 130.5701 219.9572 124.4071 221.2323 c
-118.2441 222.5074 115.4814 222.0823 112.5062 218.257 c
-109.531 214.4317 108.2559 208.2688 109.1059 203.8059 c
-109.956 199.3431 108.2559 201.8933 105.2806 202.1058 c
-102.3054 202.3183 103.1555 202.5308 100.1802 202.3183 c
-97.205 202.1058 98.2676 204.0184 98.055 207.2062 c
-97.8425 210.3939 97.4175 216.9819 92.9546 219.5321 c
-88.4918 222.0823 80.8412 219.1071 81.0537 208.4813 c
-81.2662 197.8554 84.879 192.755 87.0042 196.5803 c
-89.1293 200.4056 88.0668 198.493 85.9416 200.1931 c
-83.8164 201.8933 82.3288 208.9063 84.6665 211.0315 c
-87.0042 213.1566 89.7669 213.1566 91.2545 211.8815 c
-92.7421 210.6064 95.0798 206.3561 94.6548 203.5934 c
-94.2297 200.8307 94.0172 200.6182 91.2545 198.7055 c
-88.4918 196.7929 87.4292 195.0927 84.2415 192.9676 c
-81.0537 190.8424 79.7786 185.9545 82.3288 184.6794 c
-84.879 183.4043 85.0915 183.6168 87.2167 180.4291 c
-89.3419 177.2413 92.9546 175.7537 101.8804 177.2413 c
-110.8061 178.7289 114.472 180.8449 121.2194 183.1918 c
-126.1073 184.8919 124.4071 184.6794 126.1073 186.5921 c
-127.8074 188.5047 130.5701 185.742 128.0199 184.0419 c
-125.4697 182.3417 119.7318 180.6416 115.4814 179.154 c
-111.2311 177.6663 106.3432 173.416 97.4175 173.841 c
-88.4918 174.2661 94.6548 174.0536 91.8921 174.2661 c
-89.1293 174.4786 87.8542 174.0536 90.8295 171.9284 c
-93.8047 169.8032 93.5922 169.1657 96.1424 168.3156 c
-98.6926 167.4655 102.0929 167.4655 106.1307 168.9532 c
-110.1685 170.4408 120.3693 174.9036 123.5571 177.0288 c
-126.7448 179.154 129.295 176.3912 126.1073 174.2661 c
-122.9195 172.1409 122.0694 172.7785 119.0942 170.8658 c
-116.119 168.9532 110.5935 165.7654 106.9808 162.3651 c
-103.368 158.9649 102.5179 158.7523 98.055 158.5398 c
-93.5922 158.3273 90.8295 163.0027 88.9168 165.1278 c
-87.0042 167.253 87.2167 168.5281 84.879 171.0783 c
-82.5413 173.6285 82.3288 172.991 81.9038 170.2283 c
-81.4787 167.4655 78.291 160.4525 75.5283 155.7771 c
-72.7655 151.1017 72.553 145.3638 72.9781 141.326 c
-73.4031 137.2882 72.3405 136.8631 69.1528 132.1878 c
-65.965 127.5124 60.6521 113.6988 59.802 109.2359 c
-58.952 104.7731 57.8894 95.6349 58.3144 90.3219 c
-58.7394 85.009 57.2518 83.9464 53.4265 87.5592 c
-49.6012 91.172 48.3261 95.2098 48.5386 100.5227 c
-48.7204 105.068 49.3516 108.2774 49.9349 109.9441 c
-50.5182 111.6108 49.9557 112.7983 48.7512 110.7236 c
-46.1324 106.2131 45.9884 98.3976 46.626 95.6349 c
-47.2635 92.8721 47.4761 87.9843 54.4891 81.3962 c
-61.5022 74.8082 71.703 65.67 80.2036 59.507 c
-88.7043 53.344 91.6795 45.6934 79.141 40.168 C
-87.0042 29.5421 91.2545 24.0167 87.8542 17.0037 C
-94.8673 21.0415 92.1685 30.5606 88.7682 33.1108 c
-85.368 35.661 87.4292 37.6178 90.4044 35.7051 c
-93.3797 33.7925 94.4423 29.9672 106.1307 30.1797 c
-117.8191 30.3922 130.4218 31.5766 137.4349 41.7774 c
-144.4479 51.9783 145.8017 43.3946 144.1016 37.4441 c
-142.4014 31.4936 138.2207 18.0662 144.8087 19.3413 C
-145.6588 27.2045 147.5715 34.005 147.5715 42.5057 c
-147.5715 51.0063 148.4349 55.1108 147.7682 67.4441 c
-147.1259 79.3277 152.2468 80.1211 157.5597 80.1211 c
-162.8727 80.1211 161.1725 76.7209 157.7723 76.9334 c
-154.372 77.1459 150.7592 75.8708 150.5467 67.1576 c
-150.3342 58.4444 150.5467 59.2945 152.0343 51.4314 c
-153.5219 43.5682 153.7344 41.2306 152.4593 32.5174 c
-151.1842 23.8042 150.1217 19.1288 155.8596 13.8159 c
-161.5976 8.503 170.3108 9.9906 174.7736 13.3909 c
-179.2365 16.7911 187.7371 24.6543 195.3877 27.2045 c
-203.0383 29.7547 211.114 31.6673 215.3643 35.9176 c
-219.6147 40.168 218.5521 43.1432 214.0892 45.4809 c
-209.6264 47.8186 205.376 46.756 201.9757 50.5813 c
-198.5755 54.4066 196.8753 62.9073 198.1504 67.3701 c
-199.4255 71.833 200.9132 69.9203 200.9132 66.7326 c
-200.9132 63.5448 201.1257 60.5696 204.3134 56.5318 c
-207.5012 52.494 210.4764 50.5813 215.5768 47.3936 c
-220.6772 44.2058 223.865 39.1054 217.4895 34.6425 c
-211.114 30.1797 207.5012 27.6295 202.1883 25.5043 c
-196.8753 23.3792 188.1622 18.2788 182.8492 12.9658 c
-177.5363 7.6529 174.5611 2.9776 164.1478 2.9776 c
-153.7344 2.9776 148.9787 5.4759 145.8713 11.6907 c
-143.7462 15.9411 142.6836 15.3035 137.7957 15.516 c
-132.9078 15.7286 116.544 15.9411 103.793 15.7286 c
-91.042 15.516 86.7917 13.3909 81.0537 8.7155 c
-75.3157 4.0401 73.1906 0.4273 62.3522 4.0401 c
-51.5139 7.6529 45.7759 11.6907 29.6246 14.8785 c
-13.4734 18.0662 22.1865 16.5786 12.4108 18.7038 c
-2.635 20.829 3.2726 25.5043 4.5477 29.3296 c
-5.8228 33.1549 9.0105 39.1054 6.2478 46.9685 c
-3.4851 54.8316 4.5477 62.9073 11.9857 62.9073 c
-19.4238 62.9073 26.4369 61.4197 29.4121 71.1954 c
-32.3874 80.9712 33.2374 73.3206 32.3874 70.7704 c
-31.5373 68.2202 31.1123 61.2071 24.5242 60.1446 c
-17.9362 59.082 16.4486 60.5696 12.4108 60.5696 c
-8.373 60.5696 6.6728 57.8069 8.798 53.1315 c
-10.9232 48.4561 13.2608 43.5682 12.8358 39.5304 c
-12.4108 35.4926 11.9857 34.005 9.0105 30.1797 c
-6.0353 26.3544 6.4603 24.4417 11.7732 23.1666 c
-17.0861 21.8915 26.6494 19.3413 35.5751 17.2162 c
-44.5008 15.091 45.1384 15.091 60.6521 11.0532 c
-76.1658 7.0154 80.4161 14.2409 81.6912 22.9541 c
-82.9664 31.6673 77.0159 39.9555 71.4904 48.2436 c
-65.965 56.5318 60.0145 66.095 52.789 74.8082 c
-45.5634 83.5214 41.3131 84.159 37.7003 82.2463 c
-34.0875 80.3337 33.4499 80.7587 33.2374 85.6466 c
-33.0249 90.5345 32.5999 93.7222 36.6377 100.9478 c
-40.6755 108.1734 44.2883 116.0365 48.5386 128.1499 c
-52.789 140.2634 56.6143 142.6011 63.8398 153.0144 c
-71.0654 163.4277 67.8777 159.3899 72.9781 166.4029 c
-78.0785 173.416 76.5908 172.1409 76.1658 183.1918 c
-75.7408 194.2427 75.3157 200.6182 74.8907 215.0693 c
-f
-1 D
-54.5971 128.6793 m
-55.6961 127.3382 57.2428 130.4814 58.871 131.6548 c
-60.3363 132.9959 60.9469 134.8818 60.6213 136.7258 c
-60.4584 137.7316 58.8303 137.3963 58.5046 137.0611 c
-57.5278 136.0552 57.7262 134.4523 57.0393 133.0378 c
-56.2252 131.3615 53.498 130.0204 54.5971 128.6793 c
-f
-145.951 173.0707 m
-148.2714 171.137 149.6701 169.4579 150.9452 172.3269 c
-152.2203 175.1958 152.2203 176.3647 149.1388 177.5335 c
-146.0573 178.7024 144.6759 179.9775 143.2946 181.5713 c
-141.9132 183.1652 141.4224 180.4368 142.5507 177.746 c
-143.9321 174.452 144.7375 174.0819 145.951 173.0707 c
-f
-98.0873 199.4234 m
-96.4935 199.7421 94.5808 199.6359 93.5182 198.3608 c
-93.0932 197.9357 93.3057 196.7669 94.0495 196.4481 c
-95.0058 196.0231 95.6434 196.9794 95.8559 197.7232 c
-95.9622 198.042 96.0684 198.467 96.3872 198.5733 c
-96.8122 198.7858 97.4336 198.6093 97.8748 198.7858 c
-98.4061 198.9983 98.1936 199.4234 98.0873 199.4234 c
-f
-105.5994 199.1305 m
-106.2369 198.1742 107.4058 198.1742 108.3621 197.7492 c
-108.8934 197.5367 109.956 197.2179 110.2748 197.9617 c
-111.0186 200.2994 107.8346 199.5556 106.3432 199.5556 c
-106.0244 199.5556 105.2806 199.6618 105.5994 199.1305 c
-f
-121.1016 209.4441 m
-122.5269 209.3691 124.5182 206.7774 124.7124 203.8036 c
-124.7431 203.3336 125.9489 203.3623 126.2015 203.838 c
-126.8964 205.0116 126.4187 206.3414 126.0992 207.7666 c
-125.8436 208.9067 124.4549 210.1084 123.2792 210.6309 c
-122.4954 211.0229 121.7116 211.1535 120.6665 211.0229 c
-120.4052 210.8922 119.5182 209.5274 121.1016 209.4441 c
-f
-89.4377 210.1679 m
-88.1053 210.0672 88.5823 209.0454 88.6441 208.2274 C
-90.4855 207.1912 90.6621 204.8539 91.0372 203.0018 c
-91.0901 202.3005 92.1243 202.6138 92.2235 202.8563 c
-93.0524 204.3294 92.0434 206.0161 91.6772 207.7514 c
-91.3728 208.6687 90.7674 209.6807 89.8964 210.3201 c
-89.7707 210.4281 89.5546 210.1767 89.4377 210.1679 c
-f
-130.0182 242.7358 m
-128.7024 243.8124 126.6432 244.2358 126.0182 242.4858 c
-125.3932 240.9858 125.6432 239.4858 125.2682 237.8608 c
-125.2682 237.3608 124.6432 237.2358 124.2682 236.7358 c
-123.7682 236.1108 123.8932 235.3608 124.1432 235.1108 c
-125.3932 233.8608 127.6432 236.3608 129.2682 237.2358 c
-130.5182 237.9858 132.2682 236.9858 133.6432 237.8608 c
-134.0182 238.1108 134.1432 238.7358 133.7682 239.2358 c
-132.8932 240.7358 131.3932 241.6108 130.0182 242.7358 c
-f
-*U
-0 D
-168.2848 73.7743 m
-168.5016 74.6532 168.9399 76.3409 169.7682 76.6108 c
-170.0768 76.7112 170.3298 76.5961 170.4302 76.2876 c
-170.6103 75.7354 170.0485 72.6062 170.2761 71.9079 c
-170.5247 71.1445 171.3895 71.2465 172.023 71.4529 c
-173.4685 71.9237 174.2959 73.6304 174.2429 73.7927 c
-174.2219 73.8576 174.1949 73.8848 174.1464 73.869 c
-173.9189 73.7949 173.7245 73.013 173.0585 72.7962 c
-172.6525 72.6638 172.3397 72.7417 172.2023 73.164 c
-172.0594 73.6024 172.6218 76.8395 172.3784 77.5868 c
-172.1352 78.3338 171.3801 78.5011 170.698 78.2789 c
-169.1062 77.7604 168.4145 75.3615 168.0211 73.922 C
-167.9833 73.9276 L
-168.1952 77.2482 L
-166.2463 76.6135 L
-166.145 69.7539 L
-167.9804 70.3516 L
-168.0209 71.5506 168.0627 72.9115 168.2848 73.7743 c
-f
-176.8278 73.0178 m
-178.4034 73.5309 179.1132 75.4328 179.0445 75.644 c
-179.0232 75.709 178.9751 75.7472 178.9263 75.7312 c
-178.7964 75.6889 178.4863 74.6 177.593 74.309 c
-177.2032 74.182 176.8475 74.2816 176.7627 74.5416 c
-176.6359 74.9313 176.7162 75.6223 176.7309 76.1839 C
-176.7792 79.2896 L
-178.9394 79.993 L
-178.9284 80.7439 L
-176.7519 80.0351 L
-176.8533 82.9783 L
-174.9009 81.8573 L
-174.8182 75.3274 L
-174.8024 74.6037 174.7658 73.9989 174.8716 73.6741 c
-175.1466 72.8296 176.0159 72.7535 176.8278 73.0178 c
-f
-U
-%%PageTrailer
-gsave annotatepage grestore showpage
-%%Trailer
-Adobe_IllustratorA_AI3 /terminate get exec
-Adobe_customcolor /terminate get exec
-Adobe_cshow /terminate get exec
-Adobe_packedarray /terminate get exec
-%%EOF
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/texsis/base/texsis.1 b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/texsis/base/texsis.1
deleted file mode 100644
index 241319867b8..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/texsis/base/texsis.1
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,219 +0,0 @@
-.\" Unix Manual Pages for TeXsis, the TeX macros for physicists
-.\"======================================================================
-.\" (C) Copyright 1991,1994,2000 by Eric Myers and Frank Paige.
-.\" This file is a part of TeXsis. Distribution and/or modifications
-.\" are allowed under the terms of the LaTeX Project Public License (LPPL).
-.\" See the file COPYING or ftp://feynman.physics.lsa.umich.edu/texsis/LPPL
-.\"======================================================================
-.\" To view this file without the man command type:
-.\" 'nroff -man texsis.1 | more'
-.\" or, on some versions of man, just man -l texsis.1
-.\"
-.\" @(#) $Id: texsis.1,v 18.0 2000/05/17 00:52:43 myers Exp $
-.TH TEXSIS 1 "16 May 2000" "TeXsis 2.18" "User Manuals"
-.SH NAME
-TeXsis \- TeX macros for Physicists
-
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.B texsis
-[ filename ]
-
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.B TeXsis
-is a collection of
-.B TeX
-macros for typesetting physics documents such as papers and preprints,
-conference proceedings, books, theses, referee reports, letters, and
-memos.
-.B TeXsis
-macros provide automatic numbering of equations, automatic
-numbering and formatting of references, double column formatting, macros
-for making tables and figures, with or without captions, including
-tables with horizontal and vertical rules.
-.B TeXsis
-supports a wide variety of type sizes and a number of
-specialized document formats, and it even includes macros for making
-form letters for job applications or letters of recommendation.
-.PP
-TeXsis is an extension of "plain" TeX, so anything you know how to do
-in plain TeX you can do in TeXsis.
-TeXsis macro instructions are simply abbreviations for often used
-combinations of control sequences used to typeset physics documents.
-For more information about plain TeX see the man pages for
-.BR tex (1),
-and/or
-.I The TeXbook,
-by D.E. Knuth.
-.PP
-TeXsis is stored as a pre-loaded format so that it loads quickly (see
-the man pages for
-.BR initex (1),
-and/or "preloaded formats" in
-.I The TeXbook
-).
-To run TeXsis simply give the command
-.B texsis
-in place of the
-.B tex
-command, i.e.
-.br
-.sp
-.in +2
-.B texsis
-[ filename ]
-.in -2
-.br
-.sp
-where
-.I filename.tex
-is the name of a file containing TeX and/or TeXsis
-\\controlsequences.
-.PP
-TeXsis is initally in plain TeX mode, i.e. 10pt type and singlespaced,
-but the control sequence \\texsis selects 12pt type, doublespacing,
-and enables other useful features.
-Alternatively, \\paper turns on these features and sets things up to
-typeset a paper, \\thesis does the same for typesetting a thesis,
-\\letter is used to produce a letter using macros similar to those
-listed in the back of
-.I The TeXbook,
-\\memo gives a setup for producing memoranda, and so on.
-.PP
-A manual which describes all of the TeXsis macro instructions is
-available.
-It is written in TeXsis, so it serves as its own example of how to
-write a document with TeXsis.
-The source code is also heavily commented, so it is possible to
-extract useful macros from the source code and modify them to suit
-your own purposes.
-Provisions are made for local customization of TeXsis.
-In particular, the file
-.I TXSmods.tex,
-if it exists, is read from the current directory or from the path
-.B TEXINPUTS
-whenever TeXsis is started.
-You can therefore put your own custom macros for a given project in a
-directory and they will automatically be loaded when TeXsis is run
-from that directory.
-
-.SH INSTALLATION
-There is an appendix to the printed manual containing detailed
-installation instructions, but they are also provided in a form which
-can be processed by plain TeX, in the file
-.I Install.tex.
-
-.SH DIAGNOSTICS
-TeXsis informational messages are written to the terminal and the log
-file begining with `% '.
-Warning and error messages begin with `> '.
-
-.SH FILES
-The source files for TeXsis and the TeXsis manual are usually installed
-in the same place the rest of TeX is kept.
-Although this may vary from intallation to installation, it will
-generally include a root directory named
-.I texmf.
-Common examples are
-.I /usr/share/texmf/,
-.I /usr/lib/teTeX/texmf,
-or
-.I /usr/local/lib/texmf.
-Filenames here are relative to this
-.I texmf
-root directory.
-.br
-.TP 2.5i
-.I web2c/texsis.fmt
-TeXsis pre-loaded format.
-.TP
-.I tex/texsis/TXS*.tex
-TeXsis source code.
-.TP
-.I tex/texsis/*.txs
-"Style" files which can be read in at run time for special document
-formats.
-.TP
-.I doc/texsis/TXS*.doc
-Source for the printed TeXsis manual (written in TeXsis).
-.TP
-.I tex/texsis/TXSsite.tex
-Local site customization instructions
-(this is read only once, when the format file is created).
-.TP
-.I tex/texsis/TXSpatch.tex
-Run time patch file (like a system TeXsis.rc file, it is read
-every time TeXsis is run).
-.TP
-.I TXSmods.tex
-Run time init file (this is read every time TeXsis is run from the
-current directory, or from the search path in
-.B TEXINPUTS
-).
-
-.SH RESTRICTIONS
-Please note that TeXsis is designed to be completely compatible with
-plain TeX.
-As a result it cannot be compatible with LaTeX.
-.PP
-Having the full manual written in TeXsis can cause a problem if you
-don't have a version of TeXsis already running.
-To get around this you can run
-.I Manual.tex
-through plain TeX and it will load the TeXsis files before processing
-the manual.
-This takes longer, but not by much.
-
-
-.SH BUGS
-Please report bugs (or suggestions for improvements) to
-texsis@feynman.physics.lsa.umich.edu.
-.PP
-Patchs to correct small problems or make small improvements
-are available at
-
- ftp://feynman.physics.lsa.umich.edu/texsis/
-
-in the file
-.I TXSpatch.tex
-(If that file doesn't exist then there are no current patches.)
-
-.SH SEE ALSO
-.BR initex (1),
-.BR tex (1),
-.BR virtex (1)
-.br
-Donald E. Knuth,
-.I The TeXbook;
-.br
-Michael Doob,
-.I A Gentle Introduction to TeX.
-
-.SH AUTHORS
-Eric Myers <myers@umich.edu>
-.br
-Department of Physics
-.br
-University of Michigan
-.br
-Ann Arbor, Michigan USA
-.sp 1
-and
-.sp 1
-Frank E. Paige <paige@bnl.gov>
-.br
-Physics Department
-.br
-Brookhaven National Laboratory
-.br
-Upton, New York 11973 USA
-.fi
-
-.SH VERSION
-.de VL
-\\$2
-..
-Revision Number: 2.18/beta3
-.br
-Release Date: 16 May 2000
-
-.end
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/texsis/base/texsis.el b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/texsis/base/texsis.el
deleted file mode 100644
index 41e251e31b0..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/texsis/base/texsis.el
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,46 +0,0 @@
-;; file: texsis.el (TeXsis version 2.18)
-;; @(#) $Revision: 18.3 $ / $Date: 1998/09/26 23:57:01 $ / $Author: myers $
-;;======================================================================*
-; GNU emacs support for TeXsis (A TeX macro package for Physicists)
-;
-; The function texsis-mode makes TeXsis the version of TeX run by the
-; commands TeX-buffer and TeX-region. If the mode is not already
-; "TeX" then plain-tex-mode is invoked first.
-;
-; The function look-for-texsis looks for "\texsis" (or actually, just
-; the word "texsis") and sets texsis-mode if such is found. Put this
-; in your TeX-mode-hook to automatically set texsis-mode for TeXsis files.
-;
-; This file is a part of TeXsis.
-;
-; Eric Myers, University of Texas at Austin, 22 September 1990
-; (with help from lion@navier.stanford.edu -- thanks, leo.)
-;======================================================================*
-
-(defun look-for-texsis ()
- "search for \"texsis\" within first 256 characters of the file.
-If found, turn on texsis-mode."
- (goto-char (point-min))
- (if (search-forward "texsis" (min (point-max) (+ (point-min) 255)) t)
- (texsis-mode))
-)
-
-
-(defun texsis-mode () "TeX mode for processing TeXsis files."
- (if (or (equal mode-name "TeX") (equal mode-name "TeXsis") )
- (progn
- (setq TeX-command "texsis") ;; emacs 18.xx
- (setq tex-command "texsis") ;; emacs 19.xx
- (setq mode-name "TeXsis") ;; mode name is TeXsis
- (goto-char (point-min))
- (message "TeXsis mode.")
- )
-
- ;; if not a TeX mode then first invoke plain-tex-mode
-
- (progn
- (plain-tex-mode)
- (if (not (equal mode-name "TeXsis")) (texsis-mode) )
- )
- )
-) \ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/texsis/base/texsis.lsm b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/texsis/base/texsis.lsm
deleted file mode 100644
index 44dcd8d9f95..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/texsis/base/texsis.lsm
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,46 +0,0 @@
-Begin3
-Title: TeXsis - TeX Macros for Physicists
-
-Version: 2.18
-
-Description: A collection of TeX macros for typesetting many kinds
- of documents used by physicists, including research
- papers, preprints and ``e-prints,'' conference
- proceedings, theses, books, referee reports, letters,
- and memoranda. Provides for automatic numbering of
- equations, automatic numbering and formatting of
- references, double column formatting, macros for
- making tables and figures, with or without captions,
- and including tables with horizontal and vertical
- rules. Supports a wide variety of type sizes and a
- number of specialized document formats, and it even
- includes macros for making form letters for job
- applications or letters of recommendation.
-
-Keywords: plain tex, physics, macros
-
-Author: Eric Myers <myers@umich.edu> and
- Frank E. Paige <paige@bnl.gov>
-
-Maintained-by: texsis@umich.edu
-
-Primary-site: http://www.texsis.org/
-
-Alternate-site: mirrored by CTAN (Common TeX Archive Network)
-
-Platform: Any implementation of Plain TeX
-
-Copying-policy: Versions previous to 2.18 were marked "academic use only",
- but version 2.18 is covered by the LaTeX project
- Public License (LPPL)
-
-End3
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-